OSN 8800 6800 3800 V100R006C03 Installing, Operating and Maintaining Your Network(for Field Engineer) 01

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03

Installing, Operating and Maintaining Your Network(For Field Engineer) Issue

01

Date

2012-09-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Installing, Operating and Maintaining Your Network(For Field Engineer)

About This Document

About This Document

Related Versions Product Name

Version

OptiX OSN 8800

V100R006C03

OptiX OSN 6800

V100R006C03

OptiX OSN 3800

V100R006C03

iManager U2000

V100R006C00

iManager U2000 Web LCT

V100R006C00

Intended Audience This document provides guides to get the information about how to installing, perform initial commissioning the products. This document also provides guides for routine operation on site. This document is intended for: l

Field Engineer

Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol

Description

DANGER

WARNING Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.


ii


Symbol

About This Document

Description

CAUTION

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results.

TIP

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.

NOTE

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-09-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C03 This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


iii


Contents

Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Obtaining Latest Technical Documentation............................................................................1 2 Safety Operation Guide...............................................................................................................2 2.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols.................................................................................................................................3 2.2 Safe Usage of Fibers...........................................................................................................................................3 2.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on.....................................................................................................6 2.4 ESD.....................................................................................................................................................................6

3 Quick View of Product.................................................................................................................8 3.1 Product Appearance and Highlights.................................................................................................................10 3.2 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack and Power Requirement........................................................................................13 3.2.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack................................................................................................................13 3.2.1.1 Structure..........................................................................................................................................13 3.2.1.2 Slot Description..............................................................................................................................15 3.2.1.3 Management Interfaces...................................................................................................................16 3.2.1.4 Cross-Connect Capacities...............................................................................................................17 3.2.1.5 Fan..................................................................................................................................................18 3.2.1.6 Power Consumption.......................................................................................................................23 3.2.1.7 Power Requirement........................................................................................................................24 3.2.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack................................................................................................................27 3.2.2.1 Structure..........................................................................................................................................28 3.2.2.2 Slot Description..............................................................................................................................29 3.2.2.3 Management Interfaces of OptiX OSN 8800 T32..........................................................................31 3.2.2.4 Cross-Connect Capacities...............................................................................................................32 3.2.2.5 Fan..................................................................................................................................................32 3.2.2.6 Power Consumption.......................................................................................................................38 3.2.2.7 Power Requirement........................................................................................................................40 3.2.3 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack................................................................................................................43 3.2.3.1 Structure..........................................................................................................................................43 3.2.3.2 Slot Description..............................................................................................................................44 3.2.3.3 Management Interfaces of OptiX OSN 8800 T16..........................................................................45 3.2.3.4 Cross-Connect Capacities...............................................................................................................46 3.2.3.5 Fan..................................................................................................................................................46 Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


iv


Contents

3.2.3.6 Power Consumption.......................................................................................................................51 3.2.3.7 Power Requirement........................................................................................................................52 3.3 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack and Power Requirement........................................................................................55 3.3.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................55 3.3.2 Slot Description.......................................................................................................................................56 3.3.3 Cross-Connect Capacities........................................................................................................................57 3.3.4 Fan...........................................................................................................................................................59 3.3.5 Power Consumption................................................................................................................................64 3.3.6 Power Requirement.................................................................................................................................65 3.4 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis and Power Requirement.........................................................................................67 3.4.1 Chassis Structure.....................................................................................................................................67 3.4.2 Slot Description.......................................................................................................................................68 3.4.3 Fan...........................................................................................................................................................69 3.4.4 AC Power Consumption..........................................................................................................................73 3.4.5 AC Power Requirement...........................................................................................................................73 3.4.6 DC Power Consumption..........................................................................................................................75 3.4.7 DC Power Requirement...........................................................................................................................76 3.5 DC PDU............................................................................................................................................................78 3.5.1 TN16PDU/TN51PDU.............................................................................................................................78 3.5.2 TN11PDU................................................................................................................................................80 3.6 Frame................................................................................................................................................................82 3.6.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module...............................................................................................................82 3.6.2 CRPC Frame............................................................................................................................................86 3.6.3 Fiber Spooling Frame..............................................................................................................................87 3.7 Overview of Boards..........................................................................................................................................88 3.7.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions........................................................................................................89 3.7.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions..........................................................................................................89 3.7.1.2 Symbols on Boards.........................................................................................................................91 3.7.2 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category...........................................................................................................93 3.7.3 OptiX OSN 6800 Board Category.........................................................................................................100 3.7.4 OptiX OSN 3800 Board Category.........................................................................................................106 3.7.5 Optical Attenuator.................................................................................................................................110 3.7.5.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator .............................................................................................................110 3.7.5.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator......................................................................................111 3.8 Quick Reference Table of the Units...............................................................................................................111 3.8.1 Specification of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards .......................................................................111 3.8.1.1 OTUs and Tributary Boards Specification on the Client Side.....................................................111 3.8.1.2 OTUs and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side.............................................................148 3.8.2 Specification of Optical Amplifying Unit.............................................................................................165 3.8.3 Insertion Loss Specifications of Boards................................................................................................167 3.8.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio........................................................................................................170 3.8.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards, and Line Boards.............................................................171 Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


v


Contents

3.8.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards, and Line Boards.......................................................177 3.8.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards ............................................................181 3.8.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards............................................183 3.9 Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid Slots of Boards..............................................................................187 3.9.1 Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of Boards in the OptiX OSN 8800.........................................187 3.9.2 Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of Boards in the OptiX OSN 6800.........................................238 3.9.3 Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of Boards in the OptiX OSN 3800.........................................267 3.10 Housekeeping Alarms...................................................................................................................................288 3.10.1 OptiX OSN 8800 Housekeeping Alarm Interfaces.............................................................................288 3.10.2 OptiX OSN 6800 Housekeeping Alarm Interfaces.............................................................................292 3.10.3 OptiX OSN 3800 Housekeeping Alarm Interfaces.............................................................................294 3.11 Network Management..................................................................................................................................297 3.11.1 Introduction to Network Cables..........................................................................................................298 3.11.2 Management Connections and Interfaces of OptiX OSN 8800 T32/T64............................................299 3.11.2.1 Interfaces....................................................................................................................................299 3.11.2.2 Connections................................................................................................................................307 3.11.3 Management Connections and Interfaces of OptiX OSN 8800 T16...................................................308 3.11.3.1 Interfaces....................................................................................................................................309 3.11.3.2 Connections................................................................................................................................316 3.11.4 Management Connections and Interfaces of OptiX OSN 6800...........................................................317 3.11.4.1 Interfaces....................................................................................................................................318 3.11.4.2 Connections................................................................................................................................332 3.11.5 Management Connections and Interfaces of OptiX OSN 3800...........................................................333 3.11.5.1 Interfaces....................................................................................................................................333 3.11.5.2 Connections................................................................................................................................340 3.11.6 Management Connections among OptiX OSN 8800&6800&3800....................................................342

4 Node Configurations................................................................................................................345 4.1 OTN Typical Configuration...........................................................................................................................346 4.1.1 OTM/Back to Back OTM......................................................................................................................346 4.1.1.1 Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................346 4.1.1.2 Subrack Layout.............................................................................................................................347 4.1.1.3 Subrack Connections....................................................................................................................348 4.1.2 1 Degree ROADM.................................................................................................................................349 4.1.2.1 Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................350 4.1.2.2 Subrack Layout.............................................................................................................................351 4.1.2.3 Subrack Connections....................................................................................................................352 4.1.3 2 Degree ROADM.................................................................................................................................353 4.1.3.1 Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................353 4.1.3.2 Subrack Layout.............................................................................................................................355 4.1.3.3 Subrack Connections....................................................................................................................356 4.1.4 3 Degree ROADM.................................................................................................................................357 4.1.4.1 Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................357 Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


vi


Contents

4.1.4.2 Subrack Layout.............................................................................................................................360 4.1.4.3 Subrack Connections....................................................................................................................361 4.1.5 4 Degree ROADM.................................................................................................................................362 4.1.5.1 Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................362 4.1.5.2 Subrack Layout.............................................................................................................................365 4.1.5.3 Subrack Connections....................................................................................................................366 4.1.6 OLA.......................................................................................................................................................367 4.1.6.1 Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................367 4.1.6.2 Subrack Layout.............................................................................................................................368 4.1.6.3 Subrack Connections....................................................................................................................369 4.1.7 Regenerator............................................................................................................................................370 4.1.7.1 Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................370 4.1.7.2 Subrack Layout.............................................................................................................................371 4.1.7.3 Subrack Connections....................................................................................................................372 4.1.8 FOADM.................................................................................................................................................373 4.1.8.1 Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................374 4.1.8.2 Subrack Layout.............................................................................................................................374 4.1.8.3 Subrack Connections....................................................................................................................375 4.1.9 CWDM..................................................................................................................................................376 4.1.9.1 Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................376 4.1.9.2 Subrack Layout.............................................................................................................................377 4.1.9.3 Subrack Connections....................................................................................................................378 4.2 OCS Typical Configuration............................................................................................................................379

5 Quick Installation Guide.........................................................................................................381 6 Performing Initial Web LCT Commissioning.....................................................................382 6.1 Initial Commissioning Flow...........................................................................................................................384 6.2 Connecting NEs to the Web LCT...................................................................................................................385 6.2.1 Installing the Web LCT.........................................................................................................................385 6.2.2 Connecting to NEs.................................................................................................................................387 6.2.3 Logging In to the Web LCT..................................................................................................................387 6.3 Configuring NE Attributes.............................................................................................................................388 6.3.1 Searching and Adding NEs....................................................................................................................388 6.3.2 Logging In to an NE..............................................................................................................................390 6.3.3 Setting NE ID........................................................................................................................................390 6.3.4 Setting NE IP Addresses........................................................................................................................390 6.3.5 Configuring Master-Slave Subracks......................................................................................................391 6.4 Checking Board Slots.....................................................................................................................................392 6.5 Configuring the TN11TOM Board On-site....................................................................................................393 6.5.1 Working Mode and Signal Flow...........................................................................................................393 6.5.2 Scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (cascading).....................................................................................394 6.5.3 Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading)..............................................................................397 6.5.4 Scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (non-cascading)..............................................................................402 Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


vii


Contents

6.5.5 Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading).......................................................................405 6.5.6 Scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical regeneration board)................................................407 6.6 Configuring the TN52TOM Board On-site....................................................................................................412 6.6.1 Working Mode and Signal Flow...........................................................................................................412 6.6.2 Scenario 2: ODU0 tributary-line mode (cascading)..............................................................................414 6.6.3 Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading)..............................................................................417 6.6.4 Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (non-cascading).......................................................................420 6.6.5 Scenario 7: ODU1 mode (non-cascading).............................................................................................424 6.6.6 Scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (non-cascading).............................427 6.6.7 Scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (non-cascading).......430 6.6.8 Scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading).....................................................................435 6.6.9 Scenario 11: ODU1_ODU0 mode (non-cascading)..............................................................................441 6.6.10 Scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (non-cascading)......................................444 6.7 Configuring the OA Boards............................................................................................................................447 6.8 Checking NE Communication Status.............................................................................................................448 6.9 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board............................................................................................449 6.10 Exiting the Web LCT...................................................................................................................................450

7 Routine Operation On-site......................................................................................................451 7.1 Getting to Know Indicators............................................................................................................................452 7.1.1 Cabinet Indicators..................................................................................................................................452 7.1.2 Subrack Indicator...................................................................................................................................452 7.1.3 Chassis Indicators..................................................................................................................................453 7.1.4 Board Indicators....................................................................................................................................453 7.1.5 Fan Indicator..........................................................................................................................................457 7.1.6 PIU Indicator.........................................................................................................................................458 7.2 Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter.............................................................................458 7.3 Checking Fiber Jumpers by Using an Optical Power Meter..........................................................................459 7.4 Inserting and Removing Fiber Jumpers..........................................................................................................461 7.4.1 Inserting the LC/PC Fiber Connector....................................................................................................462 7.4.2 Removing the LC/PC Fiber Connector.................................................................................................463 7.4.3 Inserting the LSH/APC Fiber Connector...............................................................................................465 7.4.4 Removing the LSH/APC Fiber Connector............................................................................................466 7.4.5 Inserting the FC/PC Fiber Connector....................................................................................................468 7.4.6 Removing the FC/PC Fiber Connector..................................................................................................469 7.4.7 Inserting the SC/PC Fiber Connector....................................................................................................470 7.4.8 Removing the SC/PC Fiber Connector..................................................................................................471 7.5 Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors..................................................................................472 7.5.1 Overview...............................................................................................................................................473 7.5.2 Protection of Optical Connectors..........................................................................................................474 7.5.3 Tools, Equipment, and Materials...........................................................................................................475 7.5.4 Inspecting Optical Connectors...............................................................................................................477 7.5.5 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Cartridge Cleaners..............................................................480 Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


viii


Contents

7.5.6 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue.........................................................................483 7.5.7 Cleaning Optical Adapters Using Optical Cleaning Sticks...................................................................485 7.6 Performing Hardware Loopback....................................................................................................................487 7.7 Reset a Board..................................................................................................................................................489 7.7.1 Performing a Warm Reset on the Board................................................................................................489 7.7.2 Performing a Cold Reset on the Board..................................................................................................490

8 Parts Replacement.....................................................................................................................492 8.1 General Guide for Replacing a Board............................................................................................................494 8.1.1 Prerequisite............................................................................................................................................495 8.1.2 Impact on the System............................................................................................................................495 8.1.3 Tools, Equipment, and Materials...........................................................................................................497 8.1.4 Precautions.............................................................................................................................................497 8.1.5 Procedure for Replacing a Board...........................................................................................................500 8.1.6 Substitution Relationships.....................................................................................................................506 8.1.6.1 Optical Transponder Boards.........................................................................................................506 8.1.6.2 Tributary and Line Boards............................................................................................................509 8.1.6.3 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Boards...........................................................................512 8.1.6.4 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Boards................................................................................514 8.1.6.5 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Boards.......................................................514 8.1.6.6 Optical Amplifier Boards.............................................................................................................514 8.1.6.7 Optical Supervisory Channel Boards...........................................................................................515 8.1.6.8 Optical Protection Boards.............................................................................................................515 8.1.6.9 Spectrum Analyzer Boards...........................................................................................................515 8.1.6.10 Variable Optical Attenuator Boards...........................................................................................515 8.1.6.11 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Boards.....................................................................515 8.1.6.12 Clock Board................................................................................................................................515 8.2 Replacing an SCC Board with One of the Same TNxx Version....................................................................516 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper on the SCC..............................................................................................................517 8.2.2 Replacing the Protected SCC in a Master Subrack...............................................................................524 8.2.3 Replacing the Unprotected SCC in a Master Subrack...........................................................................527 8.2.3.1 Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data from the NMS (NE Is Unreachable)............528 8.2.3.2 Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data from a CF Card (NE Is Unreachable)..........534 8.2.3.3 Replacing the SCC After Configuring SCC 1+1 Protection........................................................540 8.2.3.4 Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data to the NMS (NE Is Reachable)....................543 8.2.3.5 Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data to a CF Card (NE Is Reachable)..................550 8.2.4 Replacing the SCC Board in a Slave Subrack.......................................................................................557 8.3 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different TNxx Version................................................................559 8.3.1 Substitution Relationships.....................................................................................................................559 8.3.2 Replacing the Protected SCC Board in a Master Subrack.....................................................................560 8.3.3 Replacing the Unprotected SCC Board in a Master Subrack................................................................564 8.3.3.1 Replacing the SCC with the Database Backed Up to the NMS...................................................564 8.3.3.2 Replacing the SCC with the Database Backed Up to a CF Card.................................................572 Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


ix


Contents

8.3.3.3 Replacing the Board After Configuring SCC 1+1 Protection......................................................579 8.3.4 Replacing the SCC in a Slave Subrack..................................................................................................582 8.4 Replacing the TN16XCH Board.....................................................................................................................585 8.4.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the TN16XCH Board............................................................................585 8.4.2 Replacing the TN16XCH Board in a Master Subrack..........................................................................587 8.4.3 Replacing the TN16XCH Board in a Slave Subrack.............................................................................590 8.5 Replacing the Cross-Connect Board...............................................................................................................592 8.5.1 Substitution Relationships.....................................................................................................................592 8.5.2 Under Board 1+1 Protection..................................................................................................................593 8.5.3 Under No Protection..............................................................................................................................595 8.6 Replacing the Raman Amplifier Board..........................................................................................................596 8.7 Replacing the PID Board................................................................................................................................598 8.7.1 Replacing the ENQ2/NPO2/NPO2E Board..........................................................................................598 8.7.1.1 Under ODUk SNCP Protection....................................................................................................598 8.7.1.2 Under No Protection.....................................................................................................................602 8.7.2 Replacing the PQ2 Sub-board...............................................................................................................605 8.7.2.1 Under ODUk SNCP Protection....................................................................................................605 8.7.2.2 Under No Protection.....................................................................................................................607 8.8 Replacing the AUX Board..............................................................................................................................609 8.9 Replacing the DCM........................................................................................................................................614 8.10 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module.....................................................................................................615 8.11 Replacing the EFI Frame..............................................................................................................................617 8.12 Replacing the EFI Board..............................................................................................................................619 8.13 Replacing the PIU Board..............................................................................................................................622 8.14 Replacing the Power Switch on the DC Power Distribution Box................................................................624 8.15 Replacing the Fan Tray Assembly................................................................................................................627 8.16 Replacing the Air Filter................................................................................................................................627 8.17 Replacing SDI Components.........................................................................................................................630 8.18 Replacing the Subrack..................................................................................................................................631

9 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of the DWDM System ...........................639 10 Nominal Central Wavelengths of the CWDM System ...................................................641

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


x


1

1 Obtaining Latest Technical Documentation

Obtaining Latest Technical Documentation This section explains how to obtain the latest technical documentations. You can directly obtain the latest technical documentation from Huawei's technical support website to help analyze and locate faults. Website: http://support.huawei.com

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


1


2

2 Safety Operation Guide

Safety Operation Guide

About This Chapter This section describes the safety operation guidelines. It contains the personal safety regulations and equipment operating regulations. These regulations must be followed to prevent personal injuries or damages to the equipment during operations. 2.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols During equipment installation and maintenance, observe the precautions indicated by the alarm and safety symbols to help prevent personal injury or equipment damage. 2.2 Safe Usage of Fibers This section describes how to safely use fibers. 2.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on This section describes the requirements for performing operations on the equipment when the power is on. 2.4 ESD During installation and maintenance, follow antistatic procedures to prevent equipment damage:

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


2



2.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols During equipment installation and maintenance, observe the precautions indicated by the alarm and safety symbols to help prevent personal injury or equipment damage. Table 2-1 describes the alarm and safety symbols on the WDM equipment. Table 2-1 Symbols on the WDM equipment Symbol

Describes ESD protection symbol. You must wear an ESD wrist strap or glove to avoid damage caused by electrostatic discharge to boards.

Laser level symbol. Indicates the laser level and warns that laser beams can cause injuries to eyes.

CAUTION

HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

Grounding symbol. Indicates the position of the grounding point. Regular cleaning symbol. Warns you to regularly clean the air filter. Fan warning symbol. Warns you not to touch the fan blade until the fan stops moving.

2.2 Safe Usage of Fibers This section describes how to safely use fibers.

DANGER Laser beams on the optical interface board or inside the optical fiber can cause damage to your eyes. When installing and maintaining optical interface boards and optical fibers, avoid directly exposing your eyes to the laser beams originating from the optical interfaces or fiber connectors.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


3



Protection of Optical Connectors All idle optical connectors for fiber jumpers and optical ports on the optical interface boards must be covered with protective caps. The optical ports on the replaced boards must be promptly covered with protective caps. In addition, properly store these boards in their packages to keep the optical ports clean. Recommended protective caps are shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Recommended protective caps

Protective caps that are not recommended are shown in Figure 2-2. Figure 2-2 Protective caps that are not recommended

NOTE

Do not use protective caps that are made of soft rubber. These caps tend to collect dust and other material. These caps are hard to clean and do not resist the build-up of dust.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


4



Connecting Fibers

CAUTION When applying a physical fiber loopback between two optical ports, increase the attenuation to avoid equipment damage in case the laser optical power is excessively high. For boards that have the capability of having optical attenuators added, add an optical attenuator at the Rx optical port rather than at the Tx optical port. Insert fibers into optical connectors carefully when connecting fibers. If the optical power is excessively high, add a fixed optical attenuator before the optical port to avoid damages to the device caused by a high input of optical power.

DANGER Before removing or inserting fibers from/into the CRPC board, shut down the pump laser to avoid injuries due to the high optical power from the laser. The CRPC board has specific requirements on fiber loss of the line nearby. For details, see Table 2-2. Table 2-2 Fiber connection requirements of the CRPC Distance

Loss (dB)

Connector (piece)

0–10 (km)

≤0.1

0

10–20 (km)

≤0.2

0

NOTE

The ODF has only one connector for connecting to the CRPC board. All the other fiber connection points must be spliced.

Cleaning Fibers

CAUTION If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flanges for each external fiber must be cleaned before the fibers from the ODF are inserted into the optical ports on the boards in the equipment. The fiber connectors and optical ports for the lasers must be cleaned by using special cleaning tools and materials. Some common cleaning tools are: Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


5



l

Cleaning solvent. Isoamylol is preferred, propyl can be used (alcohol or formalin is never used)

l

Non-woven lens tissue

l

Special compressed gas

l

Dust-free cotton stick

l

Special cleaning roll used along with cleaning solvent, either isoamylol or propyl

l

Fiberscope

For details on how to clean fibers, see the Supporting Tasks.

2.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on This section describes the requirements for performing operations on the equipment when the power is on. Follow these requirements when performing operations on the equipment when the power is on: l

Do not install or disassemble equipment when the power is on.

l

Do not install or remove power cables when the power is on.

l

Before connecting a cable, ensure that the cable and cable label comply with installation requirements.

2.4 ESD During installation and maintenance, follow antistatic procedures to prevent equipment damage: l

Always wear an ESD wrist strap during the operation.

l

Check that the equipment is securely grounded.

CAUTION Wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap whenever you touch equipment or boards. Make sure that the wrist strap touches your skin. Insert the ESD strap connector into the ESD socket of the equipment. For information about how to wear an ESD wrist strap, see Figure 2-3.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


6



Figure 2-3 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

NOTE

Insert the connector of the ESD strap into the equipment port. For details, see the Quick Installation Guide.

When you are following antistatic procedures, take the following precautions: l

Check the validity and functionality of the wrist strap. Its resistance value must be between 0.75 mega ohm to 10 mega ohm. If the wrist strap validity period (usually two years) has expired, or if the resistance value fails to meet requirements, replace it with a wrist strap that provides the required resistance value.

l

Do not touch a board with your clothing. Clothing generates static electricity that is not protected by the wrist strap.

l

Wear an ESD wrist strap and place the board on an ESD pad when you replace boards or chips. Use ESD tweezers or extraction tools to replace chips. Do not touch chips, circuits, or pins with your bare hands.

l

Keep the boards and other ESD-sensitive parts you are installing in ESD bags. Place the removed boards and components on an ESD pad or ESD material. Do not use non-antistatic materials such as white foams, common plastic bags, or paper bags to pack boards, and do not let these materials touch the boards.

l

Wear an ESD wrist strap when operating the ports of boards because they are also ESDsensitive. Discharge the static electricity of cables and protective sleeves before you connect them to the ports.

l

Keep packing materials (such as, ESD boxes and bags) available in the equipment room for packing boards in the future.

ESD complies with IEC Publication 1000, EN 55022, EN 55024, IEC 61000 and GR-1089CORE.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


7


3

3 Quick View of Product

Quick View of Product

About This Chapter

3.1 Product Appearance and Highlights There are three types of the OptiX OSN 8800. The three types use the same software and hardware platforms and therefore they share most of the boards. However, each of them has its own highlights that address diverse network requirements.OptiX OSN 6800 applies to the convergence layer and the backbone layer with small or medium capacity.OptiX OSN 3800 applies to the access layer. 3.2 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack and Power Requirement 3.3 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack and Power Requirement 3.4 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis and Power Requirement 3.5 DC PDU There are four types of power distribution units (PDUs): TN16, TN51, TN11 and PDU (DPD63-8-8). The availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. 3.6 Frame 3.7 Overview of Boards 3.8 Quick Reference Table of the Units Quick reference tables include those for specifications of optical transponder units, optical amplifier units and other boards, and also the functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards. 3.9 Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid Slots of Boards This chapter describes the power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards. 3.10 Housekeeping Alarms Users can configure the severities for the eight alarm inputs to remotely monitor the alarms of an external system. The alarms can be sent to a centralized alarm management system for management. In addition, two housekeeping control interfaces are available for remotely controlling external equipment such as air conditioners, fans, and electric generators. 3.11 Network Management Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


8



This chapter describes the network management system, as well as inter-NE and intra-NE communication management.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


9



3.1 Product Appearance and Highlights There are three types of the OptiX OSN 8800. The three types use the same software and hardware platforms and therefore they share most of the boards. However, each of them has its own highlights that address diverse network requirements.OptiX OSN 6800 applies to the convergence layer and the backbone layer with small or medium capacity.OptiX OSN 3800 applies to the access layer. Table 3-1 describes the product appearance and highlights for OptiX OSN 8800. Table 3-2 describes the product appearance and highlights for OptiX OSN 6800. Table 3-3 describes the product appearance and highlights for OptiX OSN 3800. Table 3-1 Product appearance and highlights for OptiX OSN 8800 Specifications

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

Dimensions (mm)

498 (W) x 295 (D) x 450 (H)

498 (W) x 295 (D) x 900 (H)

498 (W) x 580 (D) x 900 (H)

Number of slots for service boards

16

32

64

1.28T ODUk(k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, flex)

2.56T ODUk(k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, flex)

Product appearance

Swit ch

Optical

1 to 9-degree ROADM

Electrical

640G ODUk(k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, flex)

Wavelength (max)

DWDM: 80-ch, CWDM: 8-ch

Wavelength range

DWDM: 1529.16 nm to 1560.61 nm (Band-C, ITU-T G.694.1) CWDM: 1471 nm to 1611 nm (Band S+C+L, ITU-T G.694.2)

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Max. rate per channel

100Gbit/s (OTU4)

Service types supported

SDH, SONET, Ethernet, SAN, OTN, Video

Line rate

2.5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, 100 Gbit/s

Max. capacity per PID group

200 Gbit/s


10



Specifications

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

Topology

Point-to-point, chain, star, ring, ring-with-chain, tangent ring, intersecting ring and mesh

Red unda ncy and Prot ectio n

Network level protection (OTN)

Optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, client 1+1 protection, ODUk SNCP, tributary SNCP, SW SNCP, ODUk SPRing protection, OWSP

Network level protection (OCS)

-

Linear MSP, MSP ring, transoceanic MSP ring, SNCP, SNCTP

Network level protection (Ethernet)

DBPS, DLAG, ERPS, LAG, LPT, MC-LAG, MSTP, STP and RSTP, VLAN SNCP


Equipment level protection

Power redundancy, fan redundancy, cross-connect board redundancy, system control and communication board redundancy, centralized clock board redundancy

Optical power management

ALS, AGC, ALC, APE, IPA, OPA

Synchronization

l Synchronous Ethernet clock

OptiX OSN 8800 T64


l IEEE 1588v2 l 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz (with the SSM function), ITU-T G.703compliant external clock source l External time source (1PPS+TOD) ASON

Optical-Layer ASON and electrical-Layer ASON

Table 3-2 Product appearance and highlights for OptiX OSN 6800 Specifications

OptiX OSN 6800

Product appearance

Dimensions (mm)

497 (W) x 295 (D) x 400 (H)


17

Switch

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Optical

1 to 9-degree ROADM


11


Specifications Electrical


OptiX OSN 6800 l 180G GE l 360G 10GE/ODUk(k=1, 2, 2e)

Wavelength (max)


Wavelength range

DWDM: 1529.16 nm to 1560.61 nm (Band-C, ITU-T G. 694.1) CWDM: 1471 nm to 1611 nm (Band S+C+L, ITU-T G. 694.2)


100 Gbit/s (OTU4)

Max. distance

Multi-span transmission: 32 span x 22 dB/span (10G), 25 span x 22 dB/span (40G), 14 span x 22 dB/span (100G) without electrical regeneration Ultra-long single-span transmission: 1 span x 81 dB/span (10G), 1 span x 71 dB/span (40G)



Line rate

2.5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, 100 Gbit/s

Max. capacity per PID group

120 Gbit/s

Topology


Redundancy and Protection

Network level protection (OTN)

Optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, client 1+1 protection, ODUk SNCP, tributary SNCP, SW SNCP, MS SNCP, ODUk SPRing protection, OWSP, board-Level protection

Network level protection (Ethernet)

DBPS, DLAG, ERPS, LAG, LPT, MSTP, STP and RSTP, VLAN SNCP

Equipment level protection

Power redundancy, fan redundancy, cross-connect board redundancy, system control and communication board redundancy

Optical power management

ALS, AGC, ALC, APE, IPA, OPA

Synchronization

l Synchronous Ethernet clock l IEEE 1588v2 l 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz (with the SSM function), ITU-T G.703-compliant external clock source l External time source (1PPS+TOD)

ASON

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Optical-Layer ASON


12



Table 3-3 Product appearance and highlights for OptiX OSN 3800 Specifications

OptiX OSN 3800

Product appearance Dimensions (mm)

436 (W) x 295 (D) x 134 (H)


4

Wavelength (max)


Wavelength range

DWDM: 1529.16 nm to 1560.61 nm (Band-C, ITU-T G. 694.1) CWDM: 1471 nm to 1611 nm (Band S+C+L, ITU-T G. 694.2)


10 Gbit/s (OTU2)

Max. distance

Multi-span transmission: 32 span x 22 dB/span (10G), without electrical regeneration Ultra-long single-span transmission: 1 span x 81 dB/span (10G)



Line rate

2.5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s

Topology


Redundancy and Protection

Optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, client 1+1 protection, ODUk SNCP, tributary SNCP, SW SNCP, MS SNCP, OWSP, board-Level protection

Network level protection

Equipment level protection Optical power management

DBPS, DLAG, ERPS, LAG, LPT, STP and RSTP, VLAN SNCP Power redundancy, fan redundancy, system control and communication board redundancy ALS, AGC, ALC, IPA

3.2 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack and Power Requirement 3.2.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack 3.2.1.1 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Each subrack has independent power supply. Figure 3-1 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


13



Figure 3-1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack structure

3

1

6

2

5 3 4

1. Board area

2. Fiber cabling area

3. Fan tray assembly

4. Air filter

5. Fiber spool

6. Mounting ear

l

Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 93 slots are available.

l

Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack.

l

Fan tray assembly: Four fan tray assemblies are available for this subrack. Each fan tray assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and related information. NOTE

For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 3.2.1.5 Fan.

l

Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning.

l

Fiber spool: Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack.

l

Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.

Table 3-4 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Item

Specification

Dimensions

498 mm (W) × 580 mm (D) × 900 mm (H) (19.6 in. (W) × 22.8 in. (D) × 35.4 in. (H)) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14



Item

Specification

Weight (empty subracka)

65 kg (143 lb.)

a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly or air filter is installed.

3.2.1.2 Slot Description The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack provide 93 slots. Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack are shown in Figure 3-2. Figure 3-2 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack Front

Back

IU91

PIU

PIU

EFI2

IU69

IU70

IU71

IU 19

IU 23

IU 5

IU 6

IU 25

IU 7

IU75

IU 26

IU 27

IU 28

EF I1 IU 76

IU 77

IU 29

IU 30

PIU

PIU

PIU

PIU

STI

IU78

IU79

IU80

IU81

IU82

IU 31

IU 32

IU 33

IU 34

IU 53

IU 54

IU 55

IU 56

IU 57

IU 58

IU 83

IU 59

IU 84

STG

IU85

IU86

IU 60

IU 9

IU 10

IU 43

IU 44

IU 8

IU 11

IU 12

IU 13

IU 14

IU 15

IU 16

IU 17

IU 18

IU 35

IU 36

IU 37

IU 38

IU 39

IU 40

IU 41

IU 42

IU90

l

SCC

Cross-connect board

IU 4

IU 24

IU74

A U X

Cross-connect board

IU 3

IU 22

IU 73

STG

Cross-connect board

IU 2

IU 21

IU 72

IU93

SCC

Cross-connect board

IU 1

IU 20

A U X

ATE IU87

PIU

PIU

IU88

IU89

IU 61

IU 62

IU 63

IU 64

IU 65

IU 66

IU 67

IU 68

IU 45

IU 46

IU 47

IU 48

IU 49

IU 50

IU 51

IU 52

IU92

: houses service boards and supports service cross-connections.

l

IU9 and IU43 are reserved for the cross-connect board (XCT).

l

IU10 and IU44 are reserved for the cross-connect board (SXM/SXH).

l

IU73, IU77 and IU84 are reserved for future use.

l

The following table provides the slots for housing active and standby boards of the subrack.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Board

Slots for Active and Standby Boards

PIU

IU69 & IU78, IU70 & IU79, IU80 & IU88, and IU81 &IU89

SCC

IU74 & IU85

STG

IU75 & IU86

SXM/SXH

IU10 & IU44

XCT

IU9 & IU43 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15



3.2.1.3 Management Interfaces The subrack provides various communication and maintenance interfaces for the management and maintenance purposes, as shown in Table 3-5. Table 3-5 Description of interfaces in the interface area Boar d

ATE

ALMI1

ALMI2

ALMO1

ALMO3

TN51 ATE

Front Panel

ALMO4

ALMO2

TN51 EFI1

SERIAL

EFI2

ETH1

LAMP1

ETH2

LAMP2 NM_ETH1

ETH3

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Interfaces

Note

Typical Power Consumption at 25°C (77°F): 0.3 W

Housekeeping alarm input interface: ALMI1– ALMI2

For detailed information, refer to 3.10.1 OptiX OSN 8800 Housekeeping Alarm Interfaces.

Maximum Power Consumption at 55°C (131°F): 0.3 W

Housekeeping alarm output interface: ALMO1– ALMO4

Typical Power Consumption at 25°C (77°F): 5 W

EFI1

NM_ETH2

TN51 EFI2

Power Consumption

Network management interface: Maximum Power NM_ETH2 Consumption at Management serial 55°C (131°F): 7 interface: SERIAL W

For detailed information, refer to Management Connections and Interfaces of OptiX OSN 8800 T32/T64.


Subrack alarm cascading interfaces: LAMP1, LAMP2


Maximum Power Consumption at 55°C (131°F): 15 W

Network management interface: NM_ETH1/ETH1/ ETH2/ETH3


16


Boar d TN52 STI

STI

CLK2

CLK1

TOD2

TOD1

TNL 1STI

Front Panel


CLK1

TOD2

TOD1

PHONE

F1

Interfaces

Note


Clock signal interface: CLK1, CLK2

Provides clock and time inputs and outputs. The interfaces connect the board to the STG board through the backplane to achieve NElevel clock and time synchronization.




Time signal interface: TOD1, TOD2

Time signal Maximum Power interface: TOD01, Consumption at TOD02 55°C (131°F): 1.5 W

STI

CLK2

Power Consumption

Orderwire phone interface: PHONE


F1 interface: F1

3.2.1.4 Cross-Connect Capacities The cross-connect capacity of a slot in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack vary according to the type of cross-connect board installed in the slot. OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks can cross-connect ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODU3, ODUflex, VC-4, VC-3, and VC-12 granularities at the same time. Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, and IU45-IU68 provide the same cross-connect capacity. As shown in Table 3-6. Table 3-6 Cross-connect capacity of OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

CrossConnect Board

Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Each Slot ODUka

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12c

ODUka

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12

SXH

N/A

20 Gbit/s

N/A

N/A

1.28 Tbit/s

N/A

SXM

N/A

20 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/s

N/A

1.28 Tbit/s

80 Gbit/s

SXH +XCTb

40 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/s

N/A

2.56 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

N/A

Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Subrack


17



CrossConnect Board

Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Each Slot


ODUka

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12c

ODUka

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12

SXM +XCTb

40 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/s

2.56 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

80 Gbit/s

a: k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex. b: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks must be configured with both the SXH and XCT boards or the SXM and XCT boards to cross-connect ODUk granularities. c: All service slots share a bandwidth of 20 Gbit/s.

3.2.1.5 Fan Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has four fan tray assemblies, each of which includes three independent fans. In each subrack, the lower fan tray assembly has an air filter, but the upper fan tray assembly does not. The user can withdraw, clean, and replace each air filter.

Version Description Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN51.

Functions and Features Table 3-7 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly. Table 3-7 Functions Function

Description

Basic function

Dissipates the heat generated by a network element (NE), so that the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature range.

Commissioning control

l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed regulation, depending on the subrack temperature. l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan speed.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Section-dependent heat dissipation

Each subrack is divided into six sections to provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each section is independently regulated.

Hot swapping

Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly.

Alarming

Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information.

Status checking

Checks and reports on the fan status.


18



Working Principle A fan tray assembly inside a subrack ventilates the subrack to ensure that the subrack works effectively at an appropriate temperature. The fan tray assembly is located in the lower portion of a subrack. It draws in air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Figure 3-3 shows how ventilation is performed in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Figure 3-3 shows how ventilation is performed in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Figure 3-3 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system Air outlet

Fan tray assembly

Board Area

Fan tray assembly

Optical fiber laying area

Air inlet

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 3-8. The sectiondependent speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. The Auto Speed Mode is recommended.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


19



Table 3-8 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode

Description

Auto Speed Mode

Fan speed in each section is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the section that the fans are targeted for. l Lower than 25°C (77°F): the fans run at low speed. l Higher than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at high speed. l 25°C to 45°C (77°F to 113° F): The fans automatically adjust their rotation speeds. This mode can reduce noise and is power-saving. Fan speed in each section is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signal is abnormal. If one of the fans in one section fails, the other fans in this section run at full speed. When the user queries the fan speed using the NMS, the highest fan speed among all sections is displayed. In other words, if the fans in one section rotate at high speed, the NMS displays the fan speed as high speed in the query result. Six fan speeds are supported: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. In this mode, the user manually sets the fan speed and fans in all sections run at the same speed. The user cannot independently set the fan speed for a specific section.

Adjustable Speed Mode

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has two sides. Each side has six sections. See Figure 3-4. Figure 3-4 Section-dependent heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack IU91

FAN2

FAN1

IU69

IU19 IU20

IU70

IU21

IU71

IU22 IU23

IU24

IU72

IU74

IU73

IU25 IU26

IU1

IU2

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU6

IU7

FAN3

IU75

IU27

IU9

IU76

IU77

IU28 IU29

IU30

IU78

IU31

FAN8

FAN7

IU80

IU79

IU32 IU33

IU34

IU53 IU54

IU81

IU55

IU82

IU56 IU57

Partition 1

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

IU84

IU85

IU59 IU60

FAN9

IU86

IU87

IU61

IU62 IU63

IU45

IU46

IU88

IU89

IU64

IU65

IU66 IU67

IU68

IU47 IU48

IU49

IU50 IU51

IU52

IU43 IU44

IU11

IU12

IU13 IU14

IU15

IU16 IU17

IU18

IU35 IU36

IU37 IU38

IU39 IU40

IU50 FAN4

IU58

IU83

IU10

IU8

IU93

Back

Front

IU41 IU42

IU50

FAN5

FAN6

Partition 2

Partition 3

FAN10 IU90

Partition 4


FAN11

Partition 5

FAN12

Partition 6

IU92

20



NOTE

If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F). Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations: l

Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies.

l

One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.

In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same section (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run at the same speed.

The fan tray assembly consists of fans and fan control unit. Figure 3-5 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly. Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly

Speed adjusting signal SCC

Status signal

Speed adjusting signal Fan control unit

Status signal FAN

External power External power supply 1 supply 2

l

FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the subrack. FAN is the core of the fan tray assembly.

l

Fan control board: – Controls the fan speed according to the fan speed regulating signals. – Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. In this case, the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fans to run at the full speed. – Monitors speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. – Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.

Appearance Figure 3-6 shows a fan tray assembly.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


21



Figure 3-6 Fan tray assembly

3 SYSTEM

2

1

1. Air filter

2. Operating status indicators

3. Fans (three in total)

NOTE

An air filter is installed on the lower fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.

Valid Slots The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU90 IU91, IU92 and IU93 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.

Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly Table 3-9 lists the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly. NOTE

For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the same. Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).

Table 3-9 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly Item

Specification

Dimensions (H x W x D)

64.0 mm (2.5 in.) x 493.7 mm (19.4 in.) x 280.5 mm (11.0 in.)

Weight

3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 70 W l Medium-Low Speed: 95 W l Medium Speed: 150 W l Medium-High Speed: 225W l High Speed: 270W

a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured, rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 270 W.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


22



3.2.1.6 Power Consumption This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications. Table 3-10 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack. NOTE

For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the same. Heat rate (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh). Typical configuration power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with the typical configuration and the equipment runs at the room temperature. Maximum power consumption indicates the possible maximum power consumption when the equipment runs in an environment with extreme conditions.

Table 3-10 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Item

Value

Maximum subrack power consumptiona

6500 W

Typical configuration power consumption (OTN)

3700 W

Typical configuration power consumption (OCS)

2700 W

a: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the theoretical power consumption obtained when boards with the highest power consumption are installed in every slot on the subrack.

Table 3-11 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Table 3-11 Power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Unit Name

Typical Power Consumptio n at 25°C (77° F) (W)a

Maximum Power Consumptio n at 55°C (131°F) (W)a

Remarks

Subrack

OTU subrack 1

1804.6

2827.9

32 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

OTU subrack 2

1686.7

2278.9

4 x LSC, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIUs, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly


23


Unit Name




Remarks

OTU electrical crossconnect subrack 1

2172.7

2822.9

2 x XCT, 2 x SXH, 8 x NS3, 2 x SCC, 2 x STG, 8 x PIU, 5 x TQX, 5 x TOA, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly


1839.1

2776.7

2 x XCT, 2 x SXM, 20 x NQ2, 1 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 5 x TOA, 5 x TQX, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

OTM subrack 1

963.78

1860.3

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 12 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 1 x SC2, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

OTM subrack 2

1734.7

2343.9

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 4 x LSC, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

1920

2830

2 x SXM, 20 x SLD64, 8 x SLO16, 4 x SLQ16, 4 x SLH41, 4 x EGSH, 2 x STG, 1 x STI, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

OCS System

a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumed by the chassis and cabinet is a calculation based on the power consumption of each module.

3.2.1.7 Power Requirement This section describes the requirements on power supply.

Requirements on Voltage and Current Table 3-12 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


24



Table 3-12 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Item

Requirement

Rated working current

200 A (Independent power supplies to four sections of each subrack, with 50A for each section)

Nominal working voltage

-48V DC/-60V DC

Working voltage range

-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V -60V DC: -48V to -72V

PIU The PIU board receives and provides DC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/8800 T32, the PIU board can be TN16PIU or TN51PIU. For OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the PIU board must be TN16PIU. l

Function Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions. The TN16PIU supports intelligent ammeter function, which enables the TN16PIU to detect the power consumption of the entire subrack and report the power consumption to the system control unit. NOTE

The overcurrent protection function for the access power supplies of each subrack is realized by the magnetic circuit breaker of the PDU.

l

Front Panel As shown in the following figures, two types of front panel are available for The TN51PIU board. The difference between the two types of front panel lies in the silkscreen. Figure 3-7 Front panel of the TN51PIU board PIU RTN(+)

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

PWR

REG(-)


25



PIU PWR

RTN

-48V

Figure 3-8 Front panel of the TN16PIU board PIU RTN(+)

PWR

NEG(-)

l

There is only the power indicator (PWR), which is green.

l

Valid Slots Table 3-13 Valid slots for the TN51PIU board Product

Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81,IU88 and IU89

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46

Table 3-14 Valid slots for the TN16PIU board

l Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Product

Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800 T64


OptiX OSN 8800 T32


OptiX OSN 8800 T16

IU20 and IU23

Specifications Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26



– Performance Specifications Table 3-15 Performance specifications of the PIU board Item

Unit

Value

Number of DC input power supplies

-

1

Input DC power voltage range

V DC

-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V -60V DC: -48V to -72V

Input DC power current

A

≤60

– Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) Weight: – TN51PIU: 0.5 kg (1.10 lb.) – TN16PIU: 0.65 kg (1.43 lb.) – Power Consumption Board

Typical Power Consumption at 25°C (77°F) (W)

Maximum Power Consumption at 55°C (131°F) (W)

TN51PIU

5

5

TN16PIU

3

3.6

3.2.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack In this document, "OptiX OSN 8800 T32" refers to both enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks unless otherwise specified. Table 3-16 shows you how to distinguish between the "Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32" and "General OptiX OSN 8800 T32" subracks. Table 3-16 Classification of OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks Subrack Type

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Subrack Label

Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32

OSN 8800 T32

General OptiX OSN 8800 T32

OSN 8800 T32


Display on the NMS "OSN8800 T32 Enhanced" "OSN8800 T32 Standard"

27



3.2.2.1 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32. Each subrack has independent power supply. Figure 3-9 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack. Figure 3-9 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack structure diagram

3

6

1 5

2

3 4

1. Board area



4. Air filter

5. Fiber spool

6. Mounting ear

NOTE

A subrack identified by "Enhanced" is an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack. If the subrack is not identified by "Enhanced", it is a general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.

l


l


l

Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate subrack status. NOTE


l Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28



l


l


Table 3-17 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Item

Specification

Dimensions

498 mm (W) × 295 mm (D) × 900 mm (H) (19.6 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 35.4 in. (H))


35 kg (77.1 lb.)


3.2.2.2 Slot Description The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack provide 50 slots. Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack are shown in Figure 3-10.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


29



Figure 3-10 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack IU51

AUX EFI2 IU37

STG

STG

EFI1

PIU

PIU

PIU

PIU

IU38

IU39

IU40

IU45

IU46

IU41 IU42 IU43 IU44

STI IU47

ATE IU48

SCC

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU25

IU6

IU26 IU27

IU7

IU28

IU9

IU10

SCC or service board

IU2

IU23 IU24

Cross-connect board

IU1

IU22

Cross-connect board

IU20 IU21

IU8

IU29

IU30 IU31

IU32

IU33

IU34 IU35

IU36

IU12

IU13

IU14 IU15

IU16

IU17 IU18

IU19

IU11

IU50

l


l

IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the cross-connect board (XCH/XCM).

l

IU43 is reserved for future use.

l

The following table provides the slots for housing active and standby boards of the subrack.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Board


PIU

IU39 & IU45 and IU40 & IU46

SCC

IU28 & IU11

STG

IU42 & IU44

XCH/XCM

IU9 & IU10


30



3.2.2.3 Management Interfaces of OptiX OSN 8800 T32 The subrack provides various communication and maintenance interfaces for the management and maintenance purposes, as shown in Table 3-18. Table 3-18 Description of interfaces in the interface area Boar d TN51 EFI1

Front Panel

Power Consumption Typical Power Consumption at 25°C (77°F): 5 W

EFI1

NM_ETH2 SERIAL

TN51 EFI2

EFI2

ETH1

LAMP1

ETH2

LAMP2

STI

CLK2

CLK1

TOD2

TOD1

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Note

Network management interface: Maximum Power NM_ETH2 Consumption at Management serial 55°C (131°F): 7 interface: SERIAL W



Subrack alarm cascading interfaces: LAMP1, LAMP2



Network management interface: NM_ETH1/ETH1/ ETH2/ETH3



NM_ETH1

ETH3

TN52 STI

Interfaces

Time signal Maximum Power interface: TOD1, Consumption at TOD2 55°C (131°F): 1.5 W



31


Boar d TNL 1STI

Front Panel

STI


CLK2

CLK1

TOD2

TOD1

PHONE

F1

Power Consumption

Interfaces

Note




Time signal interface: TOD1, TOD2


Orderwire phone interface: PHONE F1 interface: F1

3.2.2.4 Cross-Connect Capacities The cross-connect capacity of a slot in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack vary the type of crossconnect board installed in the slot. OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks can cross-connect ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODU3, ODUflex, VC-4, VC-3, and VC-12 granularities at the same time. Slots IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, and IU29-IU36 provide the same cross-connect capacity. As shown in Table 3-19. Table 3-19 Cross-connect capacity of OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack CrossConnec t Board

Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Each Slot ODUka

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12b

ODUka

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12

XCH

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

N/A

1.28 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

N/A

XCM

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

80 Gbit/s


a: k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex b: All service slots share a bandwidth of 40 Gbit/s.

In later versions, a single slot will support a maximum of 100 Gbit/s cross-connect capacities and a single subrack will be able to provide a maximum of 3.2 Tbit/s cross-connect capacities.

3.2.2.5 Fan Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack has two fan tray assemblies, each of which includes three independent fans. In each subrack, the lower fan tray assembly has an air filter, but the upper fan tray assembly does not have an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


32




Functions and Features Table 3-20 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly. Table 3-20 Functions Function

Description

Basic function




Partitioned heat dissipation

Each subrack is divided into three partitions to help provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.

Hot swapping


Alarming


Status checking


Working Principle A fan tray assembly inside a subrack dissipates heat for the subrack to ensure that the subrack works effectively at a specified temperature. The fan tray assembly is located on the lower part of a subrack. It blows air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Figure 3-11 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


33



Figure 3-11 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system

Air outlet

Fan tray assembly

Board Area

Fan tray assembly


Air inlet

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 3-21. The sectiondependent speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. The Auto Speed Mode is recommended. Table 3-21 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode

Description

Auto Speed Mode

Fan speed in each section is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the section that the fans are targeted for. l Lower than 25°C (77°F): the fans run at low speed. l Higher than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at high speed. l 25°C to 45°C (77°F to 113° F): The fans automatically adjust their rotation speeds. This mode can reduce noise and is power-saving. Fan speed in each section is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signal is abnormal. If one of the fans in one section fails, the other fans in this section run at full speed. When the user queries the fan speed using the NMS, the highest fan speed among all sections is displayed. In other words, if the fans in one section rotate at high speed, the NMS displays the fan speed as high speed in the query result.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Six fan speeds are supported: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. In this mode, the user manually sets the fan speed and fans in all sections run at the same speed. The user cannot independently set the fan speed for a specific section.


34



Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is divided into three partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts two fan tray assemblies to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 3-12. Figure 3-12 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack FAN2

FAN1

IU37

IU20 IU21

IU38

IU39

IU22

IU23 IU24

IU40

IU25

IU41 IU42 IU43 IU44

IU26 IU27

IU9

IU1

IU2

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU6

IU7

FAN3

IU45

IU46

IU28 IU29

IU30 IU31

IU11 IU12

IU13

IU47

IU51

IU48

IU32

IU33

IU34 IU35

IU36

IU14 IU15

IU16

IU17 IU18

IU19

IU10

IU8

IU50 FAN4

Partition 1

FAN5

Partition 2

FAN6

IU50

Partition 3

NOTE

If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F). Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations: l

Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies.

l

One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.

In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same partition (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run at the same speed.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


35





Status signal


Status signal FAN


l


l



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


36




3 SYSTEM

2

1

1. Air filter


3. Fans (three in total)

NOTE

An air filter is installed on the lower fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.

Valid Slots The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU50 and IU51 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.




Specification

Dimensions (H x W x D)

64.0 mm (2.5 in.) x 493.7 mm (19.4 in.) x 280.5 mm (11.0 in.)

Weight

3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 70 W l Medium-Low Speed: 95 W l Medium Speed: 150 W l Medium-High Speed: 225W l High Speed: 270W


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


37



3.2.2.6 Power Consumption This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications. Table 3-23 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN8800 T32 subrack. NOTE



Value


3500 W

Recommended typical configuration power consumption (OTN)

2000 W

Recommended typical configuration power consumption (OCS)

2250 W


Table 3-24 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32. Table 3-24 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Unit Name



Remarks

Subrack

OTU subrack 1

1633.4

2254.6

32 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OTU subrack 2

1351.8

1701.3

4 x LSC, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly


38


Unit Name

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)




Remarks


1641.6

2166.5

2 x XCH, 20 x NQ2, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 5 x TQX, 5 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly


2039.8

2466.5

2 x XCH, 8 x NS3, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 5 x TQX, 5 x TOA, 2 x STG, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OTM subrack 1

792.5

1287.1

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 12 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OTM subrack 2

1399.8

1766.3

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 4 x LSC, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OLA subrack

290.3

706

4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x SC2, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OADM subrack

974

1497.2

2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 16 x LDX, 1 x SC2, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

378.2

811

2 x M40V, 2 x D40, 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x RMU9, 2 x WSM9, 2 x OAU1, 2 x OBU1, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

373.1

306.6

2 x M40, 2 x D40, 2 x WSMD9, 2 x DAS1, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly


39



Unit Name



Remarks

OCS System

1281

1757

2 x XCM, 10 x SLQ64, 8 x SLO16, 2 x SLH41, 2 x EGSH, 2 x STG, 1 x STI, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly



Requirements on Voltage and Current Table 3-25 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T32. Table 3-25 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Item

Requirement


100 A (Independent power supplies to two sections of each subrack, with 50A for each section)


-48V DC/-60V DC


-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V -60V DC: -48V to -72V


Function Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions. The TN16PIU supports intelligent ammeter function, which enables the TN16PIU to detect the power consumption of the entire subrack and report the power consumption to the system control unit.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


40



NOTE


l


PWR

REG(-)

PIU RTN

PWR

-48V


PWR

NEG(-)

l


l

Valid Slots

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


41



Table 3-26 Valid slots for the TN51PIU board Product

Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800 T64


OptiX OSN 8800 T32



l

Product

Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800 T64


OptiX OSN 8800 T32


OptiX OSN 8800 T16

IU20 and IU23

Specifications – Performance Specifications Table 3-28 Performance specifications of the PIU board Item

Unit

Value


-

1


V DC

-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V -60V DC: -48V to -72V


A

≤60

– Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) Weight: – TN51PIU: 0.5 kg (1.10 lb.) – TN16PIU: 0.65 kg (1.43 lb.) – Power Consumption

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Board



TN51PIU

5

5

TN16PIU

3

3.6


42



3.2.3 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack 3.2.3.1 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16. Each subrack has independent power supply. Figure 3-17 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack structure (subrack door excluded)

1

6

5 2 3 4

1. Board area



4. Air filter

5. Fiber spool

6. Mounting ear

l


l


l

Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and related information.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


43



NOTE


l

Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning.

l


l


Table 3-29 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Item

Specification

Dimensions

498 mm (W) × 295 mm (D) × 450 mm (H) (19.6 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 17.7 in. (H))


18 kg (39.6 lb.)


3.2.3.2 Slot Description The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack provide 25 slots. Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack are shown in Figure 3-18. Figure 3-18 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack IU20 PIU

IU19 EFI

IU21 AUX

IU9 IU 1

IU 2

IU 3

IU 4

IU 5

IU 6

IU 7

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

IU24 ATE

IU10

IU 8

IU 11

IU25

l

IU23 PIU

IU22

IU 12

IU 13

IU 14

IU 15

IU 16

IU 17

IU 18

FAN

: houses service boards and supports service cross-connections. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44


l


IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the TN16XCH/TN16SCC or for the other service boards. NOTE

Slots IU9 and IU10 can be used to house service boards only when the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 functions as a slave subrack. If slots IU9 and IU10 are used to house service boards or SCC boards, install a special filler panel in each slot first

l

IU22 is reserved for future use.

l

The following table provides the slots for housing active and standby boards of the subrack. Board


PIU

IU20 & IU23

TN16XCH/ TN16SCC

IU9 & IU10

3.2.3.3 Management Interfaces of OptiX OSN 8800 T16 The subrack provides various communication and maintenance interfaces for the management and maintenance purposes, as shown in Table 3-30. Table 3-30 Description of interfaces in the interface area Boa rd TN1 6EFI

Front Panel

EFI ETH1

LAMP1

ETH2

LAMP2

SERIAL

Power Consumption

Interfaces

Note


Network management interface: NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2/ ETH1/ETH2/ ETH3

For detailed information, refer to Management Connections and Interfaces of OptiX OSN 8800 T16.


NM_ETH1

ETH3

NM_ETH2

Management serial interface: SERIAL Subrack alarm cascading interfaces: LAMP1, LAMP2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


45


Boa rd TN1 6AT E

Front Panel

ATE


ALMI2

ALMI1

ALMO3

TOD2

Interfaces

Note


Housekeeping alarm input interface: ALMI1–ALMI2


Housekeeping alarm output interface: ALMO1– ALMO4

For detailed information on housekeeping alarm inputs and outputs, refer to 3.10.1 OptiX OSN 8800 Housekeepin g Alarm Interfaces.

ALMO4

ALMO1 ALMO2 CLK1 TOD1

CLK2

Power Consumption

Clock signal interface: CLK1, CLK2 Time signal interface: TOD1, TOD2

The clock/ time input and output interfaces connect the board to the STG board through the backplane to achieve NElevel clock and time synchronizati on.

3.2.3.4 Cross-Connect Capacities Slots in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack provide the same cross-connect capacity. An OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack can cross-connect ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODU3, and ODUflex granularities at the same time with a maximum cross-connect capacity of 640 Gbit/ s. Slots IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU18 provide the same cross-connect capacity and each of the slots supports a maximum of 40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity.

3.2.3.5 Fan Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.


Functions and Features Table 3-31 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


46



Table 3-31 Functions Function

Description

Basic function





Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.

Hot swapping


Alarming


Status checking


Working Principle A fan tray assembly inside a subrack dissipates heat for the subrack to ensure that the subrack works effectively at a specified temperature. The fan tray assembly is located on the lower part of a subrack. It blows air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Figure 3-19 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16. Figure 3-19 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system Air outlet

Board area

Optical fiber laying area Fan tray assembly Air inlet

The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 3-32. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you operate fans in Auto Speed Mode by default. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


47




Description

Auto Speed Mode

Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed. l Lower than 25°C (77°F): the fans run at low speed. l Higher than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at high speed. l 25°C to 45°C (77°F to 113° F): The fans automatically adjust their rotation speeds. This mode can reduce noise and is power-saving. Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal. If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed. Five fan speed modes are available: Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.


Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 3-20. Figure 3-20 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack IU20 PIU

IU19 EFI

IU21 AUX

IU9 IU 1

IU 2

A

IU 3

IU 4

IU 5

IU 6

B

IU 7

IU23 PIU

IU22

IU24 ATE

IU10

IU 8

C

IU

IU

IU

IU

11

12

13

14

D

IU 15

IU 16

E

IU 17

IU 18

Fan tray assembly

In the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, there are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


48



NOTE

If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F). Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.



Status signal


Status signal FAN


l


l



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


49



Figure 3-22 Fan tray assembly 3

2

SYSTEM

1 1. Air filter


3. Fans (ten in total)

NOTE

An air filter is installed on the fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.

Valid Slots The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU25 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.




Specification

Dimensions

493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W) x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in. (H))

Weight

3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 42.7 W l Medium-Low Speed: 74.8 W l Medium Speed: 106.8 W l Medium-High Speed: 165.5 W l High Speed: 215 W


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


50



3.2.3.6 Power Consumption This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications. Table 3-34 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN8800 T16 subrack. NOTE



Specification


1800 W

Typical configuration power consumption

700 W


Table 3-35 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an 8800 T16. Table 3-35 Power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Unit Name

Subrack

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Typical Power Consumpt ion at 25°C (77°F) (W)a

Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55°C (131°F) (W)

Remarks

OTU subrack 1

509.2

615.6

8 x 10G OTU (LDX), 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OTU subrack 2

1107.8

1432.7

4 x LSC, 2 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1×EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OTN electrical cross-connect subrack 1

501

808

5 x NQ2, 2 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x TQX, 2 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

a


51


Unit Name


Typical Power Consumpt ion at 25°C (77°F) (W)a

Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55°C (131°F) (W)

Remarks

OTN electrical cross-connect subrack 2

862.8

1180.7

2 x XCH, 4 x 55NS3, 2 x PIU, 1 x TQX, 2 x TOA, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OTM subrack 1

468.7

569.7

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 6 x LDX, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OTM subrack 2

675.8

967.7

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 2 x LSC, 2 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OLA subrack

228.1

294.3

4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x SC2, 2 x FIU, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OADM subrack

449.5

561.5

2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 2 x FIU, 8 x LSX, 1 x SC2, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

221

269.2

1 x M40, 1 x D40, 1 x WSMD9, 1 x DAS1, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

a



Requirements on Voltage and Current Table 3-36 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


52



Table 3-36 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Item

Requirement


37.5 A


-48V DC/-60V DC


-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V -60V DC: -48V to -72V


Function Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions. The TN16PIU supports intelligent ammeter function, which enables the TN16PIU to detect the power consumption of the entire subrack and report the power consumption to the system control unit. NOTE


l


PWR

REG(-)

PIU RTN

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

PWR

-48V


53




PWR

NEG(-)

l


l

Valid Slots Table 3-37 Valid slots for the TN51PIU board Product

Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800 T64


OptiX OSN 8800 T32



l

Product

Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800 T64


OptiX OSN 8800 T32


OptiX OSN 8800 T16

IU20 and IU23


Unit

Value


-

1


V DC

-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V -60V DC: -48V to -72V

Input DC power current Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

A


≤60 54



– Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) Weight: – TN51PIU: 0.5 kg (1.10 lb.) – TN16PIU: 0.65 kg (1.43 lb.) – Power Consumption Board



TN51PIU

5

5

TN16PIU

3

3.6

3.3 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack and Power Requirement 3.3.1 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 6800. The subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800 has an independent power supply. Figure 3-25 shows the structure of the subrack. Figure 3-25 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram 1

2

7

3 6

4 5

1. Indicator

2. Board area



5. Air filter

6. Fiber spool

7. Mounting ear

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


55



NOTE

The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel before you connect cables.

l

Indicators: indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack.

l

Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. 21 slots are available.

l

Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack. The mechanical VOA is also installed in this area. NOTE

For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 3.3.4 Fan.

l

Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack.

l

Air filter: The air filter protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning.

l


l


l

Interface area: The interface area provides functional interfaces, such as management interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface. It is behind the subrack indicator panel.

Table 3-40 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 Item

Specification

Dimensions

497 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 400 mm (H) (19.6 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 15.7 in. (H))


13 kg (28.6 lb.)


3.3.2 Slot Description The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, labeled IU1 to IU21 from left to right. Slots of the subrack are shown in Figure 3-26.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


56



Figure 3-26 Slots of the subrack

IU1

IU2

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU6

IU7

IU8

IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16

IU9

IU10


XCS XCS

IU19 PIU SCC

IU17 IU18

IU20 PIU

IU21 AUX

VOA area Fan Paired slots

l

Mutual backup


l

IU15 and IU16 are also available for the STG.

l

Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses on the backplanes. OptiX OSN 6800 supports seven pair slots. The pair slots support distributed grooming.

3.3.3 Cross-Connect Capacities The slots in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack vary in cross-connect capacities.

Integrated Grooming When using the XCS board, an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack can cross-connect ODU1, ODU2,ODU2e, 10GE, and GE services between any two slots among slots IU1-IU8 and slots IU11-IU16. Figure 3-27 provides the cross-connect capacity for each slot.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


57



Figure 3-27 Cross-connect capacities of slots

IU1

IU2

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU6

IU7

IU8

IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16

IU9 IU10


XCS XCS

IU19 PIU SCC

IU17 IU18

IU20 PIU

IU21 AUX

VOA area Fan

l

When TN12XCS boards are configured in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack, the cross-connect capacities of the subrack are as follows: Table 3-41 Cross-connect capacity of OptiX OSN 6800 subrack Cro ssCon nect Boa rd TN1 2XC S

TN1 1XC S

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Slot

Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Each Slot ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/10GE

GE

40Gbit/s

20Gbit/s

20Gbit/s

10Gbit/s

0Gbit/s

0Gbit/s

20Gbit/s

10Gbit/s

0Gbit/s

0Gbit/s



180 Gbit/s GE 360 Gbit/s ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/10GE Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services with the maximum crossconnect capacity of 360 Gbit/s. 140 Gbit/s GE 280 Gbit/s ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/10GE Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services with the maximum crossconnect capacity of 280 Gbit/s.

58



Distributed Grooming An OptiX OSN 6800 subrack provides seven pairs of slots: IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16. GE/Any/ODU1/OTU1 services can be cross-connected between paired slots. No XCS board is required when paired slots are used to cross-connect electrical services.

3.3.4 Fan Each OptiX OSN 6800 subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.


Functions and Features Table 3-42 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly. Table 3-42 Functions of a fan tray assembly Function

Description

Basic function

Dissipates the heat generated by an NE so that the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature range.




Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.

Hot swapping

Provides the hot swapping feature for the fan tray assembly.

Alarming


Status checking


Working Principle Air flow from the subrack is bottom intake top exhaust. Figure 3-28 and Figure 3-29 show the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 6800.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


59



Figure 3-28 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system Air outlet

Board area

Optical fiber laying area Fan tray assembly Air inlet

Figure 3-29 Multi-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system Air deflector

Air outlet

Board area

Fan tray assembly


Air inlet

NOTE

If multiple subracks are used, an air duct deflector is required to help in heat dissipation.

The OptiX OSN 6800 supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 3-43. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


60




Description

Auto Speed Mode

Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed. l Lower than 25°C (77°F): the fans run at low speed. l Higher than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at high speed. l 25°C to 45°C (77°F to 113° F): The fans automatically adjust their rotation speeds. This mode can reduce noise and is power-saving. Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal. If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed.


Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.

Each OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 3-30. Figure 3-30 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack

I U 1 9 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I U 2 1 1

2

A

3

4

B

5

C

6

7

D

VOA

8

E

Fan Tray Assembly

There are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


61



NOTE

l

If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F).

l

Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if: Two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.

The fan tray assembly consists of ten fans and one fan control unit. Figure 3-31 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly. Figure 3-31 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly


Status signal


Status signal FAN


l


l

Fan control board: – Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals. – Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. In this case, the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fan in the same partition to run at full speed. – Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. – Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


62




3

2

1

1. Air filter


3. Fans (ten in total)

NOTE

An air filter is installed on the fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.

Valid Slots One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU22.

Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly Table 3-44 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 fan tray assembly. NOTE



Specification

Dimensions


Weight

3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 40 W l Medium Speed: 60 W l High Speed: 120 W


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


63



3.3.5 Power Consumption This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications. Table 3-45 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. NOTE


Table 3-45 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 6800 Item

Value

Maximum subrack power consumption

1350 W

Table 3-46 lists the power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 6800. Table 3-46 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 6800 Unit Name

Su bra ck

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Typical Power Consumpti on at 25°C (77°F)a

Maximum Power Consumpti on at 55°C (131°F)a

Remarks

Subrack 1

566

722.2

17 x 10G OTU (LSX), 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

Subrack 2

168.7

281.6

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU101, 1 x OBU103, 1 x FIU, 1 x SC1, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

Subrack 3

557

723.8

10 x ND2, 2 x TQX, 2 x TOA, 2 x XCS, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OLA subrack

144.9

253.9

2 x OAU101s, 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

FOADM subrack

292.3

418.3

2 x OAU101, 2 x VA4, 2 x OBU103, 2 x MR4, 4 x 10G OTU (LSX), 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OT M subr ack


64


Unit Name

Ca bin et


Typical Power Consumpti on at 25°C (77°F)a

Maximum Power Consumpti on at 55°C (131°F)a

Remarks

RO AD M subr ack (2 x dime nsio ns)

Subrack 1

87.4

96.4

1 x M40, 1 x D40, 2 x WSMD2, 2 x DAS1, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

Subrack 2

566

722.2

17 x 10G OTU (LSX), 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

RO AD M subr ack (4 x dime nsio ns)b

Subrack 1

160

268.8

1 x WSMD4, 1 x DAS1, 1 x M40, 1 x D40, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

Subrack 2

160

268.8


Subrack 3

160

268.8


Subrack 4

160

268.8


1422.2

1951.1

2 x OTU subrack and 1 x OTM subrack 2

OTM cabinet (40x10 Gbit/s)

a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module. b: Subrack 1 and subrack 2 are used as subracks in the line dimensions at a four-dimension ROADM station; subrack 3 and subrack 4 are used as subracks for adding/dropping local services. Service boards can be configured in another subrack.

3.3.6 Power Requirement This section describes the requirements on power supply.

Requirements on Voltage and Current Table 3-47 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


65



Table 3-47 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 6800 Item

Requirement


25 A (-48 V)


-48 V DC/-60 V DC


-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V -60V DC: -48V to -72V

PIU The PIU board receives and provides DC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 6800, the PIU board must be TN11PIU. l

Function Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions. NOTE


l

Front Panel Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 3-33 Front panel of the TN11PIU board PIU RUN

NEG(-) RTN(+)

Indicators: Running status indicator (RUN) - green l

Valid Slots Table 3-48 Valid slots for the TN11PIU board

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Product

Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 6800

IU19 and IU20


66


l



Unit

Value


-

1


V DC

-48V DC: -40V to -57.6V -60V DC: -48V to -72V


A

≤30

– Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of front panel: 28 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 65 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 2.6 in. (H)) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) – Power Consumption Board



TN11PIU

24

38

3.4 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis and Power Requirement 3.4.1 Chassis Structure The 3U-high, case-shaped chassis is the basic working unit of the OptiX OSN 3800 compact intelligent optical transport platform (OptiX OSN 3800 for short). The chassis of the OptiX OSN 3800 can operate with an independent DC or AC power supply and can be installed in an ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet, a standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet, or a 19 and 23-inch open rack. Figure 3-34 shows appearance of the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. Table 3-50 describes the mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


67



Figure 3-34 OptiX OSN 3800 chassis

5 1 4 2

3

1. Grounding connector

2. Fiber frame

3. Board area

4. Antistatic jack

5. Fan indicator

l

Ground connector: Access the ground cables.

l

Fiber frame: Fiber jumpers in the service board area are routed through the fiber frame.

l

Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. In total, 11 slots are available.

l

Antistatic jack: The ESD strap is in this area.

l

Fan indicator: The fan indicator indicates the status of the fans.

Table 3-50 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3800 Item

Specification

Dimensions

436 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 134 mm (H) or 17.17 in. (W) x 11.61 in. (D) x 5.28 in. (H)

Weight of an empty chassis (with backplane)

6 kg (13.23 lb.)

3.4.2 Slot Description The board area of the chassis has 11 slots, labeled IU1 to IU11 from left to right. Slots of the chassis are shown in Figure 3-35 and Figure 3-36. Figure 3-35 Slots of the chassis (DC power)

IU1 FAN

Paired slots Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

IU11

IU6/PIU

IU2

IU7/PIU

IU3

IU8/SCC

IU4

IU9/SCC

IU5

IU10/AUX

Mesh group


Mutual backup

68



Figure 3-36 Slots of the chassis (AC power)

IU1

IU11

IU6/APIU

IU2 FAN

Paired slots

IU3

IU7/APIU

IU4

IU9/SCC

IU5

IU10/AUX

Mesh group

Mutual backup

NOTE

l

: service boards.

l Slots IU1 and IU11 can be used as two independent slots, each for housing an FOADM board with a height of 118.9 mm (4.7 in.). They can be also used as one slot for housing a service board with a height of 264.6 mm (10.4 in.). When the two slots are used as one slot, the slot ID is represented as IU11. l Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses on the backplanes. l A mesh group refers to a group of slots housing the boards whose overhead can be processed by the buses on the backplane.

3.4.3 Fan Each OptiX OSN 3800 chassis has one fan tray assembly, which includes six independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.


Functions and Features Table 3-51 shows the functions of a fan tray assembly. Table 3-51 Functions of a fan tray assembly

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Function

Description

Basic function

Dissipates heat generated by the equipment so that the equipment can operate normally within the designated temperature range.


69



Function

Description


l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed regulation, depending on the subrack temperature. l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan speed. NOTE Only when the chassis accesses DC power, Fan speed control is available..

Hot swapping


Alarming

Reports alarms of the fans and reports the inservice information.

Status checking

Checks the fan status.

Working Principle Air flow from the subrack is left intake right exhaust.. Figure 3-37 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 3800. Figure 3-37 Front view of the heat dissipation and ventilation system

Air outlet

Air inlet Board Area

FAN

The OptiX OSN 3800 supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 3-52. It is recommended that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode. Table 3-52 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode

Description

Auto Speed Mode

The fan speed depends on the temperature. l Lower than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at low speed. l Higher than 65°C (149°F): the fans run at high speed. l 45°C (113°F) to 65°C (149°F): the fans run at medium speed. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


70



FAN Speed Mode

Description


Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.

NOTE

l

If any one of the six fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F).

l

Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if: Two or more fans fail in the fan tray assembly.

The fan tray assembly consists of six fans and one fan control unit. Figure 3-38 shows the functional block of the fan tray assembly. Figure 3-38 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly Status signal Speed adjusting signal Fan control unit Status signal FAN

Speed adjusting signal


l

FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the chassis. FAN is the core of the fan tray assembly.

l

Fan control board: – Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals. – Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. – Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. – Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.

Appearance Figure 3-39 shows a fan tray assembly. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


71



Figure 3-39 Fan tray assembly 1

2

1. Fans (6 in total)

2. Operating status indicator

Valid Slots One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU12.

Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly Table 3-53 list the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly for the OptiX OSN 3800 system. NOTE



Specification

Dimensions


Weight

0.81 kg (1.79 lb)

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 9 W l Medium Speed: 17 W l High Speed: 32.7 W

a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured, rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 32.7 W.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


72



3.4.4 AC Power Consumption This section provides the maximum and typical power consumption specifications of OptiX OSN 3800 when the equipment runs on AC power. Table 3-54 describes the AC power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. NOTE


Table 3-54 AC Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800 Item

Value

Maximum power consumption

350 W

Table 3-55 lists the power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 3800. Table 3-55 AC Power consumption of the chassis in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 3800 Unit Name

Typical Power Consump tion at 25° C (77°F)

Maximum Power Consumpti on at 55°C (131°F)

Remarks

Chassis 1

162.2

207.5

2 x TN21MR2, 4 x 2.5 Gbit/s OTU, 1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

Chassis 2

117.7

154.5

1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OAU101, 1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

OLA chassis (Using the APIU)

119.7

156.7

1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OBU103, 1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

OADM chassis (Using the APIU)

a: Indicates that the power consumption of the chassis is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis is calculated based on the power consumption of each module.

3.4.5 AC Power Requirement This section describes the requirements on power supplywhen the equipment runs on AC power. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


73



Requirements on AC Voltage and Current Table 3-56 provides the requirements on AC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. Table 3-56 Requirements on AC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800 Item

Requirement


1.7 A


220 V AC


90 V AC to 285 V AC

APIU The APIU board receives and provides AC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 3800, the APIU board must be TN21APIU. l

Function: Accesses AC power in a range from 90 V to 285 V. Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions.

l

Front Panel: Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 3-40 Front panel of the APIU board

APIU RUN

ON

OFF ~100-240V

S1 S11 APIU S2 S3 APIU S4 SCC S5 AUX

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


74



Indicator: Running status indicator (RUN) - green l

Valid Slots: IU6, IU7 and IU8 together house two APIU boards. That is, each APIU requires 1.5 slots.

l

Specifications: – Performance Specifications Table 3-57 Performance specifications of the APIU Item

Unit

Value

Input power voltage range

V (AC)

90 to 285

Input frequency

Hz

50

Input power current

A (AC)

≤4

Output rated voltage

V (DC)

-48

Output rated current

A (DC)

6.3

Output power

W

300

– Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of front panel: 37.5 mm (H) x 100 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) or 1.5 in. (H) x 3.9 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) Weight: 0.8 kg (1.8lb.) – Power Consumption Board



TN21APIU

50

55

3.4.6 DC Power Consumption This section provides the maximum and typical power consumption specifications of OptiX OSN 3800 when the equipment runs on DC power. Table 3-58 describes the DC power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


75



NOTE


Table 3-58 DC Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800 Item

Value

Maximum power consumption

350 W

Table 3-59 lists the power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 3800. Table 3-59 DC Power consumption of the chassis in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 3800 Unit Name

Typical Power Consump tion at 25° C (77°F)

Maximum Power Consumpti on at 55°C (131°F)

Remarks

Chassis 1

99.4

135.3

2 x TN21MR2, 4 x 2.5 Gbit/s OTU, 1 x SCC, 2 x DPIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

Chassis 2

77.7

111.5

1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OAU101, 1 x SCC, 2 x DPIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

OLA chassis (Using the PIU)

79.7

113.7

1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OBU103, 1 x SCC, 2 x DPIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

OADM chassis (Using the PIU)

a: Indicates that the power consumption of the chassis is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis is calculated based on the power consumption of each module.

3.4.7 DC Power Requirement This section describes the requirements on power supply when the equipment runs on DC power.

Requirements on DC Voltage and Current Table 3-60 provides the requirements on DC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


76



Table 3-60 Requirements on DC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800 Item

Requirement


8A


-48 V DC/-60 V DC


-40 V DC to -72 V DC

PIU The PIU board receives and provides DC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 3800, the PIU board must be TN21PIU. l

Function: Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions.

l

Front Panel: Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 3-41 Front panel of the PIU board

RUN

DO not hot plug this unit！ S1 S4

S2

AUX

SCC

SCC

PIU

PIU

S5

S11

S6

NEG(-) RTN(+)

PIU

Indicator: Running status indicator (RUN) - green l

Valid Slots: IU6 and IU7

l

Specifications: – Performance Specifications

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


77



Table 3-61 Performance specifications of the PIU Item

Unit

Value


-

1


V

-40 to -72


A

≤7

– Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of front panel: 218.50 mm (H) x 107.76 in. (W) or 8.6 in. (H) x 4.2 in. (W) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.0 lb.) – Power Consumption Board



TN21PIU

10

12

3.5 DC PDU There are four types of power distribution units (PDUs): TN16, TN51, TN11 and PDU (DPD63-8-8). The availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. l

The TN51PDU and TN16PDU use the same front panel and provide the same functions, but they are different in height. The two boards apply to the same scenarios. This manual uses the TN16PDU board as an example for illustration.

l

The TN16PDU is used for a cabinet housing only OptiX OSN 8800 subracks or a cabinet housing OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.

l

The TN11PDU is used only for a cabinet housing OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.

l

The PDU (DPD63-8-8) is used for a cabinet housing only OptiX OSN 8800 subracks , a cabinet housing only OptiX OSN 6800 subracks, or a cabinet housing OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.

3.5.1 TN16PDU/TN51PDU The TN16PDU/TN51PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the cabinet. NOTE

The TN51PDU and TN16PDU have the same functions but differ in height. The TN51PDU is 133.4 mm high. When two OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks are installed on a cabinet, one more DCM frame can be configured if the TN16PDU is used, compared with the TN51PDU. TN51PDU can be substituted by the TN16PDU.This topic describes the TN16PDU.

The TN16PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive four -48V/-60V power supplies and output four power supplies for subracks in the cabinet. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


78



Whether short-circuiting copper bars are required is determined by the current of power supplied by the power supply equipment in the telecommunications room: l

When eight 63 A power supplies are provided, no short-circuiting copper bar is required.

l

When four 125 A power supplies are provided, short-circuiting copper bars are required for dividing one 125 A power supply into two 63 A power supplies. For more information about short-circuiting copper bars, see Short-Circuiting Copper Bar.

Figure 3-42 shows the front panel of the TN16PDU. Figure 3-42 Front panel of the TN16PDU Power supply input area

Power supply Power supply output area switch area

+ 1

+

+

2

Power supply Power supply switch area output area

A

1

2

+ 4

B

3

1. Output cable terminal block

3

2

1

4

+

+

+

+

3

2. Input cable terminal block

3. Power switch

l

Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 100 mm (H)

l

Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output cable terminal blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks.

l

Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four input cable terminal blocks and receive four -48V/-60V DC power supplies, eight -48V/-60V DC power supplies in total.

l

Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output power switches to control power supplies for subracks inside the cabinet and provide overcurrent protection for each other.

Figure 3-43 shows the internal pin assignments of the TN16PDU. Figure 3-43 TN16PDU internal pin assignments

OUTPUT B

OUTPUT A -

-

-

-

1

2

3

4

1 + ON

ON ON

ON

2 +

3 +

4 +

1 +

INPUT A

2 +

3 +

4 + ON

INPUT B

ON ON

+

+

+

1

2

3

4

-

-

2

3

4

OUTPUT B OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

1 -

2

3

4

1

-

-

-

-

INPUT A

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

-

1 ON

OUTPUT A +

-

2

3

4

-

-

-

+

+

+

+

1

2

3

4

INPUT B


79



Short-Circuit Copper Bar If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive two power supplies, four power supplies in total. In this case, short-circuit copper bars are required for both A and B. Figure 3-44 shows the appearance of the short-circuiting copper bar. Figure 3-44 Appearance

Copper Plate

3.5.2 TN11PDU The TN11PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the cabinet.

DC PDU The TN11PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive two -48V/-60V power supplies and output six power supplies for subracks in the cabinet. Whether junction boxes are required is determined by the current of power supplied by the power supply equipment in the telecommunications room: l

If a power supply is 63 A, both A and B need to receive two power supplies, four power supplies in total. In this case, no junction box is required.

l

If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive one power supply, two power supplies in total. In this case, junction boxes are required for dividing one 125 A current into four 32 A currents. For more information about junction boxes, see Junction Box.

Figure 3-45 shows the front panel of the TN11PDU.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


80



Figure 3-45 Front panel of the TN11PDU 1

2

3

3

2

1

4

4

1. Output cable terminal block

2. Ground screw

3. Input cable terminal block

4. Power switch

l

Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 131 mm (H)

l

Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have six output cable terminal blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks.

l

Ground screw: used to connect (protection ground) PGND cables.

l

Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have two input cable terminal blocks and receive two -48V/-60V DC power supplies, four -48V/-60V DC power supplies in total.

l

Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have six power output switches (corresponding to the six output cable terminal blocks) to control power supplies for subracks in the cabinet. NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 6800, both A and B only use power switches SW2, SW3, SW4, and SW5 to control power supplies for four subracks from bottom to top.

Figure 3-46 shows the internal pin assignments of the TN11PDU. Figure 3-46 TN11PDU internal pin assignments OUTPUT

+- +- +

-

+

-

+- +

-

-

+

-

-

-

-

+- +

ON

+

+ INPUT

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

OUTPUT

+- +- +

-

ON OFF

-

-

-

+

+

-

-

OFF

INPUT


81



Junction Box If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive one power supply, two power supplies in total. In this case, junction boxes are required for both A and B. Figure 3-47 shows the junction box structure and Figure 3-48 shows the installation position of the junction box. Figure 3-47 Structure

Figure 3-48 Installation position

3.6 Frame 3.6.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module The DCM frame is used to hold DCM modules. DCM modules compensate for the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber, to help maintain the original shape of the signal pulse. After an optical signal is transmitted over a certain distance, the optical signal pulse is expanded because of the accumulation of the positive dispersion. An expanded pulse has a negative impact Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


82



on system transmission performance. A dispersion compensation module (DCM) is a passive device that compensates for dispersion. DCMs use the inherent negative dispersion of a dispersion compensation fiber to offset the positive dispersion of a transmission fiber to prevent pulse expansion. The system provides two types of DCMs: those using dispersion compensation fibers (DCFs) and those that use fiber Bragg grating (FBG) technology. The DCMs are available in different compensation distance specifications: 5 km (3.1 mi.), 10 km (6.2 mi.), 20 km (12.4 mi.), 40 km (24.8 mi.), 60 km (37.3 mi.), 80 km (49.7 mi.), 100 km (62.1 mi.), 120 km (74.6 mi.), 160 km (99.4 mi.), 200 km (124.2 mi.), and 240 km (149.1 mi.). Each DCM frame holds two DCM modules. The DCM frame is installed on the columns of a cabinet with mounting airs and screws, as shown in Figure 3-49. Figure 3-49 DCM frame

1

2

1. DCM frame

2. DCMs

Table 3-62 Performance requirements for C-band dispersion compensation optical fibers (G. 652 fibers)

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

DCM Module

Distance (mi./km)

Max. Inserti on Loss (dB)

DSC R

PMD (ps)

PD L (dB )

Max. Allowed Powera (dBm)

Operatin g Wavelen gth (nm)

DCM(S)

3.1/5

2.3

0.3

0.1

20

DCM(T)

6.2/10

2.8

90% to 110%

0.3

0.1

20

1528 to 1568

DCM(A)

12.4/20

3.3

0.4

0.1

20

DCM(B)

24.8/40

4.7

0.5

0.1

20

DCM(C)

37.3/60

6.4

0.6

0.1

20

DCM(D)

49.7/80

8

0.7

0.1

20

DCM(E)

62.1/100

9

0.8

0.1

20


83


DCM Module

Distance (mi./km)


DCM(F)

74.5/120

FBG-DCM (80)


DSC R

PMD (ps)

PD L (dB )


9.8

0.8

0.1

20

49.7/80

4

1.0

0.2

23

FBG-DCM (100)

62.1/100

4

1.0

0.2

23

FBG-DCM (120)

74.5/120

4

1.0

0.2

23

FBG-DCM (160)

99.4/160

8

1.6

0.4

23

FBG-DCM (200)

124.2/200

8

1.6

0.4

23

FBG-DCM (240)

149.1/240

8

1.6

0.4

23


a: The Max. Allowed Power refers to the maximum input optical power that the optical module can receive without being damaged.

Table 3-63 Performance requirements for C-band dispersion compensation optical fibers (G. 655 LEAF fibers)

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

DCM Module

Distance (mi./km)


DSC R

PMD (ps)

PD L (dB )



DCM(A)

12.4/20

4

0.4

0.3

20

DCM(B)

24.8/40

5

90% to 110%

0.5

0.3

20

1528 to 1568

DCM(C)

37.3/60

5.9

0.7

0.3

20

DCM(D)

49.7/80

6.9

0.8

0.3

20

DCM(E)

62.1/100

7.8

0.9

0.3

20

DCM(F)

74.5/120

8.8

1.0

0.3

20

FBG-DCM (120)

74.5/120

3.7

1.0

0.2

23

FBG-DCM (160)

99.4/160

3.7

1.0

0.2

23


84



DCM Module

Distance (mi./km)


FBG-DCM (200)

124.2/200

FBG-DCM (240)

149.1/240

DSC R

PMD (ps)

PD L (dB )


3.7

1.0

0.2

23

3.7

1.0

0.2

23



Table 3-64 Performance requirements for C-band dispersion compensation optical fibers (G. 653 fibers) DCM Module

Distance (mi./km)

Max. Insert ion Loss (dB)

DSC R

PMD (ps)

PDL (dB)

Max. Allowe d Powera (dBm)

Opera ting Wavel ength (nm)

DCM(S)

3.1/5

2

0.2

0.1

20

DCM(T)

6.2/10

3

90% to 110%

0.3

0.1

20

1528 to 1568

DCM(A)

12.4/20

5

0.5

0.1

20


Table 3-65 Performance requirements for C-band dispersion compensation optical fibers (TWRS fibers)

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

DCM Module

Distance (mi./km)


DSC R

PMD (ps)

PDL (dB)



DCM(A)

12.4/20

2.3

0.3

0.1

20

DCM(B)

24.8/40

2.8

90% to 110%

0.3

0.1

20

1528 to 1568

DCM(C)

37.3/60

3.3

0.4

0.1

20

DCM(D)

49.7/80

3.8

0.4

0.1

20

DCM(E)

62.1/100

4.2

0.5

0.1

20

DCM(F)

74.5/120

4.7

0.5

0.1

20


85


DCM Module

Distance (mi./km)



DSC R

PMD (ps)

PDL (dB)




Table 3-66 Mechanical specifications of the DCM frame Item

Specification

Dimensions

48 mm (H) x 484 mm (W) x 270.5 mm (D) (1.9 in. (H) x 19.1 in. (W) x 10.6 in. (D) )

Weight

1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)

H = Height, W = Width, D = Depth

3.6.2 CRPC Frame The CRPC frame is used to hold the CRPC board, fan tray assembly, and power distribution box. The frame is installed into the open rack. Figure 3-50 shows the appearance of a CRPC frame. In the middle of the frame, the one with the front panel is the CRPC board. The fan tray assembly is at the left of the board. At the right are two power supplies as mutual backup.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


86



Figure 3-50 CRPC frame

3

2 1

1: Fan tray assembly

2: CRPC board

3: Power distribution box

Table 3-67 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame Item

Value

Mechanical specifications

535 mm (W) x 257 mm (D) x 86 mm (H) or 21.1 in. (W) x 10.1 in. (D) x 3.4 in. (H)

Weight

3 kg (6.6 lb)

3.6.3 Fiber Spooling Frame The fiber spooling frame is used to store fiber jumpers in a coil.

Appearance The fiber spool box is installed at the bottom of the cabinet, more than 50 mm away from the chassis. Figure 3-51 shows a fiber spooling frame.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


87



Figure 3-51 Fiber spooling frame

1 2

5 6

1: Attenuator holder

2: Mechanical VOA pen

5: Mounting ear

6: Fiber spool

3: Captive screw

4: Fiber holder

Specifications of the Fiber Spooling Frame l

Dimensions: 101.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (4.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))

l

Maximum Capacity: A maximum of 40 fibers can be threaded into an fiber spooling frame from each side, and the maximum total fiber length is 50 m.

l

Weight: 4.1 kg (0.22 lb.)

3.7 Overview of Boards

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


88



3.7.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, dimensions, and the laser hazard level label.

3.7.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions This section describes the appearance and dimensions of the board.

CAUTION Always wear a properly grounded ESD wrist strap when holding a board to prevent static from damaging the board. Table 3-68 shows the appearance and dimensions of the different board types. Table 3-68 Board appearance and dimensions Board Appearance

Width

Board Name

Numbe r of Slots Per Board

Heig ht (mm /in.)

Wi dt h (m m/ in. )

Dep th (m m/ in.)

TN11L4G

1

264.6 /10.4

25. 4/1 .0

220. 0/8. 7

Height

Depth

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


89


Board Appearance

Width


Board Name


Heig ht (mm /in.)

Wi dt h (m m/ in. )

Dep th (m m/ in.)

TN11OAU1

2

264.6 /10.4

50. 8

220. 0/8. 7

TN11M40

3

264.6 /10.4

76. 2

220. 0/8. 7

TN11AUX

1

107.6 /4.2

25. 4/1 .0

220. 0/8. 7

Height

Depth

Width

Height

Depth

Width

Height Depth

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


90


Board Appearance

Width


Board Name


Heig ht (mm /in.)

Wi dt h (m m/ in. )

Dep th (m m/ in.)

TN11LSXL

4

264.6 /10.4

10 1.6 / 4.0

220. 0/8. 7

TN21MR4

1

118.9 /4.7

25. 4/1 .0

220. 0/8. 7

Height

Depth

Width

Height Depth

3.7.1.2 Symbols on Boards This section describes the symbols on boards.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


91



Table 3-69 Symbols on Boards Label

Type

Description

Laser safety class label

Indicates that the laser safety class of boards is HAZARD LEVEL 1M and there may be laser radiation. It warns users not to directly look into fiber connectors without taking any protection measures; instead an optical instrument that can attenuate optical power must be used.

Fiber type label

Applies to TN11LTX, TN12LSC, and TN55NS3 boards. It specifies the fiber type for the boards.

CAUTION

HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 只能使用G.657A2 光纤

NOTE To prevent the cabinet door from squeezing fibers, the board can only use G.657A2 fibers. SM SFP WORK WITH G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 单模光模块仅配合使用 G.657A2 光纤

Fiber type label

Applies to TN54THA boards. It specifies the fiber type for the boards. NOTE To prevent the cabinet door from squeezing fibers, the board can only use G.657A2 fibers.

!

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

警告: 开启电源前，务必连好光纤 WARNING : FIBERS MUST BE CONNECTED SEFORE POWER UP

Warning label

Applies to CRPC boards. It provides precautions for the boards.

Heat hazard label

Indicates that the board surface temperature is high and it may cause body injury.


92



3.7.2 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category The following types of boards are available for the system. Table 3-70 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 8800. Table 3-70 Boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

Optical transponder unit

TN12LD M

2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board

Y

Y

N

TN11LD MD

2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving

Y

Y

N

TN11LD MS

2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving

Y

Y

N

TN12LDX

2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

Y

Y

Y

TN11LEM 24

22 x GE + 2 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet switch board

Y

Y

Y

TN11LEX 4

4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet switch board

Y

Y

Y

TN11LOA

8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength Conversion Board

Y

Y

Y

TN11LOG

8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

TN12LOG TN11LO M

8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board

TN12LO M TN13LQ M

4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit

Y

Y

N

TN12LQ MD

4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving

Y

Y

N

TN12LQ MS

4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving

Y

Y

N

TN12LSC

100Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

Y

Y

Y

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


93


Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

TN11LSQ

40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

Y

Y

Y

TN12LSX

10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

TN13LSX TN12LSX L


TN15LSX L TN12LSX LR

40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit

Y

Y

N

TN11LSX R


Y

Y

N

TN11LTX

10-Port 10Gbit/s Service Multiplexing & Optical Wavelength Conversion Board

Y

Y

Y

TN12LW XS

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)

Y

Y

Y

TN11TM X

4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU-2 wavelength conversion board

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

2 x 10G tributary service processing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12TM X Tributary unit


TN52TDX TN53TDX TN54TEM 28

24xGE+4x10GE Ethernet tributary unit

Y

Y

Y

TN54THA

16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board

Y

Y

Y

TN54TOA

8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board

Y

Y

Y

TN52TOG

8 x GE tributary service processing board

Y

Y

Y

TN52TO M

8 x multi-rate ports service processing board

Y

Y

Y

TN52TQX

4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

Y

Y

Y

TN53TQX

Y

Y

Y

TN55TQX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN53TSX L

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board


94


Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN53NQ2

Y

Y

Y

TN54NQ2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN54NS3

Y

Y

Y

TN55NS3

Y

Y

Y

TN54TSX L Line unit

TN52ND2

2 x 10G line service processing board

TN53ND2 TN52NQ2

TN52NS2

4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board

10G Line Service Processing Board

TN53NS2 TN52NS3

PID unit

40G line service processing board

TN54ENQ 2


Y

Y

Y

TN54NPO 2

12 x OTU2 PID Board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN55NPO 2

Crossconnect unit and system and communica tion unit


TN55NPO 2E

10G PID line service processing board, 20– channel extended

Y

Y

Y

TN16XCH

High Cross-connection, System Control and Clock Processing Board

N

N

Y

TNK2SX M

OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

TNK4SX M TN52XCH


N

Y

N

TN52XC M

Cross & connect process board (Support highcross and low-cross)

N

Y

N

TNK2XC T


Y

N

N

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


95


Board Category

Board Name

Board Description


OptiX OSN 8800 T64

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

TN52SCC

N

Y

N

TNK2SCC

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TNK4XC T TN16SCC

system control and communication unit

TN51SCC d

TN16AUX

system auxiliary interface unit

TN51AUX TNK2SX H


TNK4SX H Optical multiplexer and demultiple xer unit

TN11M40

40-channel multiplexing unit

TN12M40 TN11D40

40-channel demultiplexing unit

TN12D40 TN11M40 V

40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA

TN12M40 V TN11D40 V

40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA

Y

Y

N

TN12FIU

fiber interface unit

Y

Y

Y

TN13FIU

Y

Y

Y

TN14FIU

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11ITL

interleaver board

TN12ITL

Fixed optical add and drop

TN11SFIU

fiber interface unit for sync timing

Y

Y

Y

TN11CM R2

CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

Y

Y

Y

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


96



Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

multiplexin g unit

TN11CM R4


Y

Y

Y

TN11DM R1

CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/ drop multiplexing board

Y

Y

N

TN11MR2

2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

Y

Y

Y

TN11MR4


Y

Y

Y

TN11MR8


Y

Y

N

TN11MR8 V

8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA

Y

Y

Y

TN11SBM 2

2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop board

Y

Y

N

TN11RDU 9

9-port ROADM demultiplexing board

Y

Y

Y

TN11RM U9a

9-port ROADM multiplexing board

Y

Y

Y

TN11ROA M

reconfigurable optical adding board

Y

Y

N

TN12WS D9

9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Reconfigur able optical add and drop multiplexin g unit

TN13WS D9 TN12WS M9

9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board

TN13WS M9 TN11WS MD2

2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board

Y

Y

N

TN11WS MD4


Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12WS MD4 TN11WS MD9

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

9-port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board


97



Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

Optical amplifier unit

TN11CRP C

case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for Cband

Y

Y

Y

TN11DAS 1

optical amplifier unit

Y

Y

Y

TN11HBA

high-power booster amplifier board

Y

Y

Y

TN11OAU 1


Y

Y

N

TN12OAU 1

Y

Y

Y

TN13OAU 1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN12OBU 1

Y

Y

Y

TN11OBU 2

Y

Y

N

TN12OBU 2

Y

Y

Y

TN11OBU 1

Optical supervisory channel unit

Optical protection unit

optical booster unit

TN11RAU 1

backward raman and erbium doped fiber hybrid optical amplifier unit

Y

Y

Y

TN11HSC 1

high power unidirectional optical supervisory channel board

Y

Y

Y

TN12SC1

unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit

Y

Y

Y

TN12SC2

bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit

Y

Y

Y

TN11ST2

bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit

Y

Y

Y

TN11DCP

2-channel optical path protection unit

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12DCP TN11OLP

optical line protection unit

TN12OLP TN11SCS

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

sync optical channel separator unit


98



Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

Spectrum analyzer unit

TN11MC A4

4-channel spectrum analyzer unit

Y

Y

Y

TN11MC A8


Y

Y

Y

TN11OPM 8

8-channel optical power monitoring board

Y

Y

Y

TN11WM U

wavelength monitoring unit

Y

Y

Y

Variable optical attenuator unit

TN12VA1

1-channel variable optical attenuator unit

Y

Y

Y

TN12VA4


Y

Y

Y

Optical power and dispersion equalizing unit

TN11DCU

dispersion compensation board

Y

Y

Y

TN11TDC

single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board

Y

Y

Y

Clock unit

TN52STG

centralized clock board

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

TNK2STG OCS system unit

SSN4BPA

optical booster and pre-amplifier board

Y

Y

N

SSN3EAS 2

2-port 10xGE switching and processing board

Y

Y

N

SSN1EGS H

16 x GE Ethernet switching and processing board

Y

Y

N

SSN4SF64

1 x STM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function

Y

Y

N

SSN1SF64 A


Y

Y

N

SSN4SFD 64


Y

Y

N

SSN4SL64

1 x STM-64 optical interface board

Y

Y

N

SSN4SLD 64


Y

Y

N

SSN3SLH 41

16 x STM-4/STM-1 optical interface board

Y

Y

N

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


99


Board Category

ROPA subsystem unitb Interface area unitc


Board Name

Board Description

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

SSN4SLO 16


Y

Y

N

SSN4SLQ 16

4xSTM-16 optical interface board

Y

Y

N

SSN4SLQ 64

4 x STM-64 line interface board

N

Y

N

TN11GFU

gain flatness unit

Y

Y

Y

TN11RGU

ROPA gain unit

Y

Y

Y

TN11ROP

ROPA pumping unit

Y

Y

Y

TN16ATE

interface board of alarm & timing & expanding

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

TN51EFI1

Y

Y

N

TN51EFI2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

TN51ATE TN16EFI

TNL1STI

EMI filter interface board

synchronous timing interface board

TN52STI TN51PIU

power interface unit

TN16PIU

a: For TN11RMU9: OptiX OSN 8800 T16 only supports the TN11RMU902. b: For details of the ROPA subsystem unit refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide. c: For details of the interface area unit refer to 3.2 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack and Power Requirement. d:TN51SCC only supports General OptiX OSN 8800 T32.

3.7.3 OptiX OSN 6800 Board Category The following types of boards are available for the system. Table 3-71 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 6800.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


100



Table 3-71 Boards for the OptiX OSN 6800 Board Category

Board Name

Board Description


TN11ECOM

Enhanced communication interface unit

TN11L4G

Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet line capacity

TN11LDGS

2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving

TN11LDGD

2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving

TN12LDM


TN11LDMD


TN11LDMS


TN12LDX


TN11LEM24

22×GE + 2×10GE and 2×OTU2 ethernet switch board

TN11LEX4

4×10GE and 2×OTU2 ethernet switch board

TN11LOA


TN11LOG


TN12LOG TN11LOM TN12LOM


TN11LQG

4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board

TN13LQM


TN11LQMD


TN12LQMD TN11LQMS TN12LQMS

4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving

TN12LSC

100Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

TN11LSQ


TN11LSX

10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

TN12LSX TN13LSX Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


101


Board Category


Board Name

Board Description

TN11LSXL


TN12LSXL TN15LSXL TN11LSXLR


TN12LSXLR TN11LSXR


TN11LTX

10-Port 10Gbit/s Service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board

TN11LWX2

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board

TN11LWXD

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)

TN11LWXS


TN12LWXS TN11TMX TN12TMX Tributary unit


TN11TBE

10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board

TN11TDG


TN11TDX


TN12TDX TN52TDX TN53TDX TN52TOG


TN11TOM


TN52TOM TN11TQM

4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board

TN12TQM TN11TQS

4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board

TN11TQX

4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

TN52TQX

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


102


Board Category

Board Name


Board Description

TN55TQX

Line unit

TN11TSXL

40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

TN11ND2

2 x 10G line service processing board

TN12ND2 TN52ND2 TN53ND2 TN51NQ2


TN52NQ2 TN53NQ2 TN11NS2


TN12NS2 TN52NS2 TN53NS2 TN11NS3

40G line service processing board

TN52NS3

NOTE The TN54NS3/55NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800 only supports relay mode.

TN54NS3 TN55NS3 PID unit

Cross-connect unit and system and communicatio n unit

TN11BMD4

PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz

TN11BMD8

PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz

TN12ELQX

4×Electrical OTU2 with 4×10G Tributary Board

TN12PTQX

12× OTU2 PID board with 4×10G Tributary

TN11XCS

centralized cross connect board

TN12XCS TN11SCC


TN51SCC TN52SCC

Optical multiplexer and

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

TN11AUX


TN11M40

40-channel multiplexing unit

TN12M40


103



Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

demultiplexer unit

TN11D40

40-channel demultiplexing unit

TN12D40 TN11M40V

40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA

TN12M40V TN11D40V

40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA

TN11FIU


TN12FIU TN13FIU TN14FIU TN11ITL

interleaver board

TN12ITL

Optical add and drop multiplexing unit

Reconfigurabl e optical add and drop multiplexing unit

TN11SFIU


TN11CMR2


TN11CMR4


TN11DMR1

CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board

TN11MR2


TN11MR4


TN11MR8


TN11MR8V

8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA

TN11SBM2


TN11RDU9

9-port ROADM demultiplexing board

TN11RMU9

9-port ROADM multiplexing board

TN11ROAM

reconfigurable optical adding board

TN11WSD9

9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board

TN12WSD9 TN13WSD9 TN11WSM9

9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board

TN12WSM9

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


104


Board Category

Board Name


Board Description

TN13WSM9 TN11WSMD2


TN11WSMD4


TN12WSMD4


TN11WSMD9

9-port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board

TN11CRPC

case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band

TN11DAS1


TN11HBA

high-power booster amplifier board

TN11OAU1


TN12OAU1 TN13OAU1 TN11OBU1


TN12OBU1 TN11OBU2


TN12OBU2

Optical supervisory channel unit

TN11RAU1


TN11HSC1


TN11SC1


TN12SC1 TN11SC2


TN12SC2


TN11ST2


TN11DCP


TN12DCP TN11OLP


TN12OLP

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


105


Board Category




Board Name

Board Description

TN11SCS


TN11MCA4


TN11MCA8


TN11OPM8


TN11WMU

wavelength monitoring unit

TN11VA1


TN12VA1 TN11VA4


TN12VA4 Optical power and dispersion equalizing unit

TN11DCU


TN11TDC

single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board

Clock unit

TN11STG

centralized clock board

ROPA subsystem unita

TN11GFU

gain flatness unit

TN11RGU

ROPA gain unit

TN11ROP

ROPA pumping unit

TN11EFI

EMI filter interface board

TN11PIU


Interface area unitb

a: For the details of the ROPA subsystem unit, refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide. b: For the details of the interface area unit, refer to Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces.

3.7.4 OptiX OSN 3800 Board Category The following types of boards are available for the system. Table 3-72 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 3800. Table 3-72 Boards for the OptiX OSN 3800

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Board Category

Board Name

Board Description


TN11ECOM

Enhanced communication interface unit


106


Board Category


Board Name

Board Description

TN11L4G

Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet line capacity

TN11LDGS

2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving

TN11LDGD

2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving

TN12LDM


TN11LDMD


TN11LDMS


TN12LDX


TN11LOA


TN11LOG


TN12LOG TN11LOM TN12LOM


TN11LQG

4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board

TN13LQM


TN11LQMD


TN12LQMD TN11LQMS TN12LQMS TN11LSX

4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

TN12LSX TN13LSX

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

TN11LSXR


TN11LWX2

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board

TN11LWXD

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)

TN11LWXS



107


Board Category

Board Name


Board Description

TN12LWXS TN11TMX TN12TMX Tributary unit


TN11TBE

10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board

TN11TDG


TN11TDX


TN52TOG


TN11TOM


TN52TOM TN11TQM

4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board

TN12TQM

Line unit

TN11TQS

4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board

TN11NS2


TN12NS2 TN52NS2 TN53NS2 Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit

TN21DFIU

bidirectional fiber interface board

TN13FIUa


TN14FIU TN21FIU

Optical add and drop multiplexing unit

TN11SFIU


TN21CMR1


TN11CMR2


TN21CMR2 TN11CMR4


TN21CMR4 TN11DMR1 TN21DMR1 TN11MR2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit


108


Board Category

Board Name


Board Description

TN21MR2 TN11MR4


TN21MR4


TN11SBM2


TN11DAS1


TN11OAU1


TN12OAU1 TN13OAU1 TN11OBU1


TN12OBU1 TN11OBU2


TN12OBU2

Cross-connect unit and system and communicatio n unit

TN11RAU1


TN21SCC


TN22SCC TN21AUX


TN22AUX Optical supervisory channel unit

TN11HSC1


TN11SC1


TN12SC1 TN11SC2


TN12SC2


TN11ST2


TN11DCP


TN12DCP TN11OLP


TN12OLP

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


109


Board Category




Board Name

Board Description

TN11SCS


TN11MCA4


TN11MCA8


TN11OPM8


TN11VA1


TN12VA1 TN11VA4


TN12VA4 Optical power and dispersion equalizing unit

TN11DCU


Interface area unitb

TN21PIU


TN21APIU

AC Power Interface Unit

a: For TN13FIU: OptiX OSN 3800 only supports the TN13FIU01. b: For the details of the interface area unit, refer to Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces.

3.7.5 Optical Attenuator Optical attenuators are classified into fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical attenuators (VOAs).

3.7.5.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. The common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB. Figure 3-52 shows the appearance of a fixed optical attenuator.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


110



Figure 3-52 Fixed optical attenuator

3.7.5.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator A mechanical variable optical attenuator (MVOA) can adjust the optical power on an optical path within a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of an MVOA is 2 dB to 30 dB. Figure 3-53 shows the appearance of a common MVOA. Figure 3-53 Appearance of an MVOA

3.8 Quick Reference Table of the Units Quick reference tables include those for specifications of optical transponder units, optical amplifier units and other boards, and also the functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards.

3.8.1 Specification of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards, and line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.

3.8.1.1 OTUs and Tributary Boards Specification on the Client Side The main client-side specifications of the optical transponder unit (OTU) and tributary boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


111



Table 3-73 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of OTUs and Tributary Boards Board Name

TN11ECOM

TN11L4G

TN11LDGD

Access Service Type

FE

GE

GE

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported

Note Mean Launched Optical Power

Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm)

Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)

Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

100 BASEFX-10 km

-3

-11.5

-19

-3

100 BASEFX-40 km

0

-4.5

-20

-3

100 BASEFX-80 km

5

-2

-22

-3

1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km

0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9

2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km

-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9


-9.5

-17

0

-2.5


eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

112


Board Name

TN11LDGS

TN12LDM

Access Service Type






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

GE

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

113


Board Name

Access Service Type

STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

TN11LDMD






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI


0

-19

-3

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

5 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km

0

-28

-9


4 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-9.5

-17

0

eSFP

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

-2.5


eSFP CWDM

114


Board Name

Access Service Type








Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9



0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP CWDM

eSFP DWDM

115


Board Name

TN11LDMS

Access Service Type




Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)



FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI


0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP

eSFP CWDM

116


Board Name

Access Service Type




Maximu m (dBm)

TN12LDX

TN11LEM24



Minim um (dBm)



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ OTU2e

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km

-1

-6

-11 (multirate )/-12.6 (10GE LAN)

-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)

XFP


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24.0

-7

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP

2

-3

–16

0

XFP DWDM

10GE LAN

10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km

-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

XFP

FE/GE

1000 BASESX-0.5 km (I-850-LC)

-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP

1000 BASELX-10 km (I-1310-LC)

-3

-9.5

-20

-3

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


117


Board Name

Access Service Type

TN11LOA





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

10 Gbit/s BASE-SR-0.3 km (SFP+)

-1

-7.3

-11.1

-1

10 Gbit/s BASE-LR-10 km (SFP+)

0.5

-8.2

-12.6

0.5


-1

-7.3

-11.1

-1


0.5

-8.2

-12.6

0.5

FC200/GE/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

FC400/ FICON4G

FC400/ FICON4G Module-0.3 km (Multi mode)

-1

-9

-14

0

FC400/ FICON4G Module-10 km (Single mode)

-2

-8

-18

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN

TN11LEX4


10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN

GE/FC100/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ FDDI/FICON/ FE/DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


SFP+

SFP+

eSFP

118


Board Name

Access Service Type






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

SDI/HD-SDI/ 3G-SDI

270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km

0

-7

-16

0

GE/FC100/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ FDDI/FICON/ FE/DVB-ASI


0

-19

-3

OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE


0

-28

-9

FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP CWDM

119


Board Name

Access Service Type




Maximu m (dBm)


Minim um (dBm)

OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE


0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC800/ FICON8G

1600-M5E-SNI-0.3 km (SFP +)

-1

-7.3

-11.1

-3

SFP+

1600-M5E-SNI-0.3 km (SFP +)

-0.5

-8.2

-12.6

0.5

1000 BASEBX10-U

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX10-D

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX-U

3

-2

-23

-3

1000 BASEBX-D

3

-2

-23

-3


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

GE

TN11LOG


GE

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP

eSFP

120


Board Name

Access Service Type


GE

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)




Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

5

-2

-23

-3


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9

1000 BASEBX10-U

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX10-D

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX-U

3

-2

-23

-3

1000 BASEBX-D

3

-2

-23

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

TN12LOG



eSFP CWDM

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

121


Board Name

TN11LOM

Access Service Type

GE

FC 100/ FC 200/ FC 400/ FICON/ FICON Express

GE/ FC 100/ FC 200

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

FC400/ FICON4G Module-0.3 km (Multimode)

-1

-9

-14

0


-2

-8

-18

0

FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-0.5 km (Multimode)

-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-2 km (Single mode)

-3

-10

-18

0


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9


eSFP

eSFP CWDM

122


Board Name

TN12LOM

Access Service Type

GE

FC 100/ FC 200/ FC 400/ FICON/ FICON Express

GE/ FC 100/ FC 200

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

FC400/ FICON4G Module-0.3 km (Multimode)

-1

-9

-14

0


-2

-8

-18

0

FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-0.5 km (Multimode)

-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-2 km (Single mode)

-3

-10

-18

0


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9


eSFP

eSFP CWDM

123


Board Name

Access Service Type

TN13LQM





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

1000 BASEBX10-U

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX10-D

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX-U

3

-2

-23

-3

1000 BASEBX-D

3

-2

-23

-3


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

GE

TN11LQG


GE

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

124


Board Name

Access Service Type


TN11LQMD






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9



0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP CWDM

125


Board Name

Access Service Type

OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

TN12LQMD






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI


0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

126


Board Name

Access Service Type

FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

TN11LQMS






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9



0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP CWDM

127


Board Name

Access Service Type


TN12LQMS






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9



0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

128


Board Name

Access Service Type






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

3

-2

-28

-9

STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

L-16.2-80 km



0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

TN11LSQ

STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3

40G Transponder

3

0

-6

3

-

TN11LSX

OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ FC1200a


-1

-6


-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)

XFP


2

-4.7


-1

TN12LSX

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP CWDM

129


Board Name

Access Service Type






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)


4

0

-24.0

-7

10GE LAN/ FC1200a


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC1200


-1

-6


-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24.0

-7

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP

2

-3

–16

0

XFP DWDM

10GE LAN/ FC1200


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

XFP

TN11LSXL

STM-256/ OC-768

40G Transponder

3

0

-6

3

-

TN12LSXL/ TN15LSXL

STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3

40G Transponder

3

0

-6

3

-

TN13LSX

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


XFP

130


Board Name

TN11LTX

TN11LWX2

Access Service Type






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)


-1

-6


-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)


2

-4.7


-1


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1


4

0

-24.0

-7

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

0

-19

-3

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)



XFP

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

131


Board Name

Access Service Type




Maximu m (dBm)

TN11LWXD



Minim um (dBm)



0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP


I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9



0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP CWDM

132


Board Name

Access Service Type




Maximu m (dBm)

TN11LWXS TN12LWXS



Minim um (dBm)



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP

ETR/ CLOc/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

ETR/ CLO/ GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI


0

-19

-3

ETR/ CLO/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE


0

-28

-9

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP CWDM

133


Board Name

Access Service Type




Maximu m (dBm)

TN11TMX TN12TMX

TN11TBE



Minim um (dBm)

ETR/ CLO/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE


0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 (without FEC)

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

eSFP

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9


0

-28

-9

eSFP CWDM

2.67 Gbit/s 4 Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

100 BASEFX-10 km

-3

-11.5

-19

-3

eSFP

100 BASEFX-80 km

5

-2

-22

-3


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

FE

GE/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


134


Board Name

Access Service Type

FE/ GE/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

TN11TDG

GE





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)


-1

-6


-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)


2

-4.7


-1


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1


4

0

-24

-7


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

0

-19

-3


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)



XFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

135


Board Name

Access Service Type




Maximu m (dBm)

TN11TDX TN12TDX TN52TDX

TN53TDX



Minim um (dBm)


0

-28

-9


-1

-6


-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24.0

-7

10GE LAN


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC800/ FC1200


-1

-6


-1 (Multirat e)/0.5 (10GE LAN)

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC1200


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24

-7

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2ed

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


XFP

XFP

136


Board Name

TN54TEM28

Access Service Type



Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)



10GE LAN/ FC1200


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

XFP

10GE LAN


-1

-7.3

-11.1

-1

SFP+


0.5

-8.2

-12.6

0.5

1000 BASESX-0.5 km (I-850-LC)

-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km (I-1310-LC)

-3

-9.5

-20

-3

OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

GE/FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/FE/ DVB-ASI

1000 BASELX-10km (I-1310-LC)

-3

-9.5

-20

-3

GE

1000 BASEBX10-U

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX10-D

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX-U

3

-2

-23

-3

GE/ FE/

TN54THA


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


SFP+

eSFP

137


Board Name

TN54TOA

Access Service Type






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

1000 BASEBX-D

3

-2

-23

-3

FC400/ FICON4G Module (Multimode)

-1

-9

-14

0

FC400/ FICON4G Module (Single mode)

-2

-8

-18

0

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

FC200/FC100/ FE/GE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

0

-19

-3

FC400/ FICON4G

OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)



eSFP

eSFP CWDM

138


Board Name

Access Service Type




Maximu m (dBm)

TN52TOG



Minim um (dBm)

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/FC100/ GE/STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI/FE


0

-28

-9

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/FC100/ GE/STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI/FE


0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

SDI/HD-SDI

270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km

0

-7

-16

0

Video eSFP

GE

1000 BASEBX10-U

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

eSFP

1000 BASEBX10-D

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX-U

3

-2

-23

-3

1000 BASEBX-D

3

-2

-23

-3


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

GE

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP

139


Board Name

Access Service Type





Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

5

-2

-23

-3


0

-19

-3


0

-28

-9

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9

0

-19

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

TN11TOM


OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)



eSFP CWDM

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

140


Board Name

Access Service Type




Maximu m (dBm)

TN52TOM



Minim um (dBm)



0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

SDI

1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-20 km

0

-7

-22

0

eSFP

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP

141


Board Name

Access Service Type






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

3

-2

-28

-9

STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

L-16.2-80 km



0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

SDI

1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-20 km

0

-7

-22

0

eSFP

GE

1000 BASEBX10-U

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

eSFP

1000 BASEBX10-D

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX-U

3

-2

-23

-3

1000 BASEBX-D

3

-2

-23

-3

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP CWDM

142


Board Name

TN11TQM

Access Service Type



Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)



FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9


TN12TQM




0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

GE/ FC100/ STM-4/

1000 BASELX-10 km

-3

-9

-19

-3

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

143


Board Name

Access Service Type

ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI


TN11TQS






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

1000 BASELX-40 km

0

-5

-20

-3

1000 BASEZX-80 km

5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9



0

-19

-3



0

-28

-9



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1

I-16-2 km

-3

-10

-18

-3

eSFP

S-16.1-15 km

0

-5

-18

0

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


eSFP CWDM

144


Board Name

TN11TQX TN52TQX

TN53TQX

Access Service Type






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)

L-16.1-40 km

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 km

3

-2

-28

-9


0

-28

-9

eSFP CWDM

2.67 Gbit/s 4 Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM


-1

-6


-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)

XFP


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24.0

-7

10GE LAN


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1



-1

-6


-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2ee

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


XFP

145


Board Name

Access Service Type






Maximu m (dBm)

Minim um (dBm)


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24

-7

10GE LAN /FC1200


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1



-1

-6


-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)



2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24

-7

10GE LAN /FC1200


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

TN11TSXL

STM-256/ OC-768

40G Transponder

3

0

-6

3

-

TN53TSXL

STM-256/ OC-768/OTU3

40G Transponder

3

0

-6

3

-


TN55TQX

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


XFP

146


Board Name

Access Service Type




Maximu m (dBm)



Minim um (dBm)

a: Only TN12LSX/TN13LSX supports FC1200 service. b: Only TN12LQMD/TN12LQMS/TN12TQM support OTU1 service. c: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/CLO services. d: Only TN52TDX supports OTU2/OTU2e services. e: Only TN52TQX supports OTU2/OTU2e services.

Table 3-74 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of TN12LSC/TN54TSXL Board Name

TN12LSC

TN54TSXL

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interfac e Type Suppor ted

Tra nsm it OM A per Lan e (Mi n)

Tra ns mit OM A per Lan e (Ma x)

Rev eive r Sen siti vity (O MA ) per Lan e

Min imu m recei ver over load (OM A) per Lan e

Ave rag e Lau nch Po wer per Lan e (Mi n)

Ave rag e Lau nch Po wer per Lan e (Ma x)

Ave rag e Rev eive r Po wer per Lan e (Mi n)

Ave rag e Rev eive r Po wer per Lan e (Ma x)

Tot al Ave rag e Lau nch Po wer

100GE

100 G BASELR4-10 km

-1.3

4.5

-8.6

4.5

-4.3

4.5

-10. 6

4.5

10.5

100 G BASE-1 0×10 G-10 km

-2.8

3.5

-8.8

3.5

-5.8

3.5

-10. 8

3.5

13.5

40GBA SELR4-10 km

-4

3.5

-11. 5

3.5

-7

2.3

-13. 7

2.3

8.3

40GE

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Opt ical Mo dul e Typ e

CFP

147



3.8.1.2 OTUs and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side The main WDM-side specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs) and line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type. Table 3-75 Quick reference table for DWDM-side specifications of OTU boards and line boards Board Name

TN11L4 G

TN11LD GD

TN11LD GS

Access Service Type

OTU 5G

STM-16/ OTU1

STM-16/ OTU1

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Mean Launched Optical Power


Minimu m Receiver Overloa d (dBm)

Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

3400 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD

2

-2

-25

-9

-

3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD

2

-3

-25

-9

-

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZPIN

-4

-8

-18

0

-

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPD

-4

-8

-28

-9

-

6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

0

-5

-18

0

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-

6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)

0

-5

-28

-9

-


-1

-5

-18

0

-


-1

-5

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-18

0

-


148


Board Name

Access Service Type






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-

TN12LD M

OTU1

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

3

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWD M

TN11LD MD

OTU1


-4

-8

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


-1

-5

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PINXFP

2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M

TN11LD MS

TN12LD X

OTU1

OTU2/ OTU2e

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


149


Board Name

TN11LE M24

TN11LE X4

TN11LO A

TN11LO G

Access Service Type

OTU2

OTU2

OTU2

OTU2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP

2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M

800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-

1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN

2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


150


Board Name

TN12LO G

TN11LO M

Access Service Type

OTU2

OTU2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD

2

-3

-26

-9

-

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN

2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


151


Board Name

TN12LO M

TN11LQ G

Access Service Type

OTU2

FEC 5G/ OTU5G






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-2

-25

-9

-


2

-3

-25

-9

-

TN13LQ M

OTU1

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km

3

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWD M

TN11LQ MD

OTU1


-4

-8

-18

0

-


-4

-8

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-18

0

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


152


Board Name

TN12LQ MD

TN11LQ MS

TN12LQ MS

Access Service Type

OTU1

OTU1

OTU1

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


0

-5

-28

-9

-


-4

-8

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


-1

-5

-18

0

-


-1

-5

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-18

0

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


-1

-5

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


153


Board Name

Access Service Type






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


3

-2

-28

-9

-

TN12LS C

OTU4

40000ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(HFEC)-PIN

0

-5

-16

0

-

TN11LS Q

OTU3

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN

0

-5

-16

0

-

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN

0

-5

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-

TN11LS X TN12LS X

TN13LS X

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


154


Board Name

TN11LS XL

TN12LS XL

Access Service Type

OTU3

OTU3






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-

TN15LS XL

OTU3

60000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-BPSK-PIN

0

-5

-16

0

-

TN11LS XLR

OTU3


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-

TN12LS XLR

TN11LS XR

OTU3/ OTU3e

OTU2/ OTU2e

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


155


Board Name

Access Service Type






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-

TN11LT X

OTU4

40000ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(HFEC)-PIN

0

-15

-16

0

-

TN11L WX2

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZPINa

-1

-5

-18

0

-

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPDa

-1

-5

-28

9

-


3

-2

-18

0

-


3

-2

-26

-10

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


-4

-8

-18

0

-

TN11L WXD

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


156


Board Name

Access Service Type

STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

TN11L WXS TN12L WXSb

TN11T MX

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE/ ETR/ CLO

OTU2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


-4

-8

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-18

0

-


0

-5

-26

-10

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


-1

-5

-18

0

-


-1

-5

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-18

0

-


3

-2

-26

-10

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


157


Board Name

TN12T MX

TN11N D2

TN12N D2

Access Service Type

OTU2

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2/ OTU2e

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


158


Board Name

TN52N D2

TN53N D2

Access Service Type

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2/ OTU2e

TN51N Q2/ TN52N Q2/ TN53N Q2/ TN54N Q2

OTU2/ OTU2e

TN11NS 2

OTU2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


159


Board Name

TN12NS 2

TN52NS 2

Access Service Type

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2/ OTU2e

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


160


Board Name

TN53NS 2

TN11NS 3

TN52NS 3

TN54NS 3

TN55NS 3

Access Service Type

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU3/ OTU3e

OTU3/ OTU3e

OTU3/ OTU3e

OTU3/ OTU3e






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-

60000ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-BPSK-PIN

0

-5

-16

0

-

a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode. b: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/CLO services.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


161



Table 3-76 Quick reference table for CWDM-side specifications of OTU boards Board Name

TN11E COM

Access Service Type

GE




Minimu m Overload Point (dBm)

Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km

5

0

-19

-3

eSFP CWD M


5

0

-28

-9

eSFP CWD M

TN11L DGD

STM-16/ OTU1

1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

2

-0.5

-28

-9

-

TN11L DGS

STM-16/ OTU1


5

2.5

-28

-9

-

TN12L DM

OTU1


5

0

-28

-9

eSFP CWD M

TN11L QG

FEC 5G/ OTU5G

5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-50 km

5

2

-18

0

eSFP CWD M

5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-70 km

5

2

-28

-9

eSFP CWD M

TN13L QM

OTU1


5

0

-28

-9

eSFP CWD M

TN11L QMD

OTU1


2

-0.5

-28

-9

-

TN11L QMS

OTU1


5

2.5

-28

-9

-

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


162


Board Name

Access Service Type



Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


Minimu m Overload Point (dBm)

Note

TN11L WX2

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ SDI/ FE


5

2.5

-28

-9

-

TN11L WXD

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ SDI/ FE


2

-0.5

-28

-9

-

TN11L WXS

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ SDI/ FE/ ETR/ CLO


5

2.5

-28

-9

-

TN12L WXSa

a: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/CLO services.

Table 3-77 Quick reference table for specifications of WDM-side gray optical modules on OTU boards and line boards Board Name

TN11L EM24

Access Service Type



Minimu m (dBm)


Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Note

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


163


Board Name

Access Service Type






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

TN11L OA

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

TN12L OG

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

TN53N D2

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

TN51N Q2

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

TN52N Q2/ TN53N Q2/ TN54N Q2

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

TN53N S2

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

TN11L EX4

TN12T MX

TN12N D2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


164


Board Name

TN54N S3

Access Service Type




Minimu m (dBm)



Note

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

OTU3/ OTU3e

40G Transponder

3

0

-6

3

-

3.8.2 Specification of Optical Amplifying Unit The main specifications of the optical amplifier unit include the operating wavelength range, channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output power of a single wavelength. Table 3-78 Quick reference table for optical amplifier unit Board Name

OAU100

DAS1/ OAU101

OAU102

OAU103

OAU105

Channel Gain (dB)

16 to 25.5

20 to 31

20 to 31

24 to 36

23 to 34

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Nomin al Chann el Gain (dB)

Input Power Range per Channel (dBm)

Nominal singlewavelength input optical power (dBm)

40 channels

80 channels

40 channels

80 channels

16

-32 to -14

-32 to -17

-14

-17

22

-32 to -20

-32 to -23

-20

-23

25.5

-32 to -23.5

-32 to -27.5

-23.5

-26.5

20

-32 to -16

-32 to -19

-16

-19

26

-32 to -22

-32 to -25

-22

-25

31

-32 to -27

-32 to -30

-27

-30

20

-32 to -19

-32 to -22

-19

-22

26

-32 to -25

-32 to -28

-25

-28

31

-32 to -30

-32

-30

-32

24

-32 to -20

-32 to -23

-20

-23

29

-32 to -25

-32 to -28

-25

-28

36

-32

-32

-32

-32

23

-32 to -16

-32 to -19

-16

-19

30

-32 to -23

-32 to -26

-23

-26


165


Board Name

Channel Gain (dB)

OAU106

16 to 23


Nomin al Chann el Gain (dB)

Input Power Range per Channel (dBm)

Nominal singlewavelength input optical power (dBm)

40 channels

80 channels

40 channels

80 channels

34

-32 to -27

-32 to -30

-27

-30

16

-24 to -12

-24 to -15

-12

-15

19

-24 to -15

-24 to -18

-15

-18

23

-24 to -19

-24 to -22

-19

-22

OBU101

20±1.5

20

-32 to -20

-32 to -23

-20

-23

OBU103

23±1.5

23

-32 to -19

-32 to -22

-19

-22

OBU104

17±1.5

17

-32 to -17

-32 to -20

-17

-20

OBU205

23±1.5

23

-24 to -16

-24 to -19

-16

-19

Table 3-79 Quick reference table for TN12OBU1P1 Board Name

Total input power range at the VI optical port(dBm)

Maximum total output optical power(dBm)

TN12OBU1P1

-30 to 7

9

Table 3-80 Quick reference table for CRPC Board Name

Channel Gain (dB)

Maximum Pump Power (dBm)

G.652 fiber

LEAF fiber

CRPC01

≥10

≥12

29

CRPC03

>10

N/A

29.5

Table 3-81 Quick reference table for HBA Board Name

HBA

Channel Gain (dB)

29±1

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Typical Input Power of a Single Wavelength (dBm) 80 channels

40 channels

10 channels

Nominal Input Power Range (dBm)

-22

-19

-13

-25 to -3


Channel Allocation (nm)

1529 to 1561

166



Table 3-82 Quick reference table for RAU1 Board Name

RAU1

Gain range (dB) G.652 fiber

LEAF/G.653/TWRS/TW-C fiber

19 to 33

19 to 35

Max. OUT port optical power (dBm) 20

3.8.3 Insertion Loss Specifications of Boards This section provides the insertion loss specifications of boards. Table 3-83 Quick reference table for board insertion loss specifications Board Name

Insertion Loss (dB)

TN11MR2/TN21MR2

IN-MO

≤1.0

MI-OUT

TN11MR4/TN21MR4

Add/drop channel

≤1.5

IN-MO

≤1.5

MI-OUT

TN11MR8

Add/drop channel

≤2.2

IN-MO

≤3.5

MI-OUT

TN11MR8V

Add/drop channel

≤4

IN-MO

≤3

MI-OUT

TN21CMR1

TN11CMR2/TN21CMR2

Add/drop channel

≤4.5

IN-MO MI-OUT

≤0.8

Add/drop channel

≤1

IN-MO

≤1.0

MI-OUT

TN11CMR4/TN21CMR4

Add/drop channel

≤1.5

IN-MO

≤1.0

MI-OUT Add/drop channel

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


≤2

167


Board Name

Insertion Loss (dB)

TN11DMR1/ TN21DMR1

EIN-EMO


≤0.8

EMI-EOUT WIN-WMO WMI-WOUT Add/drop channel

≤1

TN11SBM2

Add/drop channel

≤3

TN11D40/TN12D40

≤6.5

TN11D40V

≤8a

TN21DFIU

EIN-ETM

≤1.5

ERM-EOUT WIN-WTM WRM-WOUT EIN-ETC

≤1

ERC-EOUT WIN-WTC WRC-WOUT TN11FIU/TN12FIU/ TN13FIU/TN14FIU/ TN21FIU

IN-TM

≤1.5

RM-OUT IN-TC

≤1

RC-OUT TN11SFIU

LINE1-SYS1

≤1.0

LINE2-SYS2 LINE1-OSC1

≤1.5

LINE1-OSC2 TN11ITL01

RE-OUT

<4.5

RO-OUT IN-TE

<2.5

IN-TO TN11ITL04

RE-OUT

<3

RO-OUT IN-TE

<3

IN-TO

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


168


Board Name

Insertion Loss (dB)

TN12ITL

RE-OUT


<4.5

RO-OUT IN-TE

<3.5

IN-TO TN11M40/TN12M40

≤6.5

TN11M40V/TN12M40V

≤8a

TN11DCP

Transmit-end insertion loss

Single mode ≤4

Receive-end insertion loss

Single mode ≤1.5

Multimode ≤4.5

Multimode ≤2 TN12DCP

TN11OLP


Single mode ≤4


Single mode ≤1.5


Single mode ≤4


Single mode ≤1.5

Multimode ≤4.5

Multimode ≤2 TN12OLP

TN11SCS

TN11RDU9

TN11RMU9

TN11ROAM

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Single mode

≤4


Multimode

≤1.5

Wavelength dropping insertion loss

Single mode

≤4

Multimode

≤4.5

Wavelength adding insertion loss

Single mode

≤4

Multimode

≤4.5

IN-Drop(DM1-DM8)

≤12.5

ROA-Drop(DM1-DM8)

≤11.5

IN-EXPO

≤12.5

IN-TOA

≤1

EXPI-OUT

≤8.5

AMxb-TOA

≤12.5a

ROA-OUT

≤1.5

Mxc-OUT

≤9a


169


Board Name


Insertion Loss (dB) IN-DM

≤7

EXPI-OUT

≤14a

IN-EXPO

≤3

TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9/TN13WSD9

IN-DMxd

≤8a

TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9/ TN13WSM9

AMxb-OUT

TN11WSMD2

AMxb-OUT

≤8a

IN-DMxd

≤4.5

TN11WSMD4/ TN12WSMD4

AMxb-OUT

≤8a

TN11WSMD9

AMxb/EXPI-OUT

≤8a

IN-DMxd/EXPO

≤12

IN-EXPO ≤8a

EXPI-OUT

IN-DMxd

a: The value tested when the VOA attenuation is set to 0 dB. b: AMx denotes AM1-AM8. c: Mx denotes M1-M40. d: DMx denotes DM1-DM8. e: DMx denotes DM1-DM20. f: AMx denotes AM1-AM20.

3.8.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio Certain boards of WDM equipment provide MON interfaces. A small number of supervisory signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service performance monitoring of the optical signals. Table 3-84 lists the ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board. Table 3-84 Ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board Board Name

Ratio of MON Interface to Received Signal in Main Path

Ratio of MON Interface to Transmitting Signal in Main Path

CRPC

-

"MON"/"SYS" = 1/99 (20 dB)

D40

"MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10 dB)

-

D40V

"MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10 dB)

-

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


170



Board Name

Ratio of MON Interface to Received Signal in Main Path

Ratio of MON Interface to Transmitting Signal in Main Path

DAS1

"MONR"/"SOUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)

"MONT"/"LOUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)

FIU

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)

HBA

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 1/999 (30 dB)

ITL

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)

M40

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)

M40V

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)

OAU1

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)

OBU1

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)

OBU2

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)

RDU9

"MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB)

RMU9

"MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"TOA" = 3/97 (15 dB)

WSD9

"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB)

WSM9

"MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)

WSMD2

"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)

WSMD4

"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)

WSMD9

"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)

RAU1

-

"MONO"/"OUT"=1/99(20dB) "MONS"/"SYS"=1/99(20dB)

3.8.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards, and Line Boards The main functions and features supported by OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards, and Packet Service Boards are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 3-85.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


171



Table 3-85 Basic functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards, and Line Boards Boards Board Name

Tun abl e Wa vele ngt h Fun ctio n

ESC Fun ctio n

ALS Fun ctio n

OT N Func tion

FEC Encoding

Opti cal Mo dule

PRB S on the Clie nt Side

PRB S on the WD M Side

FEC

AFE C

AFE C-2

HFE C

DW DM

CW DM

TN11EC OM

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

eSFP

N

N

TN11L4 G

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

eSFP

N

N

TN11LD GD

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSFP

N

N

TN11LD GS

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSFP

N

N

TN11LD M

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSFP

Y

Y

TN11LD MD

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

eSFP

Y

Y

TN11LD MS

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

eSFP

Y

Y

TN12LD X

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

XFP

Y

Y

TN11LE M24

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

XFP/ SFP +

N

Y

TN11LE X4

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

XFP/ SFP +

N

Y

TN11LO A

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

Y

eSFP /SFP +

Y

Y

TN11LO G

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

eSFP

N

Y

TN12LO G

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

eSFP

N

Y

TN11LO M

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

eSFP

N

Y

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

WDM Specificatio n


172


Board Name



ESC Fun ctio n

ALS Fun ctio n

OT N Func tion

FEC Encoding

WDM Specificatio n

Opti cal Mo dule



FEC

AFE C

AFE C-2

HFE C

DW DM

CW DM

TN12LO M

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

eSFP

N

Y

TN11LQ G

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

eSFP

N

Y

TN13LQ M

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSFP

Y

Y

TN11LQ MD

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSFP

N

Y

TN12LQ MD

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

eSFP

Y

Y

TN11LQ MS

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSFP

N

Y

TN12LQ MS

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

eSFP

Y

Y

TN12LS C

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

CFP

N

Y

TN11LS Q

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

TN11LS X

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

XFP

Y

Y

TN13LS X

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

XFP

Y

Y

TN11LS XL

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

TN12LS XL

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

TN15LS XL

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

TN12LS X

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


173


Board Name



ESC Fun ctio n

ALS Fun ctio n

OT N Func tion

FEC Encoding

Opti cal Mo dule



FEC

AFE C

AFE C-2

HFE C

DW DM

CW DM

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

TN11LS XR

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

XFP

N

N

TN11LT X

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

XFP

Y

Y

TN11L WX2

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSFP

N

N

TN11L WXD

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSFP

N

N

TN11L WXS

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSFP

N

N

TN11T MX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

eSFP

Y

Y

TN12T MX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

eSFP

Y

Y

TN11N D2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN12N D2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

XFP

-

Y

TN52N D2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN53N D2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

XFP

-

Y

TN51N Q2

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

XFP

-

Y

TN52N Q2

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

XFP

-

Y

TN11LS XLR

WDM Specificatio n

TN12LS XLR

TN12L WXS

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


174


Board Name



ESC Fun ctio n

ALS Fun ctio n

OT N Func tion

FEC Encoding

WDM Specificatio n

Opti cal Mo dule



FEC

AFE C

AFE C-2

HFE C

DW DM

CW DM

TN53N Q2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

XFP

-

Y

TN54N Q2

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

XFP

-

Y

TN11NS 2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN52NS 2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN53NS 2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

XFP

-

Y

TN11NS 3

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN54NS 3

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN55NS 3

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN11TB E

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSFP XFP

N

-

TN11TD G

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSFP

N

-

TN11TD X

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

XFP

Y

-

TN52TD X

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

XFP

Y

-

TN53TD X

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

XFP

Y

-

TN12NS 2

TN52NS 3

TN12TD X

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


175


Board Name



ESC Fun ctio n

ALS Fun ctio n

OT N Func tion

FEC Encoding

WDM Specificatio n

Opti cal Mo dule



FEC

AFE C

AFE C-2

HFE C

DW DM

CW DM

TN54TE M28

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSFP /SFP +

N

N

TN54TH A

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

eSFP

Y

-

TN54TO A

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

eSFP

Y

-

TN11TO M

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSFP

Y

Y

TN11TQ M

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSFP

N

-

TN12TQ M

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSFP

Y

-

TN11TQ S

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

eSFP

N

-

TN11TQ X

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

XFP

Y

-

TN52TQ X

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

XFP

Y

-

TN53TQ X

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

XFP

Y

-

TN55TQ X

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

XFP

Y

-

TN11TS XL

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

-

TN53TS XL

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

-

TN54TS XL

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

CFP

N

-

TN52TO M

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


176


Board Name

TN52TO G



ESC Fun ctio n

ALS Fun ctio n

OT N Func tion

FEC Encoding

WDM Specificatio n

FEC

AFE C

AFE C-2

HFE C

DW DM

CW DM

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Opti cal Mo dule



eSFP

N

-

NOTE l "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function l The SCC board can automatically detect that the eSFP and XFP modules are installed and online. The following information about the modules can be obtained through a query on the U2000: VendorName, BarCode, and type of optical interface. l The boards using different FEC codes cannot interconnect with each other.

3.8.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards, and Line Boards The OTUs, Tributary Boards, and Line Boards support different types of loopback. Table 3-86 Loopback function of OTUs, Tributary Boards, and Line Boards Board Name

Client-Side Inloop

Client-Side Outloop

WDM-Side Inloop

WDM-Side Outloop

Channel loopback

ECOM

Y

Y

Y

N

N

LDGD

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LDGS

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LDM

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LDMD

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LDMS

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LDX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LOA

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

LOG

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LOM

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LQG

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LQM

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


177



Board Name

Client-Side Inloop

Client-Side Outloop

WDM-Side Inloop

WDM-Side Outloop

Channel loopback

LQMD

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LQMS

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LSQ

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LSC

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LSX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11LSXL

N

N

Y

Y

N

TN12LSXL/ TN15LSXL

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LSXLR

N

N

N

N

N

LSXR

N

N

N

N

N

LTX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LWX2

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LWXD

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LWXS

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TMX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

ND2

N

N

Y

Y

Y

NQ2

N

N

Y

Y

Y

NS2

N

N

Y

Y

Y

NS3

N

N

Y

Y

Y

TDG

Y

Y

N

N

N

TDX

Y

Y

N

N

N

TEM28

Y

Y

N

N

N

THA

Y

Y

N

N

Y

TOA

Y

Y

N

N

Y

TOG

Y

Y

N

N

N

TN11TOM

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN52TOM

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TQM

Y

Y

N

N

N

TQS

Y

Y

N

N

N

TQX

Y

Y

N

N

N

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


178



Board Name

Client-Side Inloop

Client-Side Outloop

WDM-Side Inloop

WDM-Side Outloop

Channel loopback

TSXL

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

Table 3-87 Loop function of the Ethernet boards Board Name

Interface

Loop Mode

L4G

Client side

MAC inloop PHY outloop

WDM side

Inloop Outloop

TBE

10GE optical interface

MAC inloop MAC outloop PHY inloop PHY outloop

GE optical interface

MAC inloop PHY inloop

GE electric interface

MAC inloop PHY inloop PHY outloop

FE optical interface


FE electric interface


TEM28




Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

MAC inloop


179


Board Name

Interface


Loop Mode PHY inloop


PHY inloop PHY outloop MAC inloop


PHY inloop PHY outloop MAC inloop

LEM24







FE optical interface




WDM side

Inloop Outloop

LEX4



WDM side optical interface

Inloop Outloop

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


180



3.8.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The OTUs, tributary boards, and line boards support protection function. For detailed protection mode, refer to Table 3-88. Table 3-88 Protection mode of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards Board Name

Protection Mode SW SNC P

VLA N SNC P

OD Uk SNC P

Clie ntSide 1+1 Prote ction

IntraBoard 1+1 Protec tion

OWS P Prote ction

OD Uk SPRi ng Prot ectio n

Bo ard Le vel Pro tect ion

DB PS

DL AG

MS SNCP

Tribut ary SNCP

ECOM

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

L4G

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

LDGD

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LDGS

Y

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LDM

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LDMD

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LDMS

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LDX

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LEM24

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

LEX4

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

LOA

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LOG

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

LOM

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LQG

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

LQM

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

LQMD

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

LQMS

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

LSC

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LSQ

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LSX

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


181



Board Name


VLA N SNC P

OD Uk SNC P



OWS P Prote ction



DB PS

DL AG

MS SNCP

Tribut ary SNCP

LSXL

N

N

N

Y

Ya

Yb

N

N

N

N

N

N

LSXLR

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LSXR

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LTX

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LWX2

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LWXD

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LWXS

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

TMX

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

ND2

N

N

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

NQ2

N

N

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

NS2

N

N

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

NS3

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

TBE

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TDG

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TDX

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TEM28

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

THA

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TOA

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TOG

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

TOM

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TQM

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TQS

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TQX

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TSXL

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


182


Board Name



VLA N SNC P

OD Uk SNC P



OWS P Prote ction



DB PS

DL AG

MS SNCP

Tribut ary SNCP

NOTE a: The TN11LSXL does not support intra-board 1+1 protection. b: TN54TSXL only supports client-side 1+1 protection. NOTE "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

3.8.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The OTUs, tributary boards, and line boards support electrical cross-connection. For detailed electrical cross-connection functions, refer to Table 3-89, Table 3-90 and Table 3-91. Table 3-89 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 8800 Board Name

Electrical Cross-Connection

LDM

N

LDMD

N

LDMS

N

LDX

N

LEM24

N

LEX4

N

LOA

N

LOG

N

LOM

N

LQM

N

LQMD

N

LQMS

N

LSC

N

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


183



Board Name


LSQ

N

LSX

N

LSXL

N

LSXLR

N

LSXR

N

LTX

N

LWXS

N

TMX

N

ND2

16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/4 x ODUflex/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e NOTE Only the TN53ND2 supports ODUflex.

NQ2

32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/8 x ODUflex//4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e NOTE Only the TN53NQ2 supports ODUflex.

NS2

8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1/2 x ODUflex/1 x ODU2/1 x ODU2e NOTE Only the TN53NS2 supports ODUflex.

NS3

32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e/1 x ODU3 NOTE Only the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 supports ODU3.

TDX

2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e/2x ODUflex NOTE Only the TN53TDX supports ODUflex.

TEM28

16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/5 x ODUflex

THA

32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1

TOA

16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/5 x ODUflex

TOM

8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1

TQX

4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e/4 x ODUflex NOTE Only the TN55TQX supports ODUflex.

TOG

8 x ODU0

TSXL

1 x ODU3 NOTE Only the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL supports ODU3

"N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


184



Table 3-90 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 6800 Board Name

Electrical Cross-Connection Integrated Cross-Connection

Distributed Cross-Connection

ECOM

1 x GE

1 x GE

L4G

4 x GE

4 x GE

LDGD

2 x GE

2 x GE

LDGS

2 x GE

2 x GE

LDM

N

N

LDMD

N

N

LDMS

N

N

LDX

N

N

LEM24

2 x 10GE

N

LEX4

2 x 10GE

N

LOA

N

N

LOG

8 x GE

8 x GE

LOM

N

N

LQG

4 x GE

4 x GE

LQM

4 x GE

4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1

LQMD

4 x GE


LQMS

4 x GE/1 x ODU1


LSC

N

N

LSQ

N

N

LSX

N

N

LSXL

N

N

LSXLR

N

N

LSXR

N

N

LTX

N

N

LWX2

N

N

LWXD

N

x

LWXS

N

N

TMX

N

N

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


185


Board Name


Electrical Cross-Connection Integrated Cross-Connection

Distributed Cross-Connection

ND2

8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e

N

NQ2


N

NS2


4 x ODU1 NOTE It is supported by TN11NS2.

NS3

4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e

N

TBE

16 x GE

N

TDG

2 x GE/1 x ODU1

2 x GE/1 x ODU1

TDX


8 x ODU1

TOG

4 x ODU1

4 x ODU1/

TN11TOM

8 x GE/4 x ODU1

8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any/4 x ODU1

TN52TOM

4 x ODU1

8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any

TQM

4 x GE/1 x ODU1

4 x GE/4 x Any/1 x ODU1/1 x OTU1

TQS

4 x ODU1

4 x ODU1

TQX

4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e

N

TSXL

4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e

N

NOTE Only the TN11TSXL supports ODU2/ ODU2e


Table 3-91 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 3800 Board Name


ECOM

1 x GE

L4G

4 x GE

LDGD

2 x GE

LDGS

2 x GE

LDM

N

LDMD

N

LDMS

N

LDX

N

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


186



Board Name


LOA

N

LOG

8 x GE

LOM

N

LQG

4 x GE

LQM

4 x Any/4 x GE

LQMD

4 x Any/4 x GE

LQMS

4 x Any/4 x GE

LSX

N

LSXR

N

LWX2

N

LWXD

N

LWXS

N

TMX

N

NS2

4 x ODU1

TBE

16 x GE

TDG

2 x GE/1 x ODU1

TDX

8 x ODU1

TOG

4 x ODU1

TOM

8 x GE/8 x Any/4 x ODU1

TQM

4 x Any/1 x ODU1

TQS

4 x ODU1


3.9 Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid Slots of Boards This chapter describes the power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards.

3.9.1 Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of Boards in the OptiX OSN 8800 This chapter describes the power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 8800

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


187



The power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 system are shown in Table 3-92. The values listed in the following table indicate the power consumption of the boards when they normally work at 25°C and 55°C. The power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the cross-connect boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 system are shown in Table 3-93. Table 3-92 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 boards Board

Module Type

Typical Power Consum ption at 25°C (77° F)(W)

Maximu m Power Consum ption at 55°C (131°F) (W)

Weight (kg/lb.)

Number of Occupie d Slots

Valid Slots of 8800 T16



TN16AT E

-

0.2

0.3

0.5/1.1

1

IU24

-

-

TN51AT E

-

0.3

0.3

0.2/0.4

1

-

IU48

IU87

TN16AU X

-

16.5

19.2

0.6/1.32

2

IU21

-

-

TN51AU X

-

17.5

19.0

0.4/0.88

1

-

IU41

IU72, IU83

TN11CM R2

-

0.2

0.3

0.8/1.8

1

IU1-IU18

IU1-IU8, IU11IU27, IU29IU36


TN11CM R4

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU1-IU18



TN11CR PC01

-

110.0

121.0

4.0/8.8

-

Installed outside

Installed outside

Installed outside

TN11CR PC03

-

70.0

77.0

4.2/9.2

-

Installed outside

Installed outside

Installed outside

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


188



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11D40

-

10.0

13.0

2.2/4.8

3

IU1-IU6, IU11IU16

IU1-IU6, IU11IU17, IU20IU25, IU29IU34

IU1-IU6, IU11IU16, IU19IU24, IU27IU32, IU35IU40, IU45IU50, IU53IU58, IU61IU66

TN12D40

-

10.0

13.0

2.0/4.4

2

IU1-IU7, IU11IU17



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


189



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11D40 V

-

38.5

42.3

2.3/5.1

3

-



TN11DA S1

-

22

28.6

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



TN11DC P

-

6.8

7.5

1.0/2.2

1

-



TN12DC P

-

6.8

7.5

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU18



TN11DC U

-

0.2

0.3

1.5/3.3

1

IU1-IU18



TN11DM R1

-

0.2

0.3

0.7/1.5

1

-



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


190



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN16EFI

-

2.0

2.5

0.5/1.1

1

IU19

-

-

TN51EFI 1

-

5.0

7.0

0.2/0.4

1

-

IU38

IU76

TN51EFI 2

-

13.0

15.0

0.3/0.7

1

-

IU37

IU71

TN54EN Q2

-

40.0

44.0

0.9/2.0

1

IU1, IU5, IU11, IU15

IU1, IU5, IU12, IU16, IU20, IU24, IU29, IU33

IU1, IU5, IU11, IU15, IU19, IU23, IU27, IU31, IU35, IU39, IU45, IU49, IU53, IU57, IU61, IU65

TN12FIU

-

4.2

4.6

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU18



TN13FIU

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU18



TN14FIU

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU18



TN11GF U

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU1-IU18



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


191



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11HB A

-

47.0

75.0

3/6.6

3

IU2-IU7, IU12IU17



TN11HS C1

-

8

8.8

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU18



TN11ITL

-

0.2

0.3

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU18



TN12ITL

-

10

11.5

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU18



TN12LD M

-

22.6

24.8

1.1/2.4

1

-



TN11LD MD

-

26.9

29.6

1.2/2.6

1

-



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


192



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11LD MS

-

26.9

29.6

1.1/2.4

1

-



TN12LD X

800 ps/ nm-C Band (Odd & Even Waveleng ths)Fixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN-XFP

44.5

51.2

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU18



800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN-XFP

45.5

52.2

-

81.0

83.0

1.0/2.2

2

IU1-IU7, IU11IU17



TN11LE M24

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


193



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11LE X4

-

64.0

67.0

0.7/1.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



TN11LO A


31.8

36

1.19/2.64

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18




32.8

37

10Gbit/s Multirate - 10km

31.8

36


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


194



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11LO G

800 ps/ nm-C Band (odd & even waveleng ths)Fixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN 800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN

40.0

45.0

1.6/3.5

1

-



1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD

43.0

48.0

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-(D) RZ-PIN

43.5

48.5

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


195


Board

TN12LO G

Module Type



4800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-ODBAPD

55.0

60.5


37.0

41.44


38.0

42.44

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN

41.61

46.6


43.04

48.0

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/lb.)





1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18




196


Board

Module Type




37.0

41.44


92.7

101.7


92.9

101.9


Weight (kg/lb.)





2.3/5.1

2

-



10Gbit/s Multirate - 40km 10Gbit/s Multirate - 80km TN11LO M

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


197


Board

TN12LO Ma

Module Type




93.4

102.7


98.2

108.0


61.8

69.2


62.8

70.2


64.8

72.6

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/lb.)





1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU18




198


Board

Module Type




66.7

75.0

TN13LQ M

-

32.6

TN12LQ MD

-

TN12LQ MS

TN12LS C


Weight (kg/lb.)





35.9

1.1/2.4

1

-



31.1

34.3

1.4/3.1

1

-



-

29.0

32.3

1.3/2.9

1

-



-

240

265

5/11

4

IU1-IU5, IU11IU15



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


199



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11LS Q

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-ODBPIN

75

82

2.5/5.5

2

IU2-IU8, IU12IU18


800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng thDQPSKPIN

82

89



30.5

36.6

1.4/3.1

1

-



TN12LS X

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


200


Board

TN13LS X

Module Type




30.7

36.8


32.5

39


35.5

42.6


29.4

32.8


29.5

33.9

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/lb.)





1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU18




201


Board

TN12LS XL

Module Type




27.0

30.4


28.0

31.4


74.0

81.0


84.0

94.0

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/lb.)





4.1/9.0

3

-




202



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN15LS XL

60000ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-ePDMBPSKPIN

140

155

3.8/8.4

3

IU2-IU7, IU12IU17



TN12LS XLR


75.0

79.0

2.5/5.5

2

-



67.0

70.0


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


203



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11LS XR


34.8

37.8

1.2/2.6

1

-




35.0

38.0


36.8

39.8

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


204


Board

Module Type




39.8

42.8

TN11LT X(OTU mode)

-

248

273

TN11LT X (regenerat ion mode)

-

235

247

TN12LW XS

-

33.9

TN11M4 0

-

10.0

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/lb.)





5.8/12.8

4

IU2-IU6, IU12IU16



37.3

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU18



13.0

2.2/4.8

3

IU1-IU6, IU11IU16




205



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN12M4 0

-

10.0

13.0

2.0/4.4

2

IU1-IU7, IU11IU17



TN11M4 0V

-

20.0

25.0

2.3/5.1

3

IU1-IU6, IU11IU16



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


206



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN12M4 0V

-

16.0

26.0

2.3/5.1

2

IU1-IU7, IU11IU17



TN11MC A4

-

8.0

8.5

1.9/4.2

2

IU1-IU7, IU11IU17



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


207



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11MC A8

-

12.0

13.0

1.9/4.2

2

IU1-IU7, IU11IU17



TN11MR 2

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU1-IU18



TN11MR 4

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU1-IU18



TN11MR 8

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

2

-



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


208



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11MR 8V

-

7.7

8.6

1.0/2.2

2

IU1-IU7, IU11IU17



TN52ND 2


67.8

74.6

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18




70.5

77.5


25

28

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



TN53ND 2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


209


Board

Module Type




Weight (kg/lb.)





134.0

147.0

1.9/4.2

2




800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN-XFP 10Gbit/s Multirate - 10km 10Gbit/s Multirate - 40km TN54NP O2

-

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


210



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN55NP O2

-

143.0

157.3

1.7/3.6

2




TN55NP O2E

-

143.0

157.3

1.7/3.6

2




TN52NQ 2


88.0

97.0

2.0/4.4

1

-



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


211


Board

Module Type




Weight (kg/lb.)





46.5

50

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



10Gbit/s Multirate - 10km 10Gbit/s Multirate - 40km 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN-XFP TN53NQ 2

800 ps/ nm-C Band (Odd & Even Waveleng ths)Fixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN-XFP 10Gbit/s Multirate - 10km 10Gbit/s Multirate - 40km 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN-XFP

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


212



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN54NQ 2


53

58.3

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18




46.5

51.1

1.3/2.86

1

-




49.1

51.7

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN-XFP 10Gbit/s Multirate - 10km 10Gbit/s Multirate - 40km TN52NS 2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


213



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN53NS 2


20

24

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18




21

25


20

24


118.0

130.0

2.4/5.2

2

-



110.0

118.0


10Gbit/s Multirate - 40km TN52NS 3

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


214


Board

TN54NS 3

TN55NS 3

Module Type




118.0

130.0


73.0

80.0


60.0

65.0

40G Transpon der

62.0

69.0

60000ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-ePDMBPSKPIN

135

150

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/lb.)





1.8/3.96

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



2.6/5.73

2

IU2-IU8, IU12IU18




215



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11OA U101

-

18.0

24.0

1.8/4.0

2

-



TN11OA U102

-

14.0

18.0

1.8/4.0

2

-



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


216



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11OA U103

-

18.0

24.0

1.8/4.0

2

-



TN11OA U105

-

22.0

29.0

1.8/4.0

2

-



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


217



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN12OA U100

-

11.0

14.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU2-IU8, IU12IU18



TN12OA U101

-

12.0

15.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU2-IU8, IU12IU18



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


218



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN12OA U102

-

10.0

13.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU2-IU8, IU12IU18



TN12OA U103

-

12.0

15.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU2-IU8, IU12IU18



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


219



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN12OA U105

-

15.0

21.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU2-IU8, IU12IU18



TN13OA U101

-

12.0

15.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU18



TN13OA U103

-

12.0

15.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU18



TN13OA U105

-

15.0

21.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU18



TN13OA U106

-

12.0

15.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU18



TN11OB U101

-

11.0

13.0

1.3/2.9

1

-



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


220



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11OB U103

-

13.0

15.0

1.3/2.9

1

-



TN11OB U104

-

12.0

14.0

1.3/2.9

1

-



TN12OB U101

-

10.0

11.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU18



TN12OB U1P1

-

10.0

11.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU18



TN12OB U103

-

11.0

12.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU18



TN12OB U104

-

10.0

12.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU18



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


221



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11OB U205

-

17.0

24.0

1.9/4.2

2

-



TN12OB U205

-

14.0

19.0

1.6/3.5

2

IU2-IU8, IU12IU18



TN11OL P

-

6.0

6.6

0.9/2.0

1

-



TN12OL P

-

4.0

4.5

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU18



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


222



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11OP M8

-

12.0

15.0

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU18



TN16PIU

-

3.0

3.6

0.65/1.43

1

IU20, IU23

IU39, IU40, IU45, IU46


TN51PIU

-

1.8

1.8

0.5/1.1

1

-

IU39, IU40, IU45, IU46

IU69IU70, IU78IU81, IU88IU89

TN11RA U1

-

55

70

2.5/5.51

2

IU2-IU8, IU12IU18



TN11RD U9

-

6

6.6

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU18



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


223



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11RM U901

-

7.7

8.6

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU18



TN11RM U902

-

8.2

9.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU18



TN11RO AM

-

66.0

72.6

3.2/7.0

3

-



TN12SC1

-

11.0

14.9

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU18



TN12SC2

-

13.5

14.5

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU18



TN16SC C

-

32

35

1.3/2.8

1

IU9, IU10

-

-

TN51SC C

-

18.0

20.0

1.2/2.6

1

-

IU11, IU28

-

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


224



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN52SC C

-

23.0

25.1

1.0/2.2

1

-

IU11, IU28

-

TNK2SC C

-

26.7

29.3

0.9/2.0

1

-

-

IU74, IU85

TN11SC S

-

0.2

0.3

0.8/1.8

1

IU1-IU18



TN11SFI U

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU18



TN11ST2

-

17.5

19.5

0.95/2.09

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



TN52ST G

-

13.0

14.1

0.5/1.1

1

-

IU42, IU44

-

TNK2ST G

-

14.0

16.0

0.5/1.1

1

-

-

IU75, IU86

TN52STI

-

1.5

1.5

0.3/0.7

1

-

IU47

IU82

TN11TD C

-

13.0

15.0

0.5/1.1

1

IU1-IU18



TN52TD X

-

57.3

63.0

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


225



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN53TD X

-

25

35.0

1.5/3.3

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



TN54TE M28

-

110

120

2.5

2

IU1-IU7, IU11IU17



TN54TH A

-

35.0

40.0

1.5/3.3

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


226



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11TM X


40.3

44.3

1.4/3.1

1

-




42.1

46.4


44.5

51.2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


227


Board

TN12TM X

Module Type




48.4

55.7


32.4

37.1


41.0

45.5


39.0

43.7


31.4

36.1

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/lb.)





1.2/2.7

1

IU1-IU18




228


Board

Module Type




31.4

36.1


Weight (kg/lb.)





10Gbit/s Multirate - 40km 10Gbit/s Multirate - 80km TN54TO A

-

23.0

25.0

0.7/1.6

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



TN52TO G

-

41.8

46.0

0.85/1.87

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



TN52TO M

-

81.0

89.1

1.5/3.3

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



TN52TQ X

-

91.5

100.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



TN53TQ X

-

45.0

50.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



TN55TQ X

-

45.0

50.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


229



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN53TS XL

-

75.0

83.0

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



TN54TS XL

-

58

64

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



TN12VA 1

-

6.5

7.2

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU18



TN12VA 4

-

8.5

9.4

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU18



TN11W MU

-

12.0

15.0

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU18



TN12WS D9

-

25.4

28.5

2.7/6.0

2

IU1-IU7, IU11IU17



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


230



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN13WS D9

-

25.4

28.5

2.9/6.4

3

IU1-IU6, IU11IU16



TN12WS M9

-

25.4

28.5

2.7/6.0

2

IU1-IU7, IU11IU17



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


231



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN13WS M9

-

25.4

28.5

2.9/6.4

3

IU1-IU6, IU11IU16



TN11WS MD2

-

17.0

18.7

3.2/7.0

2

-



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


232



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11WS MD4

-

17.0

18.7

3.2/7.0

2

-



TN12WS MD4

-

12.0

15.0

2.6/5.7

2

IU1-IU7, IU11IU17



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


233



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





TN11WS MD9

-

25

30

3.1/6.8

2

IU1-IU7, IU11IU17



N3EAS2

-

78

91

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU18


-

N1EGSH

-

89.3

98.2

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



N4SF64

-

27.3

29.3

0.7/1.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



N1SF64A

-

35.7

39.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



N4SFD64

-

38.2

42.0

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


234



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/lb.)





N4SL64

-

15.2

16.7

0.6/1.3

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



N4SLD6 4

-

20.3

22.1

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



N3SLH4 1

-

48.5

53.4

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



N4SLO1 6

-

21.5

23.7

0.8/1.8

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



N4SLQ1 6

-

12.8

13.9

0.7/1.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18



N4SLQ6 4

-

37.2

40.9

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11IU18


-

a: When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board increases by another 2 W. (D)RZ modules include DRZ and RZ optical modules. Both module types have the same optical performance and can connect to modules of both the same type. This table lists all optical modules. Manufacture of some optical modules may be discontinued. A Product Change Notice (PCN) is released when manufacture of an optical module type is discontinued. For details about the availability of an optical module, contact the product manager of the local Huawei office.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


235



Table 3-93 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 cross-connect boards Board

Power Consu mption at 25°C (77°F) (W)


Power Consu mption at Warm Backup (25°C, 77°F) (W)


Weight (kg/lb.)

Numbe r of Occupi ed Slots




TNK2S XH +TNK2 XCT

470-3.6 x (64-n)

517-3.6 x (64-n)

130

143

3.74 (7.9) +3.6 (7.9)

1+1

-

-

TNK2S XH : IU10, IU44 TNK2X CT : IU9, IU43

TNK2S XH +TNK4 XCT

318-2.5 x (64-n)

350-2.5 x (64-n)

113

124

3.74 (7.9) +2.9 (6.3)

1+1

-

-


TNK4S XH +TNK2 XCT

321-2.5 x (64-n)

353-2.5 x (64-n)

112

123

2.68 (5.9) +3.6 (7.9)

1+1

-

-


TNK4S XH +TNK4 XCT

169-1.2 x (64-n)

186-1.3 2 x (64n)

95

105

2.68 (5.9) +2.9 (6.3)

1+1

-

-


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


236



Board





Weight (kg/lb.)





TNK2S XM +TNK4 XCT

378-2.5 x (64-n)

416-2.5 x (64-n)

173

190

3.74 (8.1) +2.9 (6.3)

1+1

-

-

TNK2S XM : IU10, IU44 TNK4X CT : IU9, IU43

TNK4S XM +TNK2 XCT

324-2.5 x (64-n)

356-2.5 x (64-n)

114

125

3.0(6.6) +3.6 (7.9)

1+1

-

-


TNK4S XM +TNK4 XCT

188-1.2 x (64-n)

207-1.3 2 x (64n)

97

107

3.0(6.6) +2.9 (6.3)

1+1

-

-


TN16X CH

73 - 1.4 x (16 - n)

88.8 1.4 x (16 - n)

40

48

1.8/4.0

1

IU9, IU10

-

-

TN52X CH01

243 - 3.6 x (32 - n)

267.3 3.6 x (32 - n)

65

72

3.4/7.5

1

-

IU9, IU10

-

TN52X CH02

101 1.12 x (32 - n)

111 1.12 x (32 - n)

43

47.3

3.4/7.5

1

-

IU9, IU10

-

TN52X CM01

339 - 3.6 x (32 - n) -80 x m

368 - 3.6 x (32 - n) -80 x m

125

138

3.8/8.4

1

-

IU9, IU10

-

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


237



Board





Weight (kg/lb.)





TN52X CM02

124 1.12 x (32 - n) -23 x m

136.4 1.12 x (32 - n) -23 x m

67

73.7

3.8/8.4

1

-

IU9, IU10

-

NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the XCT must be configured with SXM or SXH. "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack. l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 0. l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 1.

3.9.2 Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of Boards in the OptiX OSN 6800 This chapter describes the power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 6800 system. The power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards for the OptiX OSN 6800 system are shown in Table 3-94. The values listed in the following table indicate the power consumption of the boards when they normally work at 25°C and 55°C. Table 3-94 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 6800 boards Board

Module Type

Typical Power Consumpti on at 25°C (77°F) (W)

Maximum Power Consumpti on at 55°C (131°F)(W)

Weight (kg/ lb.)

Number of Occupied Slots

Valid Slots

TN11AUX

-

12.0

17.0

0.5/1.1

1

IU21

TN11BMD4

-

0.2

0.3

1.2/2.7

1

IU1-IU17

TN11BMD8

-

0.2

0.3

1.5/3.3

2

IU1-IU16

TN11CMR2

-

0.2

0.3

0.8/1.8

1

IU1-IU17

TN11CMR4

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU1-IU17

TN11CRPC0 1

-

110.0

121.0

4.0/8.8

-

-

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


238



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11CRPC0 3

-

70.0

77.0

4.2/9.2

-

-

TN11D40

-

10.0

13.0

2.2/4.8

3

IU1-IU15

TN12D40

-

10.0

13.0

2.0/4.4

2

IU1-IU16

TN11D40V

-

38.5

42.3

2.3/5.1

3

IU1-IU15

TN11DAS1

-

22

28.6

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11DCP/ TN12DCP

-

6.8

7.5

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11DCU

-

0.2

0.3

1.5/3.3

1

IU1-IU17

TN11DMR1

-

0.2

0.3

0.7/1.5

1

IU1-IU17

TN11ECOM

-

19.6

21.6

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN12ELQX

-

86.2

99.2

1.7/3.7

1

IU1, IU4, IU5, IU8, IU11, IU14

TN11FIU/ TN12FIU

-

4.2

4.6

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN13FIU

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN14FIU

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11SFIU

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11GFU

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU1-IU17

TN11HBA

-

47.0

75.0

3.0/6.6

3

IU2-IU16

TN11HSC1

-

8

8.8

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11ITL

-

0.2

0.3

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN12ITL

-

10

11.5

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN11L4G

3400 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

50.0

55.0

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


239


Board

TN11LDGD

Module Type



3400 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD

53.0

58.0

12800 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

34.0

37.4

38.0

41.8


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

6500 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 1600 ps/nmCWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable)

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


240



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LDGS


32.0

35.2

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

12800 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable)

36.0

39.6

TN12LDM

-

22.6

24.8

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN11LDMD

-

26.9

29.6

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN11LDMS

-

26.9

29.6

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

6500 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 1600 ps/nmCWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


241



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN12LDX

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths )-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PINXFP

44.5

51.2

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU17

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PINXFP

45.5

52.2

TN11LEM24

-

81.0

83.0

1.0/2.2

2

IU1-IU7, IU11-IU15

TN11LEX4

-

64.0

67.0

0.7/1.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11LOA


31.8

36

1.19/2.64

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


32.8

37

10Gbit/s Multirate 10km

31.8

36


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


242



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LOG

800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths) -Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

40.0

45.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

1200 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD

43.0

48.0

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength(D)RZb-PIN

43.5

48.5

4800 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD

55.0

60.5


37.0

41.44

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN12LOG

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


243


Board

Module Type




38.0

42.44


41.61

46.6

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PIN

43.04

48.0


37.0

41.44

92.7

101.7


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

2.3/5.1

2

IU1-IU16

10Gbit/s Multirate 40km 10Gbit/s Multirate 80km TN11LOM


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


244


Board

TN12LOMa

Module Type




92.9

101.9


93.4

102.7


98.2

108.0


61.8

69.2


62.8

70.2


64.8

72.6

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17


245


Board

TN11LQG

TN13LQM

Module Type




66.7

75.0


28.4

32.0


31.0

34.4

5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-50 km 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-70 km

23.18

26.0

-

32.6

35.9

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.3/2.9

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


246



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LQMD


57.1

65.7

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

61.1

67.2

31.1

35.0

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

6500 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 1600 ps/nmCWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable) TN12LQMD

-

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


247



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LQMS


56.3

64.5

1.3/2.9

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


60.4

66.4

-

29.0

32.3

1.3/2.9

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


TN12LQMS

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


248



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LSX


47.7

50.1

1.3/2.9

1

IU1-IU17


47.9

50.9


49.7

52.7


52.7

55.7


30.5

36.6

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU17

TN12LSX

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


249


Board

TN13LSX

Module Type




30.7

36.8


32.5

39


35.5

42.6


27.0

30.4


28.0

31.4


29.4

32.8

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17


250


Board

Module Type




29.5

33.9


103.0

110.0


98.0

101.0


74.0

81.0


84.0

94.0

TN15LSXL

60000 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthePDMBPSK-PIN

140

TN11LSXLR

400 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PIN 500 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN

TN11LSXL

TN12LSXL

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

5.0/11.0

4

IU1-IU14

4.1/9.0

3

IU3-IU17

155

3.8/8.4

3

IU2-IU16

87.0

90.0

3.1/6.8

4

IU1-IU14

82.0

85.0


251



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LSQ


75

82

2.5/5.5

2

IU2-IU17


82

89


75

79

2.5/5.5

2

IU2-IU17


67.0

70.0


34.8

37.8

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU17


35.0

38

TN12LSXLR

TN11LSXR

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


252


Board

Module Type




36.8

39.8


39.8

42.8

248

273

TN11LTX (regeneration mode)

40000 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (HFEC)-PIN

235

247

TN11LWX2

-

38.5

TN11LWXD

-

TN11LWXS/ TN12LWXS


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

5.8/12.8

4

IU2-IU15

42.4

1.3/2.9

1

IU1-IU17

35.8

39.4

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU17

-

33.9

37.3

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN11M40

-

10.0

13.0

2.2/4.8

3

IU1-IU15

TN12M40

-

10.0

13.0

2.0/4.4

2

IU1-IU16

TN11M40V

-

20.0

25.0

2.3/5.1

3

IU1-IU15

TN12M40V

-

16.0

26.0

2.3/5.1

2

IU1-IU16

TN11MCA4

-

8.0

8.5

1.9/4.2

2

IU1-IU16

TN11MCA8

-

12.0

13.0

1.9/4.2

2

IU1-IU16

TN11MR2

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU1-IU17

TN11MR4

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU1-IU17

TN11MR8

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

2

IU1-IU16

TN11MR8V

-

7.7

8.6

1.0/2.2

2

IU1-IU16

TN11LTX (OTU mode)

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


253



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11ND2

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

61.1

68.4

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


62.7

70.2


68.4

76.6


62.0

69.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


57.2

64.0

TN12ND2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


254


Board

Module Type




46.0

52.0


67.8

74.6


70.5

77.5


25

28


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

10Gbit/s Multirate 10km 10Gbit/s Multirate 40km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km TN52ND2

TN53ND2


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


255


Board

Module Type




Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

88.0

95.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

88.0

97.0

2.0/4.4

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

10Gbit/s Multirate 10km 10Gbit/s Multirate 40km TN51NQ2

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths )-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PINXFP 10Gbit/s Multirate 10km 10Gbit/s Multirate 40km 10Gbit/s Multirate 80km 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PINXFP

TN52NQ2


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


256


Board

Module Type




Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

46.5

50

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

10Gbit/s Multirate 10km 10Gbit/s Multirate 40km 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PINXFP TN53NQ2

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths )-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PINXFP 10Gbit/s Multirate 10km 10Gbit/s Multirate 40km 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PINXFP

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


257



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11NS2


38.0

41.8

1.2/2.64

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


39.0

42.9


41.0

45.1


44.0

48.4


38.8

43.4

1.2/2.64

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN12NS2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


258


Board

TN52NS2

Module Type




39.4

44.1


39.7

44.46


42.5

47.6


30.32

34.0


25.35

28.39


46.5

51.1

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.3/2.86

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


259


Board

TN53NS2

Module Type




49.1

51.7


20

24


21

25


20

24


92

101.2


67.0

75.0


118.0

130.0


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

2.5/5.5

2

IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16

2.4/5.3

2

IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16

10Gbit/s Multirate 40km TN11NS3

TN52NS3

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


260


Board

Module Type




110.0

118.0


118.0

130.0


73.0

80.0


60.0

65.0

40G Transponder

62.0

69.0

TN55NS3

60000ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthePDMBPSK-PIN

135

TN11OAU10 1

-

TN11OAU10 2


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.8/3.96

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

150

2.6/5.73

2

IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16

18.0

24.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU2-IU17

-

14.0

18.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU2-IU17

TN11OAU10 3

-

18.0

24.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU2-IU17

TN11OAU10 5

-

22.0

29.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU2-IU17

TN12OAU10 0

-

11.0

14.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU2-IU17

TN54NS3

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


261



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN12OAU10 1

-

12.0

15.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU2-IU17

TN12OAU10 2

-

10.0

13.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU2-IU17

TN12OAU10 3

-

12.0

15.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU2-IU17

TN12OAU10 5

-

15.0

21.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU2-IU17

TN13OAU10 1

-

12.0

15.0

1.6/3.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN13OAU10 3

-

12.0

15.0

1.6/3.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN13OAU10 5

-

15.0

21.0

1.6/3.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN13OAU10 6

-

12

15

1.6/3.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN11OBU10 1

-

11.0

13.0

1.3/2.9

1

IU1-IU17

TN11OBU10 3

-

13.0

15.0

1.3/2.9

1

IU1-IU17

TN11OBU10 4

-

12.0

14.0

1.3/2.9

1

IU1-IU17

TN12OBU10 1

-

10.0

11.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN12OBU10 3

-

11.0

12.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN12OBU10 4

-

10.0

12.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN12OBU1P 1

-

10.0

11.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN11OBU20 5

-

17.0

24.0

1.9/4.2

2

IU2-IU17

TN12OBU20 5

-

14.0

19.0

1.6/3.5

2

IU2-IU17

TN11OLP

-

6.0

6.6

0.9/2.0

1

IU1-IU17

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


262



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN12OLP

-

4.0

4.5

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11OPM8

-

12.0

15.0

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN11PIU

-

24.0

38.0

0.5/1.1

1

IU19, IU20

TN12PTQX

-

93.4

107.6

3/6.6

2

IU2-IU3, IU6-IU7, IU12-IU13

TN11RAU1

-

55

70

2.5/5.51

2

IU2-IU17

TN11RDU9

-

6

6.6

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN11RMU9 01

-

7.7

8.6

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN11RMU9 02

-

8.2

9.0

TN11ROAM

-

66.0

72.6

3.2/7.0

3

IU1-IU15

TN11SBM2

-

0.2

0.3

0.8/1.8

1

IU1-IU17

TN11SC1/ TN12SC1

-

11.0

14.9

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11SC2/ TN12SC2

-

13.5

14.5

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11ST2

-

17.5

19.5

0.95/2.09

1

IU1-IU8, IU11–IU16

TN11SCC

-

27.0

30.0

1.2/2.6

1

IU17, IU18

TN51SCC

-

18.0

20.0

1.2/2.6

1

IU17, IU18

TN52SCC

-

23.0

25.1

1.0/2.2

1

IU17, IU18

TN11SCS

-

0.2

0.3

0.8/1.8

1

IU1-IU17

TN11STG

-

8.7

9.57

1.1/2.4

1

IU15, IU16

TN11TBE

-

40.7

44.8

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11TDC

-

13.0

15.0

0.5/1.1

1

IU1-IU17

TN11TDG

-

30.0

33.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11TDX

-

78.0

80.0

1.3/2.8

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


263



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN12TDX

-

37.4

40.7

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN52TDX

-

57.3

63.0

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN53TDX

-

25

35.0

1.5/3.3

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11TMX


40.3

44.3

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU17


42.1

46.4


44.5

51.2


48.4

55.7

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


264



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN12TMX


31.4

36.1

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU17


32.4

37.1


41.0

45.5


39.0

43.7


31.4

36.1

10Gbit/s Multirate 40km 10Gbit/s Multirate 80km TN52TOG

-

41.8

46.0

0.85/1.87

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11TOM

-

55.0

60.0

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN52TOM

-

81

89.1

1.5/3.3

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


265



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11TQM

-

50.3

57.6

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN12TQM

-

25.0

27.5

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11TQS

-

43.0

47.3

1.2/.6

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11TQX

-

65.0

71.2

1.5/3.3

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN52TQX

-

91.5

100.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN55TQX

-

45.0

50.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11TSXL

-

90.2

96.0

2.5/5.5

2

IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16

TN11VA1/ TN12VA1

-

6.5

7.2

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11VA4/ TN12VA4

-

8.5

9.4

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11WMU

-

12.0

15.0

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11WSD9

-

17.0

18.7

2.2/4.8

2

IU1-IU16

TN12WSD9

-

25.4

28.5

2.7/5.94

2

IU1-IU16

TN13WSD9

-

25.4

28.5

2.9/6.38

3

IU1-IU15

TN11WSM9

-

17.0

18.7

2.2/4.8

2

IU1-IU16

TN12WSM9

-

25.4

28.5

2.7/5.94

2

IU1-IU16

TN13WSM9

-

25.4

28.5

2.9/6.38

3

IU1-IU15

TN11WSMD 2

-

17.0

18.7

3.2/7.0

2

IU1-IU16

TN11WSMD 4

-

17.0

18.7

3.2/7.0

2

IU1-IU16

TN12WSMD 4

-

12.0

15.0

2.6/5.7

2

IU1-IU16

TN11WSMD 9

-

25

30

3.1/6.8

2

IU1-IU16

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


266



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11XCS

-

20.0

22.0

1.0/2.2

1

IU9, IU10

TN12XCS

-

25.0

27.5

1.2/2.6

1

IU9, IU10

a: When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board increases by another 2 W. b: (D)RZ modules include DRZ and RZ optical modules. Both module types have the same optical performance and can connect to modules of both the same type. This table lists all optical modules. Manufacture of some optical modules may be discontinued. A Product Change Notice (PCN) is released when manufacture of an optical module type is discontinued. For details about the availability of an optical module, contact the product manager of the local Huawei office.

3.9.3 Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of Boards in the OptiX OSN 3800 This chapter describes the power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 3800 system. The power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards for the OptiX OSN 3800 system are shown in Table 3-95. The values listed in the following table indicate the power consumption of the boards when they normally work at 25°C and 55°C. Table 3-95 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 3800 boards Board

Module Type


Maximum Power Consumpti on at 55°C (131°F) (W)

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11DAS1

-

22

28.6

1.4/3.1

1

IU2-IU5

TN11ECOM

-

19.6

21.6

1.0/2.2

1

IU2-IU5

TN11HSC1

-

8

8.8

1.0/2.2

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN11L4G


50.0

55.0

1.4/3.1

1

IU2-IU5

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


267


Board

TN11LDGS

Module Type




53.0

58.0


32.0

35.2

36.0

39.6


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5

6500 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 1600 ps/nmCWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable)

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


268



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LDGD


34.0

37.4

1.4/3.1

1

IU2-IU5


38.0

41.8

TN12LDM

-

22.6

24.8

1.1/2.4

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN11LDMD

-

26.9

29.6

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5, IU11


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


269



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LDMS

-

26.9

29.6

1.1/2.4

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN12LDX


44.5

51.2

1.6/3.5

1

IU2-IU5, IU11


45.5

52.2


31.8

36

1.19/2.64

1

IU2-IU5


32.8

37


31.8

36

TN11LOA


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


270



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LOG


40.0

45.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU2-IU5


43.0

48.0

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength(D)RZb-PIN

43.5

48.5


55.0

60.5


37.0

41.44

1.1/2.4

1

IU2-IU5

TN12LOG

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


271


Board

Module Type




38.0

42.44


41.61

46.6


43.04

48


37.0

41.44

92.7

101.7


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

2.3/5.1

2

IU3-IU5

10Gbit/s Multirate 40km 10Gbit/s Multirate 80km TN11LOM


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


272


Board

TN12LOMa

Module Type




92.9

101.9


93.4

102.7


98.2

108.0


61.8

69.2


62.8

70.2


64.8

72.6

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.1/2.4

1

IU2-IU5, IU11


273


Board

TN11LQG

TN13LQM

Module Type




66.7

75.0


28.4

32.0


31.0

34.4

5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-50 km 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-70 km

23.18

26.0

-

32.6

35.9

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.3/2.9

1

IU2-IU5

1.1/2.4

1

IU2-IU5


274



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LQMS


56.3

64.5

1.3/2.9

1

IU2-IU5


60.4

66.4

-

29.0

33.3

1.3/2.9

1

IU2-IU5


TN12LQMS

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


275



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LQMD


57.1

65.7

1.4/3.1

1

IU2-IU5


61.1

67.2

-

31.1

34.3

1.4/3.1

1

IU2-IU5


TN12LQMD

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


276



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LSX


47.7

50.1

1.4/3.1

1

IU11, IU2IU5


47.9

50.9


49.7

52.7


52.7

55.7


30.5

36.6

1.4/3.1

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN12LSX

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


277


Board

TN13LSX

Module Type




30.7

36.8


32.5

39


35.5

42.6


27.0

30.4


28.0

31.4


29.4

32.8

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.1/2.4

1

IU11, IU2IU5


278


Board

Module Type




29.5

33.9


34.8

37.8


35.0

38


36.8

39.8


39.8

42.8

TN11LWXS/ TN12LWXS

-

33.9

TN11LWXD

-

TN11LWX2

-

TN11LSXR

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.2/2.6

1

IU11, IU2IU5

37.3

1.1/2.4

1

IU11, IU2IU5

35.8

39.4

1.2/2.6

1

IU11, IU2IU5

38.5

42.4

1.3/2.9

1

IU11, IU2IU5


279



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11TMX


40.3

44.3

1.4/3.1

1

IU11, IU2IU5


42.1

46.4


44.5

51.2


48.4

55.7


31.4

36.1

1.2/2.6

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN12TMX

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


280


Board

Module Type




32.4

37.1


41.0

45.5


39.0

43.7


31.4

36.1


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

10Gbit/s Multirate 40km 10Gbit/s Multirate 80km TN21DFIU

-

0.2

0.3

0.5/1.1

1

IU1, IU11, IU8

TN21FIU

-

0.2

0.3

0.5/1.1

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13FIU

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN14FIU

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN11SFIU

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11MR2

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU2-IU5

TN21MR2

-

0.2

0.3

0.5/1.1

1

IU1, IU11, IU8

TN11MR4

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU2-IU5

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


281



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN21MR4

-

0.2

0.3

0.5/1.1

1

IU1, IU11, IU8

TN21CMR1

-

0.2

0.3

0.5/1.1

1

IU1, IU11, IU8

TN11CMR2

-

0.2

0.3

0.8/1.8

1

IU2-IU5

TN21CMR2

-

0.2

0.3

0.5/1.1

1

IU1, IU11, IU8

TN11CMR4

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU2-IU5

TN21CMR4

-

0.2

0.3

0.5/1.1

1

IU1, IU11, IU8

TN11DMR1

-

0.2

0.3

0.7/1.5

1

IU2-IU5

TN21DMR1

-

0.2

0.3

0.7/1.5

1

IU1, IU11, IU8

TN11SBM2

-

0.2

0.3

0.8/1.8

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11TBE

-

40.7

44.8

1.4/3.1

1

IU2-IU5

TN11TDG

-

30

33

1.1/2.4

1

IU2-IU5

TN11TDX

-

78

80

1.3/2.9

1

IU2-IU5

TN52TOG

-

41.8

46.0

1.87 /0.85

1

IU2-IU5

TN11TOM

-

55.0

60.0

1.4/3.1

1

IU2-IU5

TN52TOM

-

81

89.1

1.5/3.3

1

IU2-IU5

TN11TQS

-

43.0

47.3

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5

TN11TQM

-

50.3

57.6

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5

TN12TQM

-

25.0

27.5

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


282



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11NS2


38.0

41.8

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5


39.0

42.9


41.0

45.1


44.0

48.4


38.8

43.4

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5

TN12NS2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


283


Board

TN52NS2

Module Type




39.4

44.1


39.7

44.46


42.5

47.6


30.32

34.0


25.35

28.39


46.5

51.1

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.3/2.9

1

IU2-IU5


284


Board

TN53NS2

Module Type




49.1

51.7


20

24


21

25


20

24


Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.0/2.2

1

IU2-IU5

10Gbit/s Multirate 40km TN11OAU10 1

-

18.0

24.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU11, IU2IU4

TN11OAU10 2

-

14.0

18.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU11, IU2IU4

TN11OAU10 3

-

18.0

24.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU11, IU2IU4

TN11OAU10 5

-

22.0

29.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU11, IU2IU4

TN12OAU10 0

-

11.0

14.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU11, IU2IU4

TN12OAU10 1

-

12.0

15.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU11, IU2IU4

TN12OAU10 2

-

10.0

13.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU11, IU2IU4

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


285



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN12OAU10 3

-

12.0

15.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU11, IU2IU4

TN12OAU10 5

-

15.0

21.0

1.8/4.0

2

IU11, IU2IU4

TN13OAU10 1

-

12.0

15.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13OAU10 3

-

12.0

15.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13OAU10 5

-

15.0

21.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13OAU10 6

-

12.0

15.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11OBU10 1

-

11.0

13.0

1.3/2.9

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11OBU10 3

-

13.0

15.0

1.3/2.9

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11OBU10 4

-

12.0

14.0

1.3/2.9

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN12OBU10 1

-

10.0

11.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN12OBU10 3

-

11.0

12.1

1.1/2.4

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN12OBU10 4

-

10.0

12.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11OBU20 5

-

17.0

24.0

1.9/4.2

2

IU11, IU2IU4

TN12OBU20 5

-

14.0

19.0

1.6/3.5

2

IU11, IU2IU4

TN11RAU1

-

55

70

2.5/5.51

2

IU11, IU2IU4

TN11SC1/ TN12SC1

-

11.0

14.9

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11SC2/ TN12SC2

-

13.5

14.5

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11ST2

-

17.5

19.5

0.95/2.09

1

IU2-IU5

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


286



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN21SCC

-

14.0

16.0

0.5/1.1

1

IU8, IU9

TN22SCC

-

10.0

13.0

0.5/1.1

1

IU8, IU9

TN21AUX

-

11.7

13.0

0.6/1.3

1

IU10

TN22AUX

-

15.0

17.0

0.5/1.1

1

IU10

TN11DCP/ TN12DCP

-

6.8

7.5

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2U5

TN11OLP

-

6.0

6.6

0.9/2.0

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN12OLP

-

4.0

4.5

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11OPM8

-

12.0

15.0

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN11SCS

-

0.2

0.3

0.8/1.8

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11VA1/ TN12VA1

-

6.5

7.2

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11VA4/ TN12VA4

-

8.5

9.4

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11MCA4

-

8.0

8.5

1.9/4.2

2

IU2-IU5

TN11MCA8

-

12.0

13.0

1.9/4.2

2

IU2-IU5

TN21PIU

-

10

12

0.5/1.1

1

IU6, IU7

TN21APIU

-

50

55

0.8/1.8

1.5

IU6, IU7, IU8

TN11DCU

-

0.2

0.3

1.5/3.3

1

IU11, IU2IU5

a: When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board increases by another 2 W. b: (D)RZ modules include DRZ and RZ optical modules. Both module types have the same optical performance and can connect to modules of both the same type. This table lists all optical modules. Manufacture of some optical modules may be discontinued. A Product Change Notice (PCN) is released when manufacture of an optical module type is discontinued. For details about the availability of an optical module, contact the product manager of the local Huawei office.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


287



3.10 Housekeeping Alarms Users can configure the severities for the eight alarm inputs to remotely monitor the alarms of an external system. The alarms can be sent to a centralized alarm management system for management. In addition, two housekeeping control interfaces are available for remotely controlling external equipment such as air conditioners, fans, and electric generators.

3.10.1 OptiX OSN 8800 Housekeeping Alarm Interfaces OptiX OSN 8800 provides alarm input and output interfaces. The alarm input interfaces are designed for remotely monitoring alarms of external systems, such as an environmental monitoring system. The alarm output interfaces are designed to output alarms to a centralized management system for management.

OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 The TN51ATE provides 8 alarm inputs and remote monitoring of alarm signals of the external systems, such as the environmental monitoring system. Users can configure the names and severity of the 8 alarm inputs so that the equipment can work with external systems to remotely monitor the external alarms. The alarm signals are forwarded to the EFI1 after the ATE processing is complete. The TN51ATE board provides eight alarm output interfaces, sending alarms to a centralized alarm management system. Figure 3-54 Interfaces in the TN51ATE ATE Alarm Input Interfaces ALMI1

ALMI2

ALMO1

ALMO3

Alarm Output Interfaces Pin No.

ALMO4

ALMO2

1 8

Table 3-96 Housekeeping alarm input/output interfaces

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Interf ace

PIN No.

Definit ion

Functio n

Interfa ce

PIN No.

Definitio n

Function

ALMI 1

1

SWITC HI_IN1

Alarm input 1

ALMO 1/ ALMO 2

1

CRIT_SW ITCH_OU TP

Outputs the critical alarm signal positive


288


Interf ace

ALMI 2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

PIN No.

Definit ion

Functio n

2

GND

3


Interfa ce

PIN No.

Definitio n

Function

Ground

2

CRIT_SW ITCH_OU TN

Outputs the critical alarm signal negative

SWITC HI_IN2

Alarm input 2

3

MAJ_SWI TCH_OUT P

Outputs the major alarm signal positive

4

SWITC HI_IN3

Alarm input 3

4

MIN_SWI TCH_OUT P

Outputs the minor alarm signal positive

5

GND

Ground

5

MIN_SWI TCH_OUT N

Outputs the minor alarm signal negative

6

GND

Ground

6

MAJ_SWI TCH_OUT N

Outputs the major alarm signal negative

7

SWITC HI_IN4

Alarm input 4

7

ALM_SWI TCH_OUT 1P

Reserved alarm signal output 1 positive

8

GND

Ground

8

ALM_SWI TCH_OUT 1N

Reserved alarm signal output 1 negative

1

SWITC HI_IN5

Alarm input 5

1

ALM_SWI TCH_OUT 2P


2

GND

Ground

2

ALM_SWI TCH_OUT 2N


3

SWITC HI_IN6

Alarm input 6

3

ALM_SWI TCH_OUT 3P


4

SWITC HI_IN7

Alarm input 7

4

ALM_SWI TCH_OUT 4P


5

GND

Ground

5

ALM_SWI TCH_OUT 4N


6

GND

Ground

6

ALM_SWI TCH_OUT 3N


ALMO 3/ ALMO 4


289


Interf ace

PIN No.

Definit ion

Functio n

7

SWITC HI_IN8

8

GND


Interfa ce

PIN No.

Definitio n

Function

Alarm input 8

7

ALM_SWI TCH_OUT 5P


Ground

8

ALM_SWI TCH_OUT 5N


There are four alarm output interfaces: ALMO1, ALMO2, ALMO3, and ALMO4. Any of them can be used for alarm output or subrack cascading. Currently, only the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces are available; the ALMO3 and ALMO4 interfaces are reserved for future use.

OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Housekeeping Alarm Input/Output Interfaces The TN16ATE provides 8 alarm inputs and remote monitoring of alarm signals of the external systems, such as the environmental monitoring system. Users can configure the names and severity of the 8 alarm inputs so that the equipment can work with external systems to remotely monitor the external alarms. The alarm signals are forwarded to the EFI after the ATE processing is complete. The TN16ATE board provides eight alarm output interfaces, sending alarms to a centralized alarm management system. Figure 3-55 Interfaces on the TN16ATE Board

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


290



Table 3-97 Housekeeping alarm input/output interfaces Interf ace

PIN No.

Definit ion

Function

Interfa ce

PIN No.

Definitio n

Function

ALMI 1

1

SWITC HI_IN1

Alarm input 1

1

CRIT_SW ITCH_OU TP


2

GND

Ground

ALMO 1/ ALMO 2

2

CRIT_SW ITCH_OU TN


3

SWITC HI_IN2

Alarm input 2

3

MAJ_SWI TCH_OU TP


4

SWITC HI_IN3

Alarm input 3

4

MIN_SWI TCH_OU TP


5

GND

Ground

5

MIN_SWI TCH_OU TN


6

GND

Ground

6

MAJ_SWI TCH_OU TN


7

SWITC HI_IN4

Alarm input 4

7

ALM_SW ITCH_OU T1P


8

GND

Ground

8

ALM_SW ITCH_OU T1N


1

SWITC HI_IN5

Alarm input 5

1

ALM_SW ITCH_OU T2P


2

GND

Ground

2

ALM_SW ITCH_OU T2N


3

SWITC HI_IN6

Alarm input 6

3

ALM_SW ITCH_OU T3P


4

SWITC HI_IN7

Alarm input 7

4

ALM_SW ITCH_OU T4P


5

GND

Ground

5

ALM_SW ITCH_OU T4N


ALMI 2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

ALMO 3/ ALMO 4


291


Interf ace

PIN No.

Definit ion

Function

6

GND

7

8


Interfa ce

PIN No.

Definitio n

Function

Ground

6

ALM_SW ITCH_OU T3N


SWITC HI_IN8

Alarm input 8

7

ALM_SW ITCH_OU T5P


GND

Ground

8

ALM_SW ITCH_OU T5N




Alarm Input/Output Interfaces The TN11EFI provides eight alarm inputs and remote monitoring of alarm signals of the external systems, such as the environmental monitoring system. Users can configure the names and severity of the 8 alarm inputs so that the equipment can work with external systems to remotely monitor the external alarms. The TN11EFI board provides eight alarm output interfaces, sending alarms to a centralized alarm management system. Defaults of the first three are critical alarm, major alarm, and minor alarm. The other five are reserved. Alarm outputs can be cascaded. Figure 3-56 Interfaces in the TN11EFI Alarm Output Interfaces

COM

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

ETH3

ALM01 ALM02 ALM03 ALM04

Alarm Input Interfaces

SERIAL


ALMI1 ALMI2 LAMP1 LAMP2

292



Table 3-98 Alarm Input/Output Interfaces Inter face

PI N No .

Defin ition

Function

Inter face

PI N No.

Definiti on

Function

ALM I1

1

SWIT CHI_I N1

Alarm input 1

1

CRIT_S WITCH_ OUTP


2

GND

Ground

ALM O1/ ALM O2

2

CRIT_S WITCH_ OUTN


3

SWIT CHI_I N2

Alarm input 2

3

MAJ_S WITCH_ OUTP


4

SWIT CHI_I N3

Alarm input 3

4

MIN_S WITCH_ OUTP


5

GND

Ground

5

MIN_S WITCH_ OUTN


6

GND

Ground

6

MAJ_S WITCH_ OUTN


7

SWIT CHI_I N4

Alarm input 4

7

ALM_S WITCH_ OUT1P

Alarm signal output 1 positive

8

GND

Ground

8

ALM_S WITCH_ OUT1N

Alarm signal output 1 negative

1

SWIT CHI_I N5

Alarm input 5

1

ALM_S WITCH_ OUT2P


2

GND

Ground

2

ALM_S WITCH_ OUT2N


3

SWIT CHI_I N6

Alarm input 6

3

ALM_S WITCH_ OUT3P


4

SWIT CHI_I N7

Alarm input 7

4

ALM_S WITCH_ OUT4P


ALM I2

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

ALM O3/ ALM O4


293


Inter face

PI N No .

Defin ition

Function

5

GND

6


Inter face

PI N No.

Definiti on

Function

Ground

5

ALM_S WITCH_ OUT4N


GND

Ground

6

ALM_S WITCH_ OUT3N


7

SWIT CHI_I N8

Alarm input 8

7

ALM_S WITCH_ OUT5P


8

GND

Ground

8

ALM_S WITCH_ OUT5N




Alarm Input/Output Interfaces The TN21AUX/TN22AUX provides six alarm inputs and remote monitoring of alarm signals of the external systems, such as the environmental monitoring system. The TN21AUX/TN22AUX provides two alarm output interfaces, sending alarms to a centralized alarm management system.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


294



Figure 3-57 Interfaces in the TN21AUX/TN22AUX

STAT PROG

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2

Alarm Input Interfaces Alarm Output Interfaces

EXT

AUX

Figure 3-58 Structure of the TN21AUX/TN22AUX signal cable 2

1

B

Pos.64 View A

A

W8 W7

Pos.1

View B

X8

1

X7

8

X6

W6 Delander

W5 W1

X5 ALMO

W4

X1

X4 ALMI2

W3

X3 ALMI1

View C

3

Pos.9

W2

C X2 Pos.1

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


295



Table 3-99 Alarm Input Interfaces Interface

PIN No.

Definition

Function

ALMI1

1

SW_IN1P

Alarm input signal 1

2

GND

Ground

3

SW_IN2P


4

SW_IN3P


5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SW_IN4P


8

GND

Ground

1

SW_IN5P


2

GND

Ground

3

SW_IN6P


4

NC

Reserved

5

NC

Reserved

6

GND

Ground

7

NC

Reserved

8

NC

Reserved

ALMI2

Table 3-100 Alarm Output Interfaces

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Interface

PIN No.

Definition

Function

ALMO

1

SWCRIT_OUT1+

Alarm output signal 1 positive

2

SWCRIT_OUT1-

Alarm output signal 1 negative

3

SWCRIT_OUT2+


4

SWCRIT_OUT1+

Cascaded alarm output signal 1 positive

5

SWCRIT_OUT1-

Cascaded alarm output signal 1 negative

6

SWCRIT_OUT2-


7

SWCRIT_OUT2+


8

SWCRIT_OUT2-



296



3.11 Network Management This chapter describes the network management system, as well as inter-NE and intra-NE communication management. Figure 3-59 shows a sample network management structure with Huawei equipment deployed. Figure 3-59 Network management structure Secondary U2000

Primary U2000 External DCN

Site E

Site D Site A

Site C

Master Site F Slave

Slave

GNE Subrack

U2000 Web LCT

Site B

NON-GNE Fiber

Switch

Router

Network cable

Network management involves the following aspects: l

Network management system: U2000 and U2000 Web LCT

l

Inter-NE communication: – The NEs between sites A and F are interconnected with fibers and exchange information over ESC/OSC channels using the HWECC, IP over DCC or OSI over DCC protocol. – Some NEs between sites A and F (for example, NEs at site B) are interconnected with network cables (generally where optical and electrical NEs are separate), and exchange information over Ethernet channels (at NM_ETH ports on the related boards) using the HWECC, IP over DCC or OSI over DCC protocol. – The NEs at sites A and C are used as gateway NEs (GNEs) and are connected to the external DCN through a switch or router, communicating with the network management system (NMS). All the other NEs are used as non-GNE, communicating with the NMS through the GNEs.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


297


l


Intra-NE communication: For each NE at sites A-F, the master and slave subracks implement intra-NE communication. In the figure above, one NE at site A has three subracks (one master connected to two slaves).

3.11.1 Introduction to Network Cables Network cables are classified into two types: crossover cables and straight-through cables. IntraNE connections must be established using straight-through cables and inter-NE connections (including the connections between NEs and the NMS) can be established using either straightthrough or crossover cables.

Connections Figure 3-60 shows the connections of straight-through cables and crossover cables. Figure 3-60 Network cable connection

Pin8

Pin8

Pin1

Pin1 X1

Straight-through cable

X2

Pin8

Pin8

Pin1

Pin1 X2

X1 Crossover cable

Pin Assignment Table 3-101 lists the pin assignment of the straight-through cable. Table 3-101 Pin assignment of the straight-through cable

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relationship

X1.pin1

X2.pin1

White/Orange

Twisted pair

X1.pin2

X2.pin2

Orange

X1.pin3

X2.pin3

White/Green

X1.pin6

X2.pin6

Green


Twisted pair

298



Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relationship

X1.pin4

X2.pin4

Blue

Twisted pair

X1.pin5

X2.pin5

White/Blue

X1.pin7

X2.pin7

White/Brown

X1.pin8

X2.pin8

Brown

Twisted pair

Table 3-102 lists the pin assignment of the crossover cable. Table 3-102 Pin assignment of the crossover cable Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relationship

X1.pin1

X2.pin3

White/Orange

Twisted pair

X1.pin2

X2.pin6

Orange

X1.pin3

X2.pin1

White/Green

X1.pin6

X2.pin2

Green

X1.pin4

X2.pin7

Blue

X1.pin5

X2.pin8

White/Blue

X1.pin7

X2.pin4

White/Brown

X1.pin8

X2.pin5

Brown

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

3.11.2 Management Connections and Interfaces of OptiX OSN 8800 T32/T64 3.11.2.1 Interfaces Interfaces For OptiX OSN 8800 T32/T64, the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interfaces on TN51ETH1/ TN51ETH2 boards are used for achieving inter-NE communication and the ETH1, ETH2, and ETH3 interfaces on the TN51ETH2 boards are used to achieve intra-NE communication. Table 3-103 provides correct connections of these network interfaces.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


299



Table 3-103 Network Cable Interfaces Board Name TN51E FI1

Front Panel

EFI1

Typ e

Function

NM_ETH 2a

RJ4 5

l Connects an NMS computer through a network cable so that the NMS can manage the equipment where the TN51EFI1 board is located.

NM_ETH2

Interface

SERIAL

l Connects the TN51EFI1 board inside one NE to the NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 interface on the TN51EFI1/TN51EFI2 boards inside another NE to achieve communication between NEs.

TN51E FI2

EFI2

SERIALa

DB9

Functions as a serial network interface and supports X.25 protocol and TL1 management. The default rate of this serial interface is 38400.

LAMP1/ LAMP2

RJ4 5

Controls the PWR and alarm indicators of the cabinet that holds the subrack with the TN51EFI2 board.

ETH1

LAMP1

ETH2

LAMP2 NM_ETH1

ETH3

CAUTION The LAMP interfaces on the TN51EFI2 board provide 5 V power, and it is only used for the indicators on a cabinet. It cannot connect to an RJ45 cable intended for an NM_ETH or ETH interface; otherwise, the TN51EFI2 board, the connected test instrument, or the equipment will be damaged.

NM_ETH 1a

RJ4 5

l Connects to an NMS computer using a network cable so that the NMS can manage the equipment where the TN51EFI2 board is located. l Connects the TN51EFI2 board inside one NE to the NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2 interface on the TN51EFI2 board inside another NE to achieve communication between the NEs. NOTE NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the same function.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


300


Board Name

Front Panel


Interface

Typ e

Function

ETH1/ ETH2/ ETH3

RJ4 5

l Connect the TN51EFI2 board inside one subrack to the ETH1/ETH2/ ETH3 interfaces on the EFI2 boards inside other subracks using network cables to achieve communication between all the subracks. l Connects the TN51EFI2 board to a CRPC or ROP board using a network cable to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board.

NOTE Authentication is required before this port is connected. To be specific, you must log in to the NE using the NE administrator account for authentication.

Pin Assignment Figure 3-61 shows the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector. Figure 3-61 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .

Figure 3-62 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector. Figure 3-62 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


301



Table 3-104 describes the pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface. Table 3-104 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

NM_ETNTXP

Positive pole for transmitting the data for communication with the NM

2

NM_ETNTXN

Negative pole for transmitting the data for communication with the NM

3

NM_ETNRXP

Positive pole for receiving the data for communication with the NM

4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected

6

NM_ETNRXN

Negative pole for receiving the data for communication with the NM

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Table 3-105 describes the pin assignment of the NM_ETH2 interface. Table 3-105 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH2 interface

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

NMJL_ETNTXP

Positive pole for transmitting the concatenated data for communication with a network management system (NM)

2

NMJL_ETNTXN

Negative pole for transmitting the concatenated data for communication with an NM

3

NMJL_ETNRXP

Positive pole for receiving the concatenated data for communication with an NM

4

NC

Not connected


302



Pin

Signal

Function

5

NC

Not connected

6

NMJL_ETNRXN

Negative pole for receiving the concatenated data for communication with an NM

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Table 3-106 describes the pin assignment of the ETH1 interface. Table 3-106 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH1_TXP

Positive pole for transmitting the data for normal intersubrack communication

2

ETH1_TXN

Negative pole for transmitting the data for normal inter-subrack communication

3

ETH1_RXP

Positive pole for receiving the data for normal intersubrack communication

4

ETH1_CRIT_TXP

Positive pole for transmitting the data for emergent intersubrack communication

5

ETH1_CRIT_TXN

Negative pole for transmitting the data for emergent inter-subrack communication

6

ETH1_RXN

Negative pole for receiving the data for normal intersubrack communication

7

ETH1_CRIT_RXP

Positive pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication

8

ETH1_CRIT_RXN

Negative pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication

Table 3-107 describes the pin assignment of the ETH2 interface. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


303



Table 3-107 Pin assignment of the ETH2 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH2_TXP


2

ETH2_TXN


3

ETH2_RXP


4

ETH2_CRIT_TXP


5

ETH2_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH2_RXN


7

ETH2_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH2_CRIT_RXN


Table 3-108 describes the pin assignment of the ETH3 interface. Table 3-108 Pin assignment of the ETH3 interface

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH3_TXP

Positive pole for transmitting the data for ordinary intersubrack communication

2

ETH3_TXN

Negative pole for transmitting the data for ordinary inter-subrack communication


304



Pin

Signal

Function

3

ETH3_RXP

Positive pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication

4

ETH3_CRIT_TXP


5

ETH3_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH3_RXN

Negative pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication

7

ETH3_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH3_CRIT_RXN


Table 3-109 describes the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces. Table 3-109 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

CRIT_ALMP

Positive pole for critical alarm signals

2

CRIT_ALMN

Negative pole for critical alarm signals

3

MAJ_ALMP

Positive pole for major alarm signals

4

RUNP

Positive pole for power indicating signals

5

RUNN

Negative pole for power indicating signals

6

MAJ_ALMN

Negative pole for major alarm signals

7

MIN_ALMP

Positive pole for minor alarm signals


305



Pin

Signal

Function

8

MIN_ALMN

Negative pole for minor alarm signals

Table 3-110 describes the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface. Table 3-110 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

N.C

Not defined

2

RXD

Receive end

3

TXD

Transmit end

4

DTR

Data terminal equipment ready

5

GND

Ground

6

-

Reserved

7

-

Reserved

8

GND

Ground

9

N.C

Not defined

DIP Switches There are DIP switches inside the EFI1 board. The EFI2 board is connected to the master subrack through the ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI1 board. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID5 are valid. ID6-ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID5-ID1, by which a maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 3-63 shows the position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board. l

The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the CPLD.

l

When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.

l

As shown in Figure 3-63, the value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


306



Figure 3-63 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board

NM_ETH2

CPLD SERIAL

(ID5)

ON

(ID1)

ON

(ID6)

ON

(ID2)

ON

(ID7)

ON

(ID3)

ON

(ID8)

ON

(ID4)

ON

SW1

SW2

NOTE

Ensure that the ID6 to ID8 switches are turned on as shown in Figure 3-63.

3.11.2.2 Connections On a network where only OptiX OSN 8800 T32/T64 NEs are used, intra-NE and inter-NE communication are achieved through fiber connections and network cable connections.

NE Connections Figure 3-64 shows the NE connection scheme. The figure presents connections between two NEs: NE1 and NE2. Each NE consists of three subracks, one of which is the master subrack and the other two are slave subracks. The master and slave subracks are connected using fibers and network cables.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


307



Figure 3-64 NE connection scheme NMS NE1

NE2 Master Subrack (1)

OTU OTU OTU OTU

EFI2

SCC SC2

FIU

Other NE

OADM/OA/O M/OD

FIU

LAMP1LAMP2NM_ETH1

ETH3

Slave Subrack (3) SCC

EFI2

SC2

FIU

ETH3

LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

ETH1 ETH2

Fiber

Other NE

EFI2

LAMP1LAMP2NM_ETH1

ETH1 ETH2

ETH3

FIU

OADM/OA/O M/OD

SCC

Slave Subrack (2)

EFI2

LAMP1LAMP2NM_ETH1

SC2

ETH1 ETH2

SCC FIU

Other NE

EFI2

EFI2

Other NE

ETH3

Slave Subrack (3)

Master Subrack (1)

EFI2

LAMP1LAMP2NM_ETH1

ETH3

FIU

OADM/OA/O M/OD

ETH1 ETH2

SC2

FIU

EFI2

SCC

ETH1 ETH2

EFI2

Slave Subrack (2) Other NE

SERIAL

OTU

NM_ETH2

ETH3

OTU

EFI2

EFI1

LAMP1LAMP2NM_ETH1

ETH1 ETH2

OTU

EFI1/EFI2

SCC OTU

EFI2

FIU

Other NE

OADM/OA/O M/OD

Network Cable

Inter-NE communication: l

As shown in the figure above, NE1 connects to the NMS through the NM_ETH1 interface on the EFI2 board in the master subrack using a network cable, enabling the NMS to manage the two NEs.

l

Inside each NE, OTU, OADM/OA/OM/OD, OSC, and FIU boards are properly connected through fibers and the FIU boards are also connected to other NEs. ESC or OSC channels are used to achieve inter-NE communication.

l

The NM_ETH2 interface on the EFI1 board in the master subrack of one NE is connected to the NM_ETH1 interface on the EFI2 board inside the master subrack of the other NE using a network cable, achieving inter-NE communication over Ethernet channels.

Intra-NE communication: For each NE, the ETH1 interface on the EFI2 board inside the one subrack are connected to the ETH2 interfaces on the EFI2 board in the other subrack to achieve communication between the subracks.

3.11.3 Management Connections and Interfaces of OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


308



3.11.3.1 Interfaces Interfaces For OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interfaces on TN16EFI board are used for achieving inter-NE communication and the ETH1, ETH2, and ETH3 interfaces on the TN16EFI boards are used to achieve intra-NE communication. Table 3-111 provides correct connections of these network interfaces. Table 3-111 Network Cable Interfaces Board Name TN16E FI

Front Panel

EFI

LAMP2

ETH2

NM_ETH1

ETH3

NM_ETH2

Type

Function

LAMP1LAMP2

RJ45

Controls the PWR indicators and alarm indicators of the cabinet that holds the subrack.

ETH1ETH3

RJ45

l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.

LAMP1

ETH1

SERIAL

Interface

NOTE When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3 interface cannot be used for the communication between the master and slave subracks.

l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board. NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2

RJ45

a

l Connects the network interface on the equipment through a network cable to that on an NM server so that the NM can manage the equipment. l Connects the NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs.

SERIALa

DB9

The interface provides serial NM and supports X.25 protocol.

NOTE Authentication is required before this port is connected. To be specific, you must log in to the NE using the NE administrator account for authentication.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


309




8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .

Figure 3-66 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector. Figure 3-66 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

NM_ETNTXP


2

NM_ETNTXN



310



Pin

Signal

Function

3

NM_ETNRXP


4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected

6

NM_ETNRXN


7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected


Signal

Function

1

NMJL_ETNTXP


2

NMJL_ETNTXN


3

NMJL_ETNRXP


4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected

6

NMJL_ETNRXN


7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected



311




Signal

Function

1

ETH1_TXP


2

ETH1_TXN


3

ETH1_RXP


4

ETH1_CRIT_TXP


5

ETH1_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH1_RXN


7

ETH1_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH1_CRIT_RXN



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH2_TXP


2

ETH2_TXN



312



Pin

Signal

Function

3

ETH2_RXP


4

ETH2_CRIT_TXP


5

ETH2_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH2_RXN


7

ETH2_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH2_CRIT_RXN



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH3_TXP

Positive pole for transmitting the data for ordinary intersubrack communication

2

ETH3_TXN

Negative pole for transmitting the data for ordinary inter-subrack communication

3

ETH3_RXP

Positive pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication

4

ETH3_CRIT_TXP



313



Pin

Signal

Function

5

ETH3_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH3_RXN

Negative pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication

7

ETH3_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH3_CRIT_RXN


Table 3-117 describes the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces. Table 3-117 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces Pin

Signal

Function

1

CRIT_ALMP


2

CRIT_ALMN


3

MAJ_ALMP


4

RUNP


5

RUNN


6

MAJ_ALMN


7

MIN_ALMP


8

MIN_ALMN


Table 3-118 describes the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


314



Table 3-118 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

N.C

Not defined

2

RXD

Receive end

3

TXD

Transmit end

4

DTR


5

GND

Ground

6

-

Reserved

7

-

Reserved

8

GND

Ground

9

N.C

Not defined

DIP Switches There are DIP switches inside the EFI board. The master and slave subracks are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on the EFI. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI board. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID5 are valid. ID6-ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID5-ID1, by which a maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 3-67 shows the position of the DIP switches on the EFI board. l

The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the T1.

l

When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.

l

As shown in Figure 3-67, the value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


315



Figure 3-67 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI board

U8 SERIAL

SW2

NM_ETH2

SW1

T1

ON

ON

ON

ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON

ON

ON

ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

SW1

SW2

NOTE

Ensure that the ID6 to ID8 switches are turned on as shown in Figure 3-67.

3.11.3.2 Connections On a network where only OptiX OSN 8800 T16 NEs are used, intra-NE and inter-NE communication are achieved through fiber connections and network cable connections.

NE Connections Figure 3-68 shows the NE connection scheme. The figure presents connections between two NEs: NE1 and NE2. Each NE consists of three subracks, one of which is the master subrack and the other two are slave subracks. The master and slave subracks are connected using fibers and network cables.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


316





Master Subrack (1) SCC

EFI

ETH1 ETH2

SERIAL

ETH3

NM_ETH2

LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

EFI

LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

ETH3

NM_ETH2

OTU

ETH1 ETH2

EFI

OTU

SERIAL

SCC OTU

EFI

OTU OTU OTU

OTU

OTU

SCC

EFI

ETH1 ETH2 ETH3

SC2

FIU

Other NE

FIU

OADM/OA/O M/OD

SCC

EFI

SC2

FIU

ETH3

LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

ETH1 ETH2

NM_ETH2

Other NE

Slave Subrack (2)

Slave Subrack (3)

EFI SERIAL

Fiber

Other NE

NM_ETH2

ETH3

NM_ETH2

FIU

OADM/OA/O M/OD

EFI SERIAL

SC2

ETH1 ETH2

FIU

SERIAL

SCC

LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

EFI

EFI

Other NE

LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

Slave Subrack (3)

ETH3

FIU

OADM/OA/O M/OD

ETH1 ETH2

SC2

NM_ETH2

FIU

SERIAL

SCC

EFI

Other NE

EFI

LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

Slave Subrack (2)

FIU

Other NE

OADM/OA/O M/OD

Network Cable


As shown in the figure above, NE1 connects to the NMS through the NM_ETH1 interface on the EFI board in the master subrack using a network cable, enabling the NMS to manage the two NEs.

l


l

The NM_ETH2 interface on the EFI board in the master subrack of one NE is connected to the NM_ETH1 interface on the EFI board inside the master subrack of the other NE using a network cable, achieving inter-NE communication over Ethernet channels.

Intra-NE communication: For each NE, the ETH1 interface on the EFI board inside the one subrack are connected to the ETH2 interfaces on the EFI board in the other subrack to achieve communication between the subracks.

3.11.4 Management Connections and Interfaces of OptiX OSN 6800 Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


317



3.11.4.1 Interfaces Interfaces For OptiX OSN 6800, the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interfaces on TN11AUX board are used for achieving inter-NE communication and the ETH1 and ETH2 interfaces on the TN11AUX boards are used to achieve intra-NE communication. Table 3-119 provides correct connections of these network interfaces. Table 3-119 Network Cable Interfaces Board Name

Front Panel

TN11 AUX NM_ETH1

Interfac e

T y p e

Function

NM_ET H1/ NM_ET H2

R J 4 5

l Using a network cable, the port connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 to the NMS server to enable the management of the NMS over the OptiX OSN 6800.

NM_ETH2

l Using a network cable, the port connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE to another NE for communication between NEs.

ETH1 ETH2

ETH1/ ETH2

R J 4 5

STAT PROG

l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board.

AUX

TN11 EFI

COM

ETH3

ALM01 ALM02 ALM03 ALM04

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

l Using a network cable, the port connects the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to the other subracks for communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.

SERIAL

ALMI1 ALMI2 LAMP1 LAMP2

COM

R J 4 5

This interface is intended only for Huawei engineers to commission the equipment at the factory.


318


Board Name

Front Panel


Interfac e

T y p e

Function

ETH3

R J 4 5

l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks. NOTE When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3 interface cannot be used for the communication between the master and slave subracks.

l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board. ALMO1/ ALMO2/ ALMO3/ ALMO4

R J 4 5

l Alarm outputs are sent to the DC power distribution cabinet through the output interface and the cascading interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to implement integrated display of alarms. The alarm outputs are controlled by the internal relay contact. When the relay contact is closed, the resistance of each ALMO interface is less than 1 ohm. When the relay contact is open, the resistance of each ALMO interface is an infinite number. l The definitions for the pins of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/cascading, respectively. The definitions for the pins of the ALMO3 and ALMO4 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/ cascading, respectively. For example, if ALMO1 is used to output alarm signals, ALMO2 can be cascaded to ALMO1 on another subrack. l The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm outputs. Defaults of the first three are critical alarm, major alarm, and minor alarm. The other five are reserved. Alarm outputs can be cascaded.

SERIAL

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

D B 9

The OAM interface is a serial NM interface, providing functions of serial NM and supporting X.25 protocol.


319


Board Name

Front Panel


Interfac e

T y p e

Function

ALMI1/ ALMI2

R J 4 5

External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring. The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm inputs. The severity of the eight alarms can be configured to cooperate with the external system to implement remote monitoring of external alarms.

LAMP1/ LAMP2

R J 4 5

This interface drives the running indicators and alarm indicators of the cabinet that holds the subrack.


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .

Figure 3-70 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


320



Figure 3-70 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5

Table 3-120 describes the pin assignment of the COM interface. Table 3-120 Pin assignment of the COM interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETNTX_P_1

Transmits the data positive

2

ETNTX_N_1

Transmits the data negative

3

ETNRX_P_1

Receives the data positive

4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected

6

ETNRX_N_1

Receives data negative

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

NM_ETNTXP


2

NM_ETNTXN



321



Pin

Signal

Function

3

NM_ETNRXP


4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected

6

NM_ETNRXN


7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected


Signal

Function

1

NMJL_ETNTXP


2

NMJL_ETNTXN


3

NMJL_ETNRXP


4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected

6

NMJL_ETNRXN


7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected



322




Signal

Function

1

ETH1_TXP


2

ETH1_TXN


3

ETH1_RXP


4

ETH1_CRIT_TXP


5

ETH1_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH1_RXN


7

ETH1_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH1_CRIT_RXN



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH2_TXP


2

ETH2_TXN



323



Pin

Signal

Function

3

ETH2_RXP


4

ETH2_CRIT_TXP


5

ETH2_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH2_RXN


7

ETH2_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH2_CRIT_RXN



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH3_TXP

Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications

2

ETH3_TXN

Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications

3

ETH3_RXP

Receives the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications

4

ETH3_CRIT_TXP

Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications

5

ETH3_CRIT_TXN

Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications


324



Pin

Signal

Function

6

ETH3_RXN

Receives the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications

7

ETH3_CRIT_RXP

Receives the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications

8

ETH3_CRIT_RXN

Receives the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications

Table 3-126 describes the pin assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 interfaces. Table 3-126 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces Pin

Signal

Function

1

CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP


2

CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN


3

MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP


4

MIN_SWITCH_OUTP


5

MIN_SWITCH_OUTN


6

MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN


7

ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P


8

ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N


Table 3-127 describes the pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


325



Table 3-127 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces Pin

Signal

Function

1

ALM_SWITCH_OUT2P


2

ALM_SWITCH_OUT2N


3

ALM_SWITCH_OUT3P


4

ALM_SWITCH_OUT4P


5

ALM_SWITCH_OUT4N


6

ALM_SWITCH_OUT3N


7

ALM_SWITCH_OUT5P


8

ALM_SWITCH_OUT5N


Table 3-128 describes the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface. Table 3-128 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

N.C

Not defined

2

RXD

Receive end of data

3

TXD

Transmit end of data

4

DTR


5

GND

Ground

6

-

Reserved

7

-

Reserved

8

GND

GND

9

5VOADM

Power supply for OADM

Table 3-129 describes the pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


326



Table 3-129 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

SWITCHI_IN1

Alarm input 1

2

GND

Ground

3

SWITCHI_IN2

Alarm input 2

4

SWITCHI_IN3

Alarm input 3

5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SWITCHI_IN4

Alarm input 4

8

GND

Ground

Table 3-130 describes the pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface. Table 3-130 Pin assignment of the ALMI2 Pin

Signal

Function

1

SWITCHI_IN5

Alarm input 5

2

GND

Ground

3

SWITCHI_IN6

Alarm input 6

4

SWITCHI_IN7

Alarm input 7

5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SWITCHI_IN8

Alarm input 8

8

GND

Ground

Table 3-131 describes the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces. Table 3-131 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

CRIT_ALMP

Critical alarm signal positive

2

CRIT_ALMN

Critical alarm signal negative

3

MAJ_ALMP

Major alarm signal positive


327



Pin

Signal

Function

4

RUNP

Power indicating signal positive

5

RUNN

Power indicating signal negative

6

MAJ_ALMN

Major alarm signal positive

7

MIN_ALMP

Minor alarm signal positive

8

MIN_ALMN

Minor alarm signal negative

Jumper The SCC detects the subrack ID and identifies whether the subrack is a primary or a secondary one. The result is indicated by the LED indicator of the SCC front panel. The TN11AUX01 board is available in two types. For one type there are three jumpers and for the other type there are eight jumpers inside the board. l

For the TN11AUX01 board that has three jumpers inside, the jumpers can be set in eight combinations, representing decimal values 0-7. The default setting of the three jumpers is 000. The value 0 indicates the master subrack, and the other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 3-71 shows the position of the three jumpers. When the two pins on the right of each jumper are capped, the setting is 1; when the two pins on the left of each jumper are capped, the setting is 0. As shown in Figure 3-71, the jumper setting represents the decimal value of 1, which means that the subrack ID is 1.

l

For the TN11AUX01 board that has eight jumpers inside, the J14, J15, J16, J17, and J18, jumpers are reserved and the two pins on the left of each reserved jumper must be capped. The J4, J3, and J2 jumpers can be set in 8 combinations, representing decimal values 0-7. The default setting of the three jumpers is 000. The value 0 indicates the master subrack and the other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 3-72 shows the position of the jumpers. When the two pins on the right of each of the three jumpers are capped, the setting is 1; when the two pins on the left of each of the three jumpers are capped, the setting is 0. As shown in Figure 3-72, the jumper setting represents the decimal value of 1, which means that the subrack ID is 1.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


328



Figure 3-71 Position of the three jumpers on the TN11AUX01 board Representing Representing Representing

0

0

1

1

2

3

Junper cap

Jumpers

1

2

3 CPU

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


329



Figure 3-72 Position of the eight jumpers on the TN11AUX01 board Representing 0

Representing 0

J3

J4

J2

Representing 0

Representing 0

J17

Representing 1

Representing0

J15

J16 Representing 0

Representing0

Junper cap J14

J18

J4

J3

J2

J17

J16

J15

J18

J14

Jumpers

CPU

CAUTION The J14, J15, J16, J17, and J18 jumpers must be set as specified in Figure 3-72 . Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service interruption.

The TN11AUX02 board has eight jumpers, which can be used to implement 32 states that represent decimal values 0-31. Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. In the TN11AUX02 Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


330



board, the J14, J17, and J18 jumpers are reserved. The default value of the five jumpers is 00000. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 3-73 shows the jumpers on the board. Figure 3-73 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02 board Representing 0

Representing 0

J3

J4

J2

Representing 0

Representing 0

J17

Representing 1

Representing0

J15

J16 Representing 0

Representing0

Junper cap J14

J18

J4

J3

J2

J17

J16

J15

J18

J14

Jumpers

CPU

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


331



CAUTION The J14, J17, and J18 jumpers must be set as specified in Figure 3-73. Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service interruption.

3.11.4.2 Connections On a network where only OptiX OSN 6800 NEs are used, intra-NE and inter-NE communication are achieved through fiber connections and network cable connections.

NE Connections Figure 3-74 shows the NE connection scheme. The figure presents connections between two NEs: NE1 and NE2. Each NE consists of three subracks, one of which is the master subrack and the other two are slave subracks. The master and slave subracks are connected using fibers and network cables. Figure 3-74 NE connection scheme NMS Master Subrack (0)

SCC OTU OTU

STAT PROG

STAT PROG

OTU


AUX

OTU

ETH2

AUX

SCC OTU

NM_ETH1NM_ETH2 ETH1

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 ETH1 ETH2

NE1

OTU

AUX

AUX

OTU

OTU

SC2

FIU

Other NE

FIU

OADM/OA/O M/OD

ETH2

Slave Subrack (2) SCC

AUX

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 ETH1

SC2

STAT PROG AUX

FIU

Other NE

AUX

Fiber

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

AUX

ETH2

AUX STAT PROG

FIU

OADM/OA/O M/OD

SC2

SCC

STAT PROG


SCC FIU

Other NE

AUX

Slave Subrack (2) Other NE

ETH2

STAT PROG

FIU

OADM/OA/O M/OD

SC2

ETH2

FIU

Slave Subrack (1)

AUX

SCC

AUX

Other NE

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2ETH1

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2ETH1

Slave Subrack (1)

FIU

Other NE

OADM/OA/O M/OD

Network Cable


332




As shown in the figure above, NE1 connects to the NMS through the NM_ETH1 interface on the AUX board in the master subrack using a network cable, enabling the NMS to manage the two NEs.

l


l

The NM_ETH2 interface on the AUX board in the master subrack of one NE is connected to the NM_ETH1 interface on the AUX board inside the master subrack of the other NE using a network cable, achieving inter-NE communication over Ethernet channels.

Intra-NE communication: For each NE, the ETH1 interface on the AUX board inside the one subrack are connected to the ETH2 interfaces on the AUX board in the other subrack to achieve communication between the subracks.

3.11.5 Management Connections and Interfaces of OptiX OSN 3800 3.11.5.1 Interfaces Network Cable Interfaces For OptiX OSN 3800, the NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 interfaces of TN21AUX and TN22AUX boards are used for achieving inter-NE communication. Table 3-132 provides the correct connections of these network interfaces.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


333



Table 3-132 Network Cable Interfaces Board Name

Front Panel

TN21AU X/ TN22AU X

STAT PROG

Interfac e

T y p e

Function

NM_ET H1/ NM_ET H2

R J4 5

l Using a network cable, the port connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 3800 to the NMS server to enable the management of the NMS over the OptiX OSN 3800.

NM_ETH1

l Using a network cable, the port connects the NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE to another NE for communication between NEs.

NM_ETH2

EXT

EXT

D B 9, R J4 5

Provides the alarm input/output interface, cascading interface, commissioning network interface and management serial interface. NOTE EXT interfaces include ALMO, LAMP1, LAMP2, ETH, SERIAL, ALMI1, and ALMI2.

AUX


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .

Figure 3-76 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


334



Figure 3-76 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5


Signal

Function

1

NM_ETNTXP


2

NM_ETNTXN


3

NM_ETNRXP


4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected

6

NM_ETNRXN


7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Table 3-134 describes the pin assignment of the NM_ETH2 interface.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


335



Table 3-134 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH2 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

NMJL_ETNTXP


2

NMJL_ETNTXN


3

NMJL_ETNRXP


4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected

6

NMJL_ETNRXN


7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Table 3-135 describes the pin assignment of the ETH interface. Table 3-135 Pin assignment of the ETH interface

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETNTX_P_1

Positive pole for transmitting the data

2

ETNTX_N_1

Negative pole for transmitting the data

3

ETNRX_P_1

Positive pole for receiving the data

4

NC

Not defined

5

NC

Not defined

6

ETNRX_N_1

Negative pole for receiving the data

7

NC

Not defined

8

NC

Not defined


336



Table 3-136 describes the pin assignment of the ALMO interface. Table 3-136 Pin assignment of the ALMO interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

SWCRIT_OUT1+


2

SWCRIT_OUT1-


3

SWCRIT_OUT2+


4

SWCRIT_OUT1+


5

SWCRIT_OUT1-


6

SWCRIT_OUT2-


7

SWCRIT_OUT2+


8

SWCRIT_OUT2-


Table 3-137 describes the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface. Table 3-137 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

N.C

Not defined

2

RXD

Receive end

3

TXD

Transmit end

4

DTR


5

GND

Ground

6

–

Reserved

7

–

Reserved

8

GND

Ground


337



Pin

Signal

Function

9

V5_OADM

Power supply for OADM

Table 3-138 describes the pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface. Table 3-138 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

SW_IN1P


2

GND

Ground

3

SW_IN2P


4

SW_IN3P


5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SW_IN4P


8

GND

Ground

Table 3-139 describes the pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface. Table 3-139 Pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

SW_IN5P


2

GND

Ground

3

SW_IN6P


4

NC

Not defined

5

NC

Not defined

6

GND

Ground

7

NC

Not defined

8

NC

Not defined

Table 3-140 describes the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


338



Table 3-140 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces Pin

Signal

Function

1

RED+


2

RED-


3

YELLOW+


4

GREEN+


5

GND


6

YELLOW-


7

ORG+


8

ORG-


Jumper of TN21/TN22AUX The TN21AUX has 3 jumpers. Figure 3-77 shows the jumpers. The TN22AUX has 8 jumpers. Before the board is used, make sure that the setting of the J4 jumper is the same as that shown in Figure 3-78. Figure 3-77 Position of the jumper on the TN21AUX

CPU

Jumper

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


339



Figure 3-78 Position of the jumper on the TN22AUX

Jumper

Jumper cap

8 (J4)

3.11.5.2 Connections On a network where only OptiX OSN 3800 NEs are used, communication between the NEs is achieved through fiber connections and network cable connections.

NE Connections Figure 3-79 shows the NE connection scheme. The figure presents how two NEs, namely NE1 and NE2, are connected using fibers and network cables.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


340



Figure 3-79 NE connection scheme

NMS NE1 STAT PROG

AUX

OTU

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2

SCC

EXT

OTU AUX

NE2 STAT PROG

FIU

SC2 FIU

EXT

OADM/OA

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2

Other NE

AUX

SCC

AUX

Other NE Fiber

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Other NE

Network Cable


341




As shown in the figure above, the NEs are connected to the NMS through the NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 interfaces on the AUX boards using network cables, enabling the NMS to manage the two NEs.

l

The OTU, OADM/OA, OSC, and FIU boards of the NEs are properly connected through fibers and the FIU boards are also connected to other NEs. ESC or OSC channels are used to achieve inter-NE communication.

l

The NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 interfaces on the AUX boards of the two NEs are connected using network cables, achieving inter-NE communication over Ethernet channels.

3.11.6 Management Connections among OptiX OSN 8800&6800&3800 On a hybrid network where OptiX OSN 8800, 6800, and 3800 NEs are used, the inter-NE communication and intra-NE communication are achieved through fiber connections and network cable connections.

Connections Figure 3-80 shows the NE connection scheme. The figure illustrates how three NEs (namely NE1, NE2, and NE3) of different types are connected. As shown in the figure, NE1 consists of a master subrack (OptiX OSN 8800) and two slave subracks (OptiX OSN 8800 T16/6800); NE2 and NE3 are two OptiX OSN 3800 NEs.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


342




SCC SC2

EXT

FIU

FIU

Other NE

OADM/OA

AUX

Other NE

STAT PROG

FIU

OADM/OA/ OM/OD

3800

STAT PROG

ETH2

AUX

SC2

Other NE


SCC FIU

NE3

AUX

ETH3

NM_ETH2

FIU

6800 Slave Subrack (3) Other NE

OTU

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2

ETH1 ETH2

SERIAL

SC2

OADM/OA/ OM/OD

OTU

OTU

LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

EFI

SCC FIU

OTU

AUX

EFI

Other NE

SCC

AUX

8800 T16 Slave Subrack (2)

3800

EXT

OTU

SERIAL

ETH3

OTU

STAT PROG

NM_ETH2

OTU

LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

OTU

ETH1 ETH2

EFI1/EFI2

SCC

NE2 EFI1

EFI2

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2

8800 T32/T64 Master Subrack (1)

Other NE

AUX

Fiber

Network Cable


As shown in the figure above, NE1 connects to the NMS through the NM_ETH1 interface on the EFI2 board in the master subrack using a network cable, enabling the NMS to manage all the NEs.

l

The OTU, OADM/OA/OM/OD, OSC, and FIU boards inside NE1 are connected through fibers. The FIU boards are also connected to other NEs. ESC or OSC channels are used to achieve inter-NE communication.

l

NE2 and NE3 are connected through their OTU, OADM/OA, OSC, and FIU boards using fibers. The FIU boards of the two NEs are also connected to other NEs. ESC or OSC channels are used to achieve inter-NE communication.

l

The NM_ETH2 interface on the EFI1 board of the master subrack inside NE1 connects to the NM_ETH1 interface on the AUX board inside NE2 through a network cable. The NM_ETH2 interface on the AUX board inside NE2 also uses a network cable to connect to the NM_ETH1 interface on the AUX board inside NE3. In this manner, all the NEs communicate with each other using Ethernet channels.

Intra-NE communication:

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


343



For NE1, the ETH1 interface on the EFI2/EFI board inside the one subrack are connected to the ETH2 interfaces on the EFI/AUX board in the other subrack to achieve communication between the subracks.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


344


4

4 Node Configurations

Node Configurations

About This Chapter 4.1 OTN Typical Configuration This section uses an 80-wavelength system as an example to describe the typical configurations of an optical transmission network (OTN). Compared with an 80-wavelength system, a 40wavelength system does not use ITL boards. A 40-wavelength system is configured in a similar way as an 80-wavelength system. 4.2 OCS Typical Configuration

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


345



4.1 OTN Typical Configuration This section uses an 80-wavelength system as an example to describe the typical configurations of an optical transmission network (OTN). Compared with an 80-wavelength system, a 40wavelength system does not use ITL boards. A 40-wavelength system is configured in a similar way as an 80-wavelength system.

4.1.1 OTM/Back to Back OTM A back-to-back optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) site consists of two OTMs arranged back to back.

4.1.1.1 Signal Flow The OTM node is used at the terminal station. The back-to-back OTM node is usually used at central sites. In the receive direction: l

The optical supervisory signals and the main path optical signals are separated from the line signals received from west. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory unit for processing, and the main-path optical signals are sent to the demultiplexer after amplification.

l

Certain wavelengths are dropped and enter the OTU before being sent to the local client equipment. The other wavelengths are not demultiplexed locally. They pass through and are multiplexed with the locally added wavelengths before the optical amplification.

l

Finally, the signals are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory signals for line transmission.

The signal flow of the transmit direction is the reverse of this process. Figure 4-1 shows the signal flow of an 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


346



Figure 4-1 Signal flow of an 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node

4.1.1.2 Subrack Layout This section describes the typical configurations for the optical layer of a back-to-back OTM node.

Configuration Principle Optical multiplexer unit and demultiplexer unit: l

For an 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node, ITL boards must be configured if the M40V/M40/D40 boards are used for adding/dropping wavelengths.

Optical amplifier unit: l

Optical amplifier boards must be configured according to the power budget for actual situations.

Spectrum analyzer unit: l

When WMU and MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an OTM node, configure WMU boards prior to MCA/MC8/OPM8 boards.

l

When only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an OTM node, the MCA4 boards are most preferred.

l

It is preferred to connect an MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 board to the MON port on an optical amplifier board or the MON port on an FIU board.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


347



Optical supervisory channel unit: l

For an 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node, two SC1 or one SC2 can be configured.

Typical Configuration This section uses the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 as an example to illustrate the typical configurations for the optical layer of a back-to-back OTM node. As shown in Figure 4-2, two subracks are required. Figure 4-2 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a back-to-back OTM node

4.1.1.3 Subrack Connections This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of an 80-wavelength back-toback OTM node. Figure 4-3 uses a westbound 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node as an example to illustrate how fibers are connected.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


348



Figure 4-3 Subrack fiber connections for an 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node Shelf1-IU20 Shelf1-IU21

FIU

SC2

OUT

Shelf1-IU22

OAU101 MON

Shelf1-IU24

Shelf1-IU26

MON

MON

OAU103

ITL

IN

Shelf1-IU35

MCA4 IN1 IN2

TC

TM1

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN3

RC

RM1

IN

IN

IN

IN4

TM

TM2

VO

VO

TO

RM

RM2

VI

VI

RO TE RE

Shelf1-IU4

MON

MON

MON

MON

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

M01

M01

D01

D01

M40

M40

D40

D40

M40E

Receive direction signal

Shelf1-IU14 Shelf1-IU17

Shelf1-IU1

Transmit direction signal

M40O

Optical supervisory signal

D40E

D40O

Optical monitoring signal

4.1.2 1 Degree ROADM This section uses the WSMD4 board as an example to illustrate how to configure a 1-degree 80wavelength ROADM node.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


349



4.1.2.1 Signal Flow A 1-degree ROADM node provides only one optical direction and can be upgraded to multidegree ROADM nodes without interrupting services to provide multiple optical directions. The 1-degree ROADM node consists of one WSMD4. In the receive direction: l

The optical supervisory signals and the main path optical signals are separated from the line signals received from west. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory unit for processing, and the main-path optical signals are sent to the WSMD4 board after being amplified.

l

The main-path optical signal from the west WSMD4 board is sent to the ITL board and is then split into two multiplexed wavelength signals (odd wavelength and even wavelength) in the C-band with frequency spacing of 100 GHz. Then the two optical signals are locally dropped through two demultiplexer boards.

The signal flow of the transmit direction is the reverse of this process. Figure 4-4 shows the signal flow of 1-degree ROADM. Figure 4-4 Signal flow of a 1-degree ROADM in an 80-wavelength system

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


350



4.1.2.2 Subrack Layout This section describes the typical configurations for the optical layer of a 1-degree 80wavelength ROADM node that uses one WSMD4 board.

Configuration Principle Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit: l

One WSMD2 board, or WSMD4 board, or one combination of WSD9+WSM9 board, or one combination of RDU9+WSM9 board, or one WSMD9 board must be used.

l

If the node needs to be upgraded to a 2-, 3-, or 4-degree node, the WSMD4 boards are recommended.

l

If the node needs to be upgraded to more than four degrees, the combinations of RDU9 +WSM9 boards or combinations of WSD9+WSM9 boards or the WSMD9 boards are recommended.

Optical multiplexer unit and demultiplexer unit: l

For an 80-wavelength ROADM node, ITL boards must be configured if the M40V/M40/ D40 boards are used for adding/dropping wavelengths.



l

When WSDM4/WSMD9 boards are used, it is recommended that optical amplifier boards be configured in wavelength-dropping directions.

l

If optical amplifier boards need to be used in wavelength-adding directions, low-power optical amplifiers are recommended.


When WMU and MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an ROADM node, configure WMU boards prior to MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards.

l

When only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an ROADM node, the MCA4 boards are most preferred.

l


l

Automatic deployment: – MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards must be configured for automatic deployment. If OSNR detection for 10 Gbit/s rates is not required, the OPM8 boards are most preferred. – An MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 board must be configured for remote power commissioning and must be connected to the MON port on the OA board that is connected to an FIU board. – When there are five or more fiber spans between two power equalization site, an MCA4/ MCA8/OPM8 board must be configured in the middle of the spans (spans/2±0.5), both in the transmit and receive directions. – When there are four or fewer fiber spans between two power equalization site, an MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 board must be configured at the transmit end.

Optical supervisory channel unit: Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


351


l


The optical supervisory unit is required in each direction of an ROADM node. For a 1degree ROADM node, one SC1 board can be configured.

Typical Configuration This section uses the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 as an example to illustrate the typical configurations for the optical layer of a 1-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node that uses one WSMD4 board. As shown in Figure 4-5, one subrackis required. Figure 4-5 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a 1-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node

A S S E EFI2 FI PIU PIU U T T PIU PIU STI ATE X G G 1 37 38 39 40 41424344 45 46 47 48

O A F S U I C 1 U 1 0 1

O A U 1 0 3

W S M D 4

2021222324 2526 27 9

M 4 0 E

M 4 0 O

O B S U C 1 C 0 1

O B I U T 1 L 0 4

M C A 4

1 2829 3031323334 3536 0

S C C

D 4 0 E

D 4 0 O

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

4.1.2.3 Subrack Connections This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of a 1-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node. Figure 4-6 shows the subrack fiber connections for the optical layer of a 1-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


352



Figure 4-6 Subrack fiber connections for a 1-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node


FIU

SC1

Shelf1-IU22

Shelf1-IU24

MON

MON

OAU101

OUT

OAU103

TC

WSMD4 MONO

Shelf1-IU29

Shelf1-IU30

Shelf1-IU31

MON

MON

MON

IN3 IN4

OBU101

OBU104

ITL

MONI

IN

RC

Shelf1-IU26

TM

OUT

OUT

OUT

RM

IN

IN

IN DM1

VO

VO

AM1 DM2

TM

VI

VI

RM

Shelf1-IU35

MCA4 IN1 IN2

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

IN

VO

VO

TO

VI

RO

VI

AM2

TE

DM3

RE

AM3 DM4 AM4

Shelf1-IU1

Shelf1-IU4

MON

MON

MON

MON

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

M01

M01

D01

D01

M40

M40

D40

D40

M40E




M40O


D40E

D40O



4.1.3.1 Signal Flow A 2-degree ROADM node provides two optical directions and can be upgraded to multi-degree ROADM nodes without interrupting services to provide multiple optical directions. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


353



The 2-degree ROADM node consists of two WSMD4 boards (west, east) with the same signal grooming. The signal grooming of the west WSMD4 board is used as an example. In the receive direction: l

The optical supervisory signals and the main-path optical signals are separated from the line signals received from west. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory unit for processing, and the main-path optical signals are sent to the WSMD4 board after being amplified.

l

The west WSMD4 board splits the main-path optical signals into two equal optical signals. – One optical signal is sent to the ITL board and split into two multiplexed wavelength signals (odd wavelength and even wavelength) with frequency spacing of 100 GHz. Then the two optical signals are locally dropped through two demultiplexer boards. – The other optical signal passes through the east WSMD4 board.

The signal flow of the transmit direction is the reverse of this process. Figure 4-7 shows the signal flow of a 2-degree ROADM. Figure 4-7 Signal flow of a 2-degree ROADM in an 80-Wavelength system

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


354



4.1.3.2 Subrack Layout This section describes the principles for configuring a 2-degree 80-channel ROADM node and the typical configurations of the equipment.


Two WSMD2 board, or two WSMD4 board, or two combinations of WSD9+WSM9 boards, or two combinations of RDU9+WSM9 boards, or two WSMD9 boards must be used.

l

If the node needs to be upgraded to a 3- or 4-degree node, the WSMD4 boards are recommended.

l






l

When WSDM4/WSMD9 boards are used, it is recommended that you configure optical amplifier boards in wavelength-dropping directions.

l




l


l


l




355


l


The optical supervisory unit is required in each direction of an ROADM node. For a 2degree ROADM node, two SC1 or one SC2 boards can be configured.

Typical Configuration This section uses the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 as an example to illustrate the typical configurations for the optical layer of a 2-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node that uses two WSMD4 boards. As shown in Figure 4-8, two subracks are required. Figure 4-8 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a 2-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node West

East

S A S E EFI2 FI PIU PIU U T T PIU PIU STI ATE G X G 1 37 38 39 40 41424344 45 46 47 48


O A F S U I C 1 U 2 0 1

O A U 1 0 3

W S M D 4

2021222324 2526 27 9

M 4 0 E

M 4 0 O

O B S U C 1 C 0 1

O B I U T 1 L 0 4

M C A 4

1 2829 3031323334 3536 0

D 4 0 E

S C C

D 4 0 O

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

O A F S U I C 1 U 1 0 1

O A U 1 0 3

W S M D 4

2021222324 2526 27 9

M 4 0 E

M 4 0 O

O B S U C 1 C 0 1

O B I U T 1 L 0 4

1 2829 3031323334 3536 0

S C C

D 4 0 E

D 4 0 O

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

4.1.3.3 Subrack Connections This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of a 2-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node. Figure 4-9 shows the subrack fiber connections for the optical layer of a 2-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


356





FIU

SC2

Shelf1-IU22

Shelf1-IU24

MON

MON

OAU101

OUT

OAU103

Shelf1-IU26

WSMD4 MONO

TM1

OUT

OUT

OUT

RC

RM1

IN

IN

IN DM1

TM

TM2

VO

VO

AM1 DM2

RM

Shelf1-IU30

Shelf1-IU31

MON

MON

MON

IN3 IN4

OBU101

OBU104

ITL

MONI

IN TC

Shelf1-IU29

RM2

VI

VI

Shelf1-IU35

MCA4 IN1 IN2

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

IN

VO

VO

TO

VI

RO

VI

AM2

TE

DM3

RE

AM3 DM4 AM4

Shelf1-IU1

Shelf1-IU4

MON

MON

MON

MON

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

M01

M01

D01

D01

M40

M40

D40

D40

M40E




M40O


D40E

D40O



4.1.4.1 Signal Flow A 3-degree ROADM node provides three optical direction and can be upgraded to multi-degree ROADM nodes without interrupting services to provide multiple optical directions. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


357



The 3-degree ROADM node consists of three WSMD4 boards (west, east, south) with the same signal grooming. The signal grooming of the west WSMD4 board is used as an example. In the receive direction: l

The optical supervisory signals and the main path optical signals are separated from the line signals received from west. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory unit for processing, and the main path optical signals are sent to the west WSMD4 board after being amplified.

l

The west WSMD4 board splits the main-path optical signals into three equal optical signals. – One optical signal is sent to the ITL board and split into two multiplexed wavelength signals (one odd and one even wavelength) with frequency spacing of 100 GHz. Then the two optical signals are locally dropped through two demultiplexer boards. – The other two optical signals each pass through the east and south WSMD4 boards each.

The signal flow of the transmit direction is the reverse of this process. Figure 4-10 shows the signal flow of 3-degree ROADM.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


358



Figure 4-10 Signal flow of a 3-degree ROADM in an 80-wavelength system

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


359



4.1.4.2 Subrack Layout This section describes the principles for configuring a 3-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node and the typical configurations of the equipment.


Three WSMD4 boards, or three combinations of WSD9+WSM9 boards, or three combinations of RDU9+WSM9 boards, or three WSMD9 boards must be used.

l

If the node needs to be upgraded to four degrees, the WSMD4 boards are recommended.

l






l

When WSDM4/WSMD9 boards are used, it is recommended that you configure optical amplifier boards in wavelength-dropping directions.

l




l

When only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an ROADM node, the MCA8/ OPM8 boards are most preferred.

l


l




360


l


The optical supervisory unit is required in each direction of an ROADM node. For a 3degree ROADM node, three SC1 or one SC2 plus one SC1 board can be configured.

Typical Configuration This section uses the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 as an example to illustrate the typical configurations for the optical layer of a 3-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node that uses three WSMD4 boards. As shown in Figure 4-11, three subracks are required. Figure 4-11 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a 3-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node West

East/South



O A F S U I C 1 U 2 0 1

O A U 1 0 3

W S M D 4

2021222324 2526 27 9

M 4 0 E

M 4 0 O

O B S U C 1 C 0 1

O B I U T 1 L 0 4

M C A 8

1 2829 3031323334 3536 0

D 4 0 E

S C C

D 4 0 O

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

O A F S U I C 1 U 1 0 1

O A U 1 0 3

W S M D 4

2021222324 2526 27 9

M 4 0 E

M 4 0 O

O B S U C 1 C 0 1

O B I U T 1 L 0 4

1 2829 3031323334 3536 0

S C C

D 4 0 E

D 4 0 O

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

4.1.4.3 Subrack Connections This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of a 3-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node. Figure 4-12 shows the subrack fiber connections for the optical layer of a 3-degree 80wavelength ROADM node.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


361





FIU

SC2

OUT

Shelf1-IU22

Shelf1-IU24

MON

MON

OAU101

OAU103

RC TM RM

WSMD4 MONO

Shelf1-IU29

Shelf1-IU30

Shelf1-IU31

MON

MON

MON

OBU101

OBU104

ITL

MONI

IN TC

Shelf1-IU26

TM1

OUT

RM1

IN

Shelf1-IU35

MCA8 IN1 IN2

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN3

IN

IN DM1

IN

IN

IN

IN4

AM1 DM2

VO

VO

TO

IN5

VI

VI

RO

IN6

AM2

TE

IN7

DM3

RE

IN8

TM2

VO

VO

RM2

VI

VI

AM3 DM4 AM4

Shelf1-IU1

Shelf1-IU4

MON

MON

MON

MON

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

M01

M01

D01

D01

M40

M40

D40

D40

M40E




M40O


D40E

D40O



4.1.5.1 Signal Flow A 4-degree ROADM node provides four optical directions and can be upgraded to a multi-degree ROADM node without interrupting services to provide four optical directions. The 4-degree ROADM node consists of four WSMD4 boards (north, south, east, west) with the same signal grooming. The signal grooming of the west WSMD4 board is used as an example. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


362



In the receive direction: l

The optical supervisory signals and the main path optical signals are separated from the line signals received from west. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory unit for processing, and the main path optical signals are sent to the west WSMD4 board after being amplified.

l

The west WSMD4 board splits the main-path optical signals into four equal optical signals. – One optical signal is sent to the ITL board and split into two multiplexed wavelength signals (one odd and one even wavelength) with frequency spacing of 100 GHz. Then the two optical signals are locally dropped through two demultiplexer boards. – The other three optical signals pass through the east, south, and north WSMD4 boards each.

The signal flow of the transmit direction is the reverse of this process. Figure 4-13 shows the signal flow of a 4-degree ROADM.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


363



Figure 4-13 Signal flow of a 4-degree ROADM in an 80-wavelength system

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


364



4.1.5.2 Subrack Layout This section describes the typical configurations for the optical layer of a 4-degree 80wavelength ROADM node that uses four WSMD4 boards.


Four WSMD4 board, or four combinations of WSD9+WSM9 boards, or four combinations of RDU9+WSM9 boards, or four WSMD9 board must be used.

l






l

When WSDM4/WSMD9 boards are used, it is recommended that optical amplifier boards be configured in wavelength-dropping directions.

l




l


l


l




365


l


The optical supervisory unit is required in each direction of an ROADM node. For a 4degree ROADM node, four SC1 or two SC2 can be configured.

Typical Configuration This section uses the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 as an example to illustrate the typical configurations for the optical layer of a 4-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node that uses four WSMD4 boards. As shown in Figure 4-14, four subracks are required. Figure 4-14 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a 4-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node West

East/South/North



O A F S U I C 1 U 2 0 1

O A U 1 0 3

W S M D 4

2021222324 2526 27 9

M 4 0 E

M 4 0 O

O B S U C 1 C 0 1

O B I U T 1 L 0 4

M C A 8

1 2829 3031323334 3536 0

D 4 0 E

S C C

D 4 0 O

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

O A F S U I C 1 U 1 2 0 1

O A U 1 0 3

W S M D 4

2021222324 2526 27 9

M 4 0 E

M 4 0 O

O B S U C 1 C 0 1

O B I U T 1 L 0 4

1 2829 3031323334 3536 0

S C C

D 4 0 E

D 4 0 O

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

4.1.5.3 Subrack Connections This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of a 4-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node. Figure 4-15 uses a westbound 4-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node as an example to illustrate how fibers are connected.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


366





FIU

SC2

OUT

Shelf1-IU22

Shelf1-IU24

MON

MON

OAU101

OAU103

RC TM RM

WSMD4 MONO

Shelf1-IU29

Shelf1-IU30

Shelf1-IU31

MON

MON

MON

OBU101

OBU104

ITL

MONI

IN TC

Shelf1-IU26

TM1

OUT

RM1

IN

Shelf1-IU35

MCA8 IN1 IN2

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN3

IN

IN DM1

IN

IN

IN

IN4

AM1 DM2

VO

VO

TO

IN5

VI

VI

RO

IN6

AM2

TE

IN7

DM3

RE

IN8

TM2

VO

VO

RM2

VI

VI

AM3 DM4 AM4

Shelf1-IU1

Shelf1-IU4

MON

MON

MON

MON

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

M01

M01

D01

D01

M40

M40

D40

D40

M40E




M40O


D40E

D40O


4.1.6 OLA 4.1.6.1 Signal Flow The DWDM OLA equipment is used for amplification of optical signals from two transmission directions The FIU board separates the optical supervisory signal from the main path optical signals and sends the former to the OSC unit for processing. The main path optical signals are amplified by the amplifier unit and multiplexed with the OSC that has already been processed, and then sent to the line fiber for transmission. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


367



Figure 4-16 shows the signal flow of a DWDM OLA node. Figure 4-16 Signal flow of a DWDM OLA node

OA East

West F I U

SC2

F I U

OA

4.1.6.2 Subrack Layout This section describes the typical configurations for the optical layer of an OLA node.

Configuration Principle Optical amplifier unit: l



When only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an OLA node, the MCA4 boards are most preferred.

l



For an OLA node, two SC1 or one SC2 can be configured.

Typical Configuration This section uses the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 as an example to illustrate the typical configurations for the optical layer of an OLA node. As shown in Figure 4-17, one subrack is required.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


368



Figure 4-17 Typical configurations for the optical layer of an OLA node


F I U

S C C

2021222324 2526 27 9

F I U

M S 4 C 0 2 E

O O A MA U 4U 1 01 0 O0 1 3

1 2829 3031323334 3536 0

M S F C C I A C U 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

4.1.6.3 Subrack Connections This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of an OLA node. Figure 4-18 shows the subrack fiber connections for the optical layer of an OLA node.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


369



Figure 4-18 Subrack fiber connections for an OLA node Shelf1-IU1

FIU

Shelf1-IU2

SC2

OUT

Shelf1-IU3

Shelf1-IU5

MON

MON

OAU101

OAU103

Shelf1-IU12

IN TC RC TM

MCA4

OUT

IN1

IN

IN2

OUT

OUT

TC

IN3

RM1

IN

IN

RC

IN4

VO

VO

TM

VI

VI

RM

RM2


Shelf1-IU13

TM1

TM2

RM

FIU




4.1.7 Regenerator 4.1.7.1 Signal Flow We have already discussed that the OLA can extend the optical transmission distance without regeneration. However, when the distance is longer, such factors as dispersion, optical noise, non-linear effect, or PMD will affect the transmission performance. In this case, we need to regenerate the original signals. An REG implements the 3R function: reshaping, re-timing and regenerating. This is to improve the signal quality and to extend the transmission distance. The signal flow of the REG is similar to that of back-to-back OTMs, except that no signal is added or dropped. Signals are regenerated through the OTU or line unit. In the receive direction: l

It separates the optical supervisory signals and the main path optical signals from the received line signals. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the OSC unit for processing.

l

The main path signals are sent to the demultiplexer after being amplified. The demultiplexed signals enter the OTU or line unit and are reshaped, re-timed, and regenerated. Then the wavelengths are multiplexed by the multiplexer before the optical amplification. Finally, the signals are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory signals for line transmission.

The signal flow of the transmit direction is the reverse of this process. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


370



Figure 4-19 shows the signal flow of 80-wavelength REG node. OTU, TOM, and line boards can be used as regeneration units. OTU boards are classified into two types: OTU with the regeneration function (LSXLR and LSXR) and OTU without the regeneration function (for example, LOM and TMX). Two OTU boards that do not have the regeneration function can be cascaded to provide the regeneration function. Similarly, line boards are also classified into two types: line board with the regeneration function and line board without the regeneration function. Two line boards that do not have the regeneration function can be cascaded to provide the regeneration function. Figure 4-19 Signal flow of an 80-wavelength REG node

l 01 OD C-EVEN

ln

OM C-EVEN

l 01

OA West

OM C-EVEN F I U

I T L

ln

OA

I T L

l 01 OD C-ODD

OA

ln

Pass-through signal

ln

F I U

OM C-ODD OA

l 01 OM C-ODD

East

OD C-EVEN

OD C-ODD

Regeneration unit

4.1.7.2 Subrack Layout This section describes the principles for configuring an 80-wavelength REG node and the typical configurations of the equipment.

Configuration Principle Optical multiplexer unit and demultiplexer unit: l

For an 80-wavelength REG node, ITL boards must be configured if the M40V/M40/D40 boards are used for adding/dropping wavelengths.




Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

When WMU and MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an OTM node, configure WMU boards prior to MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

371



l

When only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an REG node, the MCA4 boards are most preferred.

l



For an 80-wavelength REG node, two SC1 boards or one SC2 board can be configured.

Typical Configuration This section uses the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 as an example to illustrate the typical configuration. As shown in Figure 4-20, two subracks are required. Figure 4-20 Typical configurations for the optical layer of an 80-wavelength REG node West

East



O A F S U I C 1 U 2 0 1

O A U 1 0 3

I T L

2021222324 2526 27 9

M 4 0 E

M 4 0 O

M C A 4

S C C

1 2829 3031323334 3536 0

D 4 0 E

S C C

D 4 0 O

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

O A F S U I C 1 U 1 0 1

O A U 1 0 3

I T L

2021222324 2526 27 9

M 4 0 E

M 4 0 O

S C C

1 2829 3031323334 3536 0

S C C

D 4 0 E

D 4 0 O

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

4.1.7.3 Subrack Connections This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of an 80-wavelength REG node. Figure 4-21 uses a westbound 80-wavelength REG node as an example to illustrate how fibers are connected. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


372



Figure 4-21 Subrack fiber connections for an 80-wavelength REG node Shelf1-IU20 Shelf1-IU21

FIU

SC2

OUT

Shelf1-IU22

OAU101 MON

Shelf1-IU24

Shelf1-IU26

MON

MON

OAU103

ITL

IN

Shelf1-IU35

MCA4 IN1 IN2

TC

TM1

RC

RM1

TM

TM2

RM

RM2

OUT

OUT

IN3

IN

IN

IN

IN4

VO

VO

TO

VI

VI

RO

OUT

TE RE

Shelf1-IU4

MON

MON

MON

MON

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

M01

M01

D01

D01

M40

M40

D40

D40

M40E



Shelf1-IU1


M40O


D40E

D40O


4.1.8 FOADM

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


373



4.1.8.1 Signal Flow The DWDM FOADM node is responsible for processing the optical signals in two transmission directions. An FOADM node consists of two MR4s. In the receive direction: l

The FIUboard separates the optical supervisory signal from the main path optical signals and sends the former to the SC2 board for processing.

l

Main path signals are sent to the MR4 after amplification. Certain wavelengths are dropped to the local station.

l

The other wavelengths pass through and are multiplexed with the locally added wavelengths before the optical amplification.

l

Finally, the signals are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory signals for line transmission.

The signal flow of the transmit direction is the reverse of this process. Figure 4-22 shows the signal flow of an FOADM node. Figure 4-22 Signal flow of an FOADM node

4.1.8.2 Subrack Layout This section describes the principles for configuring a FOADM node and the typical configurations for the optical layer of a FOADM node.

Configuration Principle Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit: Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


374


l


If a DMR1 board is used, and the transmission distance is short, the FIU board cannot be used.


If a DMR1 board is used, optical amplifier units cannot be used on the line.

l

If DMR1 board is not used, the optical amplifier boards must be configured according to the power budget for actual situations.

Typical Configuration This section uses the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 as an example to illustrate the typical configuration. As shown in Figure 4-23, two subracks are required. Figure 4-23 Typical configurations for the optical layer of an FOADM node West

East



O A F S U I C 1 U 2 0 1

O A U 1 0 3

M R 4

2021222324 2526 27 9

M F S 4 I C 0 U 2 E

O O A MA U 4U 1 01 0 O0 1 3

M R 4

O A F S U I C 1 U 1 0 1

S C C

1 2829 3031323334 3536 0

D 4 0 E

S C C

D 4 0 O

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

O A U 1 0 3

M R 4

2021222324 2526 27 9

O O M A MA F 4 U 4U I 0 1 01 U E 0 O0 1 3

M R 4

1 2829 3031323334 3536 0

S C C

D 4 0 E

D 4 0 O

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

4.1.8.3 Subrack Connections This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of a FOADM node. Figure 4-24 uses a westbound FOADM node as an example to illustrate how fibers are connected. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


375



Figure 4-24 Subrack fiber connections for a FOADM node

Shelf1-IU1

FIU

Shelf1-IU2

SC2

OUT

Shelf1-IU3

Shelf1-IU5

MON

MON

OAU101

OBU101

IN

Shelf1-IU6

MR4

OUT IN

TC

TM1

OUT

OUT

MO

RC

RM1

IN

IN

TM

TM2

VO

VO

MI D1

RM2

VI

VI

RM

A1 D2 A2 D3 A3 D4 A4




4.1.9 CWDM 4.1.9.1 Signal Flow An 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node is used to process the optical signals in two transmission directions. It receives line signals and sends the signals to the CMR4 board, where some wavelengths are dropped to the OTUs and then to the client side equipment. Other wavelengths pass through the CMR4 board and are multiplexed with the wavelengths added locally. Then, the multiplexed wavelengths are sent to the line for transmission. Figure 4-25 shows the signal flow of an 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


376



Figure 4-25 Signal flow of an 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node

4.1.9.2 Subrack Layout This section describes the typical configurations of an 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node.

Typical Configuration This section uses the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 as an example to illustrate the typical configurations of an 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node. As shown in Figure 4-26, one subrack is required.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


377



Figure 4-26 Typical configurations for the optical layer of an 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node


S C C

F I U

2021222324 2526 27 9

CM C M 4M R 0R 4 E4

1 2829 3031323334 3536 0

S C C

M C A 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

4.1.9.3 Subrack Connections This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of an 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node. Figure 4-27 shows the subrack fiber connections for the optical layer of an 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


378



Figure 4-27 Subrack fiber connections for an 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node

Shelf1-IU1

CMR4

Shelf1-IU2

CMR4

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

MO MI D1

MO MI D1

A1 D2

A1 D2

A2

A2

D3

D3

A3

A3

D4

D4

A4

A4



4.2 OCS Typical Configuration ADM The architecture of the add-drop multiplexer (ADM) is similar to the combination of two backto-back TMs, as shown in Figure 4-28. Figure 4-28 Functional block diagram of an ADM used in the OptiX OSN 8800 STM-16/64

STM-16/64

low-rate SDH signals

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


379



MADM The multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM) is a core unit required for building a complex network. Figure 4-29 shows the functional block diagram of an MADM. The OptiX OSN 8800 can be configured as an MADM combined with ADMs at a rate ranging from STM-1 to STM-64. Figure 4-29 Functional block diagram of the OptiX OSN 8800 configured as an MADM ...

STM-16/64

low-rate SDH signals

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


380


5

5 Quick Installation Guide

Quick Installation Guide

For detailed installation procedures of OptiX OSN 8800 T64, refer to OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Quick Installation Guide For detailed installation procedures of OptiX OSN 8800 T32, refer to OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Quick Installation Guide For detailed installation procedures of OptiX OSN 8800 T16, refer to OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Quick Installation Guide For detailed installation procedures of OptiX OSN 6800, refer to OptiX OSN 6800 Quick Installation Guide For detailed installation procedures of OptiX OSN 3800, refer to OptiX OSN 3800 Quick Installation Guide

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


381


6

6 Performing Initial Web LCT Commissioning

Performing Initial Web LCT Commissioning

About This Chapter Initial commissioning must be conducted using the Web LCT because NEs cannot be managed in the network management center (NMC) before initial commissioning is completed. During initial commissioning, NEs must be connected and configured onsite, so that the U2000 can remotely manage these NEs. 6.1 Initial Commissioning Flow Some initial commissioning operations are optional and can be performed when required. 6.2 Connecting NEs to the Web LCT Before performing initial commissioning on an NE, install the Web LCT on a computer, directly connect the computer to the NE using a crossover cable, and log in to the Web LCT. 6.3 Configuring NE Attributes Configure NE attributes using the Web LCT. 6.4 Checking Board Slots Verify that the logical boards displayed on the Web LCT, physical boards inserted into the equipment, and boards specified in the network plan are consistent so future operations can be effectively performed. 6.5 Configuring the TN11TOM Board On-site If there is no OSC channel on an NE and the TN11TOM board is required to provide an ESC channel, this operation must be performed. The U2000 can remotely manage the NE and its connected NEs after the TN11TOM board is configured. 6.6 Configuring the TN52TOM Board On-site If there is no OSC channel on an NE and the TN52TOM board is required to provide an ESC channel, this operation must be performed. The U2000 can remotely manage the NE and its connected NEs after the TN52TOM board is configured. 6.7 Configuring the OA Boards Set optical attenuation and nominal gain for optical amplifier boards, with assistance from the engineers in the network management center (NMC). 6.8 Checking NE Communication Status Correct configuration of each NE is the basis for the entire network to operate properly. This section describes how to check whether the configuration of each NE is correct. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


382



6.9 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board By backing up an NE database to an SCC board, you can ensure that the NE automatically restores to the normal state in case a power failure occurs. When you back up an NE database to an SCC board, you actually back up the NE data to the flash memory of the SCC board. After a power-off reset occurs on the NE, the SCC board automatically reads the configuration data from the flash memory and applies the data to the boards on this NE. 6.10 Exiting the Web LCT After performing initial NE commissioning using the Web LCT, log out of the commissioned NE, reconnect the network cables to the NE, and exit the Web LCT.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


383



6.1 Initial Commissioning Flow Some initial commissioning operations are optional and can be performed when required. Figure 6-1 shows the flow for conducting initial commissioning using the Web LCT. Figure 6-1 Initial commissioning flow

Connecting NEs to the Web LCT Configuring NE Attributes

Checking Board Slots

Configuring the TN11TOM/TN52TOM Board Onsite Configuring the OA Boards Checking NE Communication Status Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board Mandatory Exiting the Web LCT

Optional

Optional Operations l

Configure the TN11TOM or TN52TOM board onsite. If there is no OSC channel on an NE and the TN11TOM or TN52TOM board is required to provide an ESC channel, this operation must be performed. The U2000 can remotely manage the NE and its connected NEs after the TN11TOM or TN52TOM board is configured.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


384



NOTE

Only the TOM board needs to be configured to provide an ESC channel.

Figure 6-2 shows an application scenario in which the TOM board provides an ESC channel. Figure 6-2 Application scenario in which the TOM board provides an ESC channel

Site A

NMS WDM side Site B

Client side

OTU1

TOM

WDM side

M U X / OTU1 D M U X

M U X / D OTU1 M U X

Client side

TOM

Site C

OTU1

WDM-side ESC channel Client-side ESC channel

SCC

Client-side ESC channel

– The TN11TOM or TN52TOM board provides an ESC channel only when it receives OTU1 signals on the client side or transmits OTU1 signals on the WDM side. Similarly, an ESC channel (on the client or WDM side) is available after cross-connections for OTU1 signals are configured. – Client-side ESC channel: When the TN11TOM or TN52TOM board receives OTU1 signals on the client side, the client-side ESC channel is available after client-side OTU1 cross-connections are configured. – WDM-side ESC channel: When the TN11TOM or TN52TOM board transmits OTU1 signals on the WDM side, the WDM-side ESC channel is available after WDM-side OTU1 cross-connections are configured. – In OTU1 regeneration scenarios, the ESC channel on either the client or WDM side is required. l

Configure the OA boards. If NEs are unreachable by the U2000 and optical power must be set for optical amplifier (OA) boards, connect the Web LCT to the NEs onsite and perform this operation.

6.2 Connecting NEs to the Web LCT Before performing initial commissioning on an NE, install the Web LCT on a computer, directly connect the computer to the NE using a crossover cable, and log in to the Web LCT.

6.2.1 Installing the Web LCT You can install the Web LCT using a CD or DVD, or by copying and decompressing the software package that contains the Web LCT. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


385



Installing the Web LCT by Copying and Decompressing the Software Package 1.

Obtain the software package that contains the Web LCT from Huawei engineers.

2.

Decompress the installation software package that includes U2000WebLCTversion_en_win32_x86.zip. NOTE

The version indicates the detailed version number of the Web LCT. Ensure that the decompressing directory contains no spaces, punctuation, or non-alphabetic characters.

Installing the Web LCT Using a CD or DVD 1.

Insert the installation CD or DVD.

2.

Run the setup.exe file.

3.

Select the language version for Wizard, and click Next.

4.

Click Next.

5.

Select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and click Next.

6.

Select the installation directory, and click Next. NOTE

When you click Browse to select a different installation folder, ensure that the destination path does not contain spaces or punctuation.

7.

The following dialog box is displayed. Select the features you want to install based on the following NOTE. Click Next.

NOTE

When you select the features to be installed, COMMON must be selected and other features can be selected based on the managed equipment. l For OTN equipment using the North American version only, select NA OTN. l For OTN equipment using the global version only, select NG WDM. l It is recommended that all the features are selected.

8. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Click Install to install the Web LCT. The entire installation process lasts five minutes. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

386


9.


After the installation is complete, the Installation finished dialog box is displayed. Click Finish.

6.2.2 Connecting to NEs Connect the computer where the Web LCT is installed to an NE using a crossover or straightthrough cable so the Web LCT can directly manage the connected NE.

Procedure Step 1 Connect the crossover or straight-through cable to the Web LCT. One end of the cable should be connected to the network port of the computer. For the specific ports and boards to be connected, see Table 6-1. Table 6-1 Specific port on a board Product

Board Name

Port

OptiX OSN 8800 T64, OptiX OSN 8800 T32

EFI2

NM_ETH1

EFI1

NM_ETH2

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

EFI

NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2

OptiX OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 3800

AUX

NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2

Step 2 Check the green indicator of the network adapter interface of the computer and the indicators on the board that connect to the computer. NOTE

The indicator of the computer and the green "LINK" indicator on the board remain on. The orange "ACT" indicator on the board should blink. If the three indicators are malfunctioning: l Replace the network cable with a new one. If the indicators are functioning correctly, the original cable is faulty. l If all the above-mentioned indicators are still malfunctioning, check whether the network adapter of the computer and the board that connects to the network cable are functioning correctly.

Step 3 Change the IP address of the computer being used to commission the NE so that the computer IP address is on the same subnet as the default IP Address of the NE. NOTE

l The default IP address of an NE ranges from 129.9.0.0 to 129.9.0.255 or from 129.9.191.0 to 129.9.191.255. l Change the computer IP address that is in the same network segment as the NE, for example, 129.9.0.N, where N is an integer from 1 to 255. l Change the computer subnet mask to 255.255.255.0.

----End

6.2.3 Logging In to the Web LCT Log in to the Web LCT before performing NE settings on the Web LCT. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


387



Procedure Step 1 Double-click the startweblct.bat file at "WebLCT\WebLCT\Tomcat" to launch the Web LCT application. Step 2 In the browser, enter the default value admin for User Name and Changeme_123 for Password.

Step 3 Enter the Verification Code according to the picture that is displayed on the right side. Step 4 Click Login to display the NE List window. ----End

6.3 Configuring NE Attributes Configure NE attributes using the Web LCT.

6.3.1 Searching and Adding NEs Search and add NEs by IP addresses or IP domains.

Procedure Step 1 Click NE Search and select Advanced Search at the bottom of the Screen. A Search NE window opens.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


388



Step 2 Click Manage Domain. A Manage Domain Search window opens. Step 3 Click Add and the New Domain window is displayed. Step 4 Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address, and enter an IP address in the Domain Address field. Click OK.

Attribute

Value

Domain Type

l GNE IP Domain: Search for all NEs in the specified IP domain. l GNE IP Address: Search for a specific NE using the specified IP address.

Domain Address l If Domain Type is set to GNE IP Domain, enter an IP domain value, for example, 10.191.255.255. l If Domain Type is set to GNE IP Address, enter an IP address, for example, 10.191.167.131. Step 5 Click Cancel to exit the Manage Domain Search window. Step 6 Select the entered NE IP Address in the Domain drop-down list on the Search NE window. Step 7 Click Search. After the search for NEs is complete, click End Search. Step 8 Select the NE being commissioned and click Add NE. Step 9 Click OK then Cancel. ----End

Result The NE to be commissioned is now in the list of NEs on the main Web LCT screen, and the login status is Not Logged In or Logged In. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


389



6.3.2 Logging In to an NE Log in to an NE that has been added if the NE indicates "Not Logged In".

Procedure Step 1 Highlight the NE in the main Web LCT screen and click NE Login. Enter the default value lct for User Name, and password for Password. Step 2 Click OK. The login status is Logged In. Step 3 Click NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer of the selected NE. ----End

6.3.3 Setting NE ID The ID of NEs that are searched out and added are still factory defaults, which may be different from the planned ID. The ID of NEs must be set according to the engineering design document so that commissioning engineers can perform operations on the NEs using the NMS at the network management center.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID dialog box that is displayed, enter values in the New ID and New Extended ID fields, and then click OK. Step 3 A Warning dialog box is displayed, click Yes. A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is displayed, click Close to complete changing the NE ID. At this time, the NE is unreachable. ----End

6.3.4 Setting NE IP Addresses The IP addresses of NEs that are searched out and added are factory defaults, which may be different from the planned IP addresses. The IP addresses of NEs must be set according to the engineering design document so that commissioning engineers can perform operations on the NEs using the NMS at the network management center.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. Step 2 Enter the IP Address, Gateway IP Address and Subnet Mask of the NE. Step 3 Click Apply. Click OK in the two displayed Confirm dialog boxes. Then click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


390



NOTE

You will lose your connection to the NE at this point. To restore communications, perform the following: l Change the IP address of your computer to an address on the same subnet as the NE. l Re-run 6.3.1 Searching and Adding NEs and 6.3.2 Logging In to an NE.

----End

6.3.5 Configuring Master-Slave Subracks This operation applies to versions earlier than V100R005C00SPC900 in which slave subracks must be manually added. If the equipment version is V100R005C00SPC900 or later, this operation is not required. Instead, the master and slave subrack configurations are automatically uploaded when you search and add NEs.

Background Information The OptiX OSN 8800/6800 supports the management of master/slave subracks. When multiple subracks are required for an NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be used for centralized management. In this mode, the master subrack and its slave subracks are displayed as one NE in the network management system. They share the same NE ID and IP address.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a NE and the Slot Layout is displayed. Step 2 Select a subrack on the top of the Slot Layout, right-click, and choose Add Slave Subrack from the shortcut menu. The Add Slave Subrack dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set Shelf Type, Shelf Name, and Subrack FIC in the Add Slave Subrack dialog box. Click OK. NOTE

l The subrack FIC is the physical location of the NE in the rack. Set the location information of the shelf. The recommended format is Floor-Room-Aisle-Open rack-shelf. l For the OptiX OSN 8800, the following table lists the values for Cross-Connect Type and CrossConnect Capacity.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Parameter

Value

Cross-Connect Type

OTN


391



Parameter

Value

Cross-Connect Capacity

l OptiX OSN 8800 T16: 0G to 640G l OptiX OSN 8800 T32: 0G to 1.28T l OptiX OSN 8800 T64: 0G to 2.56T

Step 4 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End

6.4 Checking Board Slots Verify that the logical boards displayed on the Web LCT, physical boards inserted into the equipment, and boards specified in the network plan are consistent so future operations can be effectively performed.

Procedure Step 1 Check whether the logical boards and physical boards are consistent. l

If yes, go to the next step.

l

If no, check as follows: – If the number of logical boards is less than the number of physical boards, verify that the physical boards are correctly inserted and add the logical boards. NOTE

If add the CRPC or ROP board, you should click

to display the slots.

1.

In the NE Explorer, select Slot Layout.

2.

Verify that the physical boards are correctly inserted. On the Slot Layout pane, right-click the corresponding logical slot, and select the required board type from the shortcut menu.

. – If the logical board types are inconsistent with the physical board types, delete and readd the logical boards.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

1.

In the NE Explorer, select Slot Layout.

2.

Then right-click the board and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

392


3.


Right-click the target logical slot and select the required board type from the shortcut menu.

Step 2 Check whether the physical boards and the boards specified in the network plan are consistent. l

If yes, you do not need to perform any other operations.

l

If no, replace the physical boards, and delete and re-add the logical boards on the panel layout.

----End

6.5 Configuring the TN11TOM Board On-site If there is no OSC channel on an NE and the TN11TOM board is required to provide an ESC channel, this operation must be performed. The U2000 can remotely manage the NE and its connected NEs after the TN11TOM board is configured.

6.5.1 Working Mode and Signal Flow Set the working mode for the TN11TOM board according to the network plan and configuration scenarios. Table 6-2 lists the available working modes of the TN11TOM board and the service mapping path for each scenario. Table 6-2 Mappings between the working modes and the service mapping paths Board Working Mode

Scenario No.

Port Working Mode

Mapping Path

Configuration Scenario

Cascading

Scenario 1

N/A

OTU1/Any->ODU1

6.5.2 Scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (cascading)

Scenario 2

N/A

OTU1/Any>ODU1->OTU1

6.5.3 Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading)

Scenario 3

N/A

OTU1/Any->ODU1

6.5.4 Scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (noncascading)

Scenario 4

N/A

Any->ODU1>OTU1

6.5.5 Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)

Scenario 5

N/A

OTU1->ODU1>OTU1

6.5.6 Scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical regeneration board)

Noncascading

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


393



6.5.2 Scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (cascading) The application scenario in which the TN11TOM board works in cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode is defined as scenario 1: cascading ODU1 tributary mode. When the TN11TOM board works in cascading ODU1 tributary mode, intra-board client-side OTU1 cross-connections must be configured so that an ESC channel is available between the NE equipped with the TN11TOM board and its connected NEs.

Application Diagram Figure 6-3 shows the position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system where the TN11TOM board works in cascading ODU1 tributary mode. Figure 6-3 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (cascading)) 1xODU1 1xOTU2 TOM

TOM

1

8

Any

M U X / D M U X

1 N S 2

ODU1

8×Any

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU1

1×ODU1

8×Any

FE, GE, FDDI, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, SDI, STM-16, OC48, ESCON, STM-4, OC-12, FC100, FICON, FC200, FICON Express, HDSDI, OTU1

1xOTU2 1xODU1

8

ODU1

Any

FE, GE, FDDI, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, SDI, STM-16, OC48, ESCON, STM-4, OC-12, FC100, FICON, FC200, FICON Express, HDSDI, OTU1

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Cross-Connection Diagram Create a cross-connection between the internal client-side and ClientLP ports on the TN11TOM board, which is marked (1) in Figure 6-4.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


394



Figure 6-4 Cross-connection diagram for the TN11TOM board (scenario 1: cascading ODU1 tributary mode)

Other board

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4

Cross-connect module

Client side

WDM side

WDM side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8


2

TOM


The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

A cross-connection can be configured between any client-side port and any ClientLP port.

Procedure Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TN11TOM board. Set Board Mode to Cascading mode. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the TN11TOM board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface in the navigation tree.

2.

Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list.

3.

Double-click the Board Mode field and set it to Cascading mode.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the preset values.

Step 2 Configure a service mode for the client-side ports on the TN11TOM board. It is recommended to select the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. Because the service type is OTU1, Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode for the ports. 1.

Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list. Click the Basic Attributes tab in the WDM Interface pane.

2.

Select a client-side port. Double-click the Service Mode field and set it to OTN Mode.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


395


3.


Click Apply.

Step 3 Set the service type to OTU-1 for ClientLP the ports. It is recommended to select the ClientLP port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. 1.

Click the Basic Attributes tab in the WDM Interface pane.

2.

Select a ClientLP port. Double-click the Service Type field and set it to OTU-1.

3.

Click Apply.

Step 4 Configure an intra-board client-side cross-connection. Configure an intra-board bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between a client-side port and a ClientLP port. Ensure that the client-side and ClientLP ports are identical to those configured at steps 3 and 4. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical CrossConnection Service Management in the navigation tree.

2.

In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration pane, click New. The Create CrossConnection Service dialog box is displayed.

3.

Set Service Level to OTU1, and set other parameters as required. The following figure shows an example of configuring a bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 3 (RX1/TX1) port and the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) port.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


396


4.


Click OK. The newly created cross-connection is displayed.

----End

6.5.3 Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading) The application scenario in which the TN11TOM board works in cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode is defined as scenario 2: cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode. When the TN11TOM board works in cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode, it can receive OTU1 signals on the client side and transmit OTU1 signals on the WDM side. To provide an ESC channel between the local and remote NEs, configure an intra-board client-side OTU1 cross-connection. In other cases, either a WDM-side or a client-side intra-board crossconnection is required to provide an ESC channel.

Application Diagram Figure 6-5 shows two scenarios in which the TN11TOM board works in cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode. Configure the TN11TOM board according to the network plan. l

Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN11TOM board receives a maximum of six services on the client side and the other two client-side ports work as WDM-side ports, which selectively receive services.

l

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: The TN11TOM board receives a maximum of seven services on the client side and the other client-side port works as a WDM-side port, which also receives services.

Figure 6-5 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 2: ODU1 tributaryline mode (cascading)) Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


397



1xOTU1

1xOTU1

TOM 1 FE, GE, FDDI, STM1, OC-3, STM-4, OC12, STM-16, OC48,ESCON, FC100, FICON, FC200, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI, OTU1 6

TOM 1

MUX/ DMUX

6×Any

MUX/ DMUX

1×ODU1

MUX/ DMUX

1×OTU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

6×Any

MUX/ DMUX

6

FE, GE, FDDI, STM1, OC-3, STM-4, OC12, STM-16, OC48,ESCON, FC100, FICON, FC200, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI, OTU1

Any

Any

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: 1xOTU1

1xOTU1

TOM

TOM

1

1


7×Any

MUX/ DMUX

1×OTU1

MUX/ DMUX

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

7×Any


7

7

Any

Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot

Cross-Connection Diagram Create an OTU1 cross-connection between the internal 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and WDMside ports on the TN11TOM board, which is marked (2) in Figure 6-6. Figure 6-6 Cross-connection diagram for the TN11TOM board (scenario 2: ODU1 tributaryline mode (cascading)) Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: Client side

WDM side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1

1



51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

9(TX7/RX7)-1

3

10(TX8/RX8)-1 2 TOM



The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: Client side

WDM side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1

1



51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 3


2

10(TX8/RX8)-1

TOM



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


398



NOTE

l Only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. l A cross-connection can be configured between any client-side port and any ClientLP port.

Configuration Process The configuration process for providing a client-side ESC channel differs from that for providing a WDM-side ESC channel. Table 6-3 lists the configuration process. Table 6-3 Configuration process No.

Task

To Provide a ClientSide ESC Channel

To Provide a WDMSide ESC Channel

1

Set the state of the TOM board.

Yes

Yes

2

Configure the working mode for the TOM board.

Yes

Yes

3

Set the port type.

No

Yes

4

Set the service mode.

Yes

No

5

Configure the service type.

Yes

No

6

Configure an intra-board cross-connection.

Yes

Yes

7


Yes

Yes

Remarks: l Yes: This task is required. l No: This task is not required.

Procedure Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TN11TOM board. Set Board Mode to Cascading mode. 1.


2.


3.

Double-click the Board Mode field and set it to Cascading mode.

4.

Click Apply.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


399


5.



Step 2 Optional: Set the port type. NOTE

This operation is required to provide a WDM-side ESC channel.

Set an RX/TX port as a WDM-side port according to the network plan. It is recommended to set the type for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. For the application of "dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side", set the type for the port planned to carry the working channel. 1.

Right-click the board in the Slot Layout pane and choose Path View from the shortcut menu.

2.

Right-click the port and choose Delete Port.

3.

Right-click the blank area and choose Add Port. The Add Port dialog box is displayed.

4.

Set Type according to the network plan. Click OK to apply the configuration.

Step 3 Optional: Configure a service mode for client-side ports on the TN11TOM board. It is recommended to set a service mode for the client-side port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. NOTE

This operation is required to provide a client-side ESC channel.

Because the service type is OTU1, Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode for the ports. 1.


2.


3.

Select a client-side port. Double-click the Service Mode field and set it to OTN Mode as shown in the following figure.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


400



Step 4 Optional: Set the service type to OTU-1 for the ClientLP ports. It is recommended to set a service type for the ClientLP port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. NOTE


1.


2.

Select a ClientLP port. Double-click the Service Type field and set it to OTU-1 as shown in the following figure.

Step 5 Configure an intra-board cross-connection. 1.


2.


3.

Set Service Level to OTU1, and set other parameters as required. l To configure a client-side cross-connection, configure a cross-connection between a client-side port and a ClientLP port. Ensure that the client-side and ClientLP ports are identical to those configured in steps 4 and 5. The following figure shows an example of configuring such a cross-connection.

l To configure a WDM-side cross-connection, configure the cross-connection between an ODU1LP port and the WDM-side port that is specified in step 3. The following figure shows an example of configuring such a cross-connection. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


401


4.



----End

6.5.4 Scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (non-cascading) The application scenario in which the TN11TOM board works in non-cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode is defined as scenario 3: non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode. When the TN11TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode, intra-board client-side OTU1 cross-connections must be configured so an ESC channel is available between the NE equipped with the TN11TOM board and its connected NEs.

Application Diagram Figure 6-7 shows the position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system where the TN11TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode. Figure 6-7 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (non-cascading)) 4xODU1

1xOTU2

1xOTU2

4xODU1

TOM

TOM 1

1

1

1 MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

4

8

Any

NS2

8×Any

NS2

4×ODU1

4×ODU1

8×Any

FC100, FICON, FE, GE, STM-1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-12, STM-16, OC-48 , FC200, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI, SDI, HD-SDI, OTU1

4

ODU1

8

ODU1

FC100, FICON, FE, GE, STM-1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-12, STM-16, OC-48 , FC200, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI, SDI, HD-SDI, OTU1

Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


402



Cross-Connection Diagram Create a cross-connection between the internal client-side and ClientLP ports on the TN11TOM board, which is marked (1) in Figure 6-8. Figure 6-8 Cross-connection diagram for the TN11TOM board (scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (non-cascading))

Other board

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

1



201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-3 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-4 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2


WDM side

WDM side

2

TOM



NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TN11TOM board. Set Board Mode to Non-cascading mode. 1.


2.


3.

In the Board Mode pane, double-click the Board Mode field and set it to Non-cascading mode.

4.

Click Apply.

5.


Step 2 Configure a service mode for the client-side ports on the TN11TOM board. It is recommended to set a service mode for the client-side port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. Because the service type is OTU1, Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode for the ports. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


403



1.


2.


Step 3 Set the service type to OTU-1 for the ClientLP ports. It is recommended to set a service type for the ClientLP port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. 1.


2.


Step 4 Configure an intra-board client-side cross-connection. Configure an intra-board bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between a client-side and a ClientLP port. Ensure that the client-side and ClientLP ports are identical to those configured in steps 3 and 4. 1.


2.


3.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


404


4.


Click OK. The created cross-connection is displayed.

----End

6.5.5 Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading) The application scenario in which the TN11TOM board works in non-cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode is defined as scenario 4: non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode. When the TN11TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode, an intra-board WDM-side OTU1 cross-connection must be configured to provide an ESC channel.

Application Diagram Figure 6-9 shows the position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system where the TN11TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode. Figure 6-9 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 4: ODU1 tributaryline mode (non-cascading)) 4xOTU1

4xOTU1 TOM

TOM 1

1

1

4×Any

4

MUX/ DMUX

4×ODU1

MUX/ DMUX

1

4×OTU1

4

4×OTU1

4×ODU1

4×Any

FC100, FICON, FE, GE, STM-1, OC-3 , STM-4, OC-12, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI, FC200, FICON Express, SDI, HD-SDI, STM16, OC-48

4

Any

4

FC100, FICON, FE, GE, STM-1, OC-3 , STM-4, OC-12, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI, FC200, FICON Express, SDI, HD-SDI, STM16, OC-48

Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


405



Cross-Connection Diagram Create an OTU1 cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP and WDM-side ports on the TN11TOM board, which is marked (2) in Figure 6-10. Figure 6-10 Cross-connection diagram for the TN11TOM board (scenario 4: ODU1 tributaryline mode (non-cascading)) WDM side

Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1

1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)

7(TX5/RX5)-1

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 3


52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)

2

8(TX6/RX6)-1

5(TX3/RX3)-1


53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)

9(TX7/RX7)-1

6(TX4/RX4)-1


54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)

10(TX8/RX8)-1


TOM




NOTE

l All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. l A cross-connection can be configured between any ODU1LP port and any WDM-side port.



2.


3.


4.

Click Apply.

5.


Step 2 Set the port type. Set an RX/TX port as a WDM-side port according to the network plan. It is recommended to set the type for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. 1.

Right-click the board in the Slot Layout pane, and choose Path View from the shortcut menu.

2.


3.


4.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


406



Step 3 Configure an intra-board WDM-side cross-connection. Configure a cross-connection between an ODU1LP port and the WDM-side port that is specified in step 3. 1.


2.


3.

Set Service Level to OTU1, and set other parameters as required. The following figure shows an example of configuring such a cross-connection.

4.


----End

6.5.6 Scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical regeneration board) When the TN11TOM board works as an electrical regeneration board with its ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode, it can receive OTU1 signals on the client side and transmit OTU1 signals on the WDM side. To provide an ESC channel between the local and remote NEs, configure an intra-board client-side OTU1 cross-connection. In other cases, either a WDM-side or a client-side intra-board cross-connection is required to provide an ESC channel.

Application Diagram Figure 6-11 shows the position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system where the TN11TOM board works as an electrical regeneration board in ODU1 tributary-line mode. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


407



Figure 6-11 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 5: ODU1 tributaryline mode (electrical regeneration board))

4xOTU1

4xOTU1 TOM

4×OTU1

4×ODU1

4×OTU1

DMUX

4xOTU1

MUX

4xOTU1 TOM

4×OTU1

4×ODU1

4×OTU1

MUX

DMUX

Cross-Connection Diagram l

Create a cross-connection between the internal client-side and ClientLP ports on the TN11TOM board, which is marked (1) in Figure 6-12.

l

Create an OTU1 cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP and WDM-side ports on the TN11TOM board, which is marked (2) in Figure 6-12.

Figure 6-12 Cross-connection diagram for the TN11TOM board (scenario 5: ODU1 tributaryline mode (electrical regeneration board)) WDM side

Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1

1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)

7(TX5/RX5)-1

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 3

52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)

2

8(TX6/RX6)-1

5(TX3/RX3)-1


53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)

9(TX7/RX7)-1

6(TX4/RX4)-1


54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)

10(TX8/RX8)-1

TOM





Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


408



NOTE

l All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. l A cross-connection can be configured between any client-side port and any ClientLP port. l A cross-connection can be configured between any ODU1LP port and any WDM-side port.


Task



1


Yes

Yes

2


Yes

Yes

3

Set the port type.

No

Yes

4


Yes

No

5


Yes

No

6


Yes

Yes

7


Yes

Yes




2.


3.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


409



4.

Click Apply.

5.




Set an RX/TX port as a WDM-side port according to the network plan. It is recommended to set the type for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. 1.


2.


3.


4.


Step 3 Optional: Configure a service mode for the client-side ports on the TN11TOM board. It is recommended to set a service mode for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. NOTE


Because the service type is OTU1, Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode for the ports. 1.


2.


3.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


410



Step 4 Optional: Set the service type to OTU-1 for the ClientLP ports. It is recommended to set a service type for the ClientLP port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. NOTE


1.


2.




2.


3.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


411



l To configure a WDM-side cross-connection, configure the cross-connection between an ODU1LP port and the WDM-side port that is specified in step 3. The following figure shows an example of configuring such a cross-connection..

4.


----End

6.6 Configuring the TN52TOM Board On-site If there is no OSC channel on an NE and the TN52TOM board is required to provide an ESC channel, this operation must be performed. The U2000 can remotely manage the NE and its connected NEs after the TN52TOM board is configured.

6.6.1 Working Mode and Signal Flow Set the working mode for the TN52TOM board according to the network plan and configuration scenarios. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


412



Table 6-5 lists the available working modes of the TN52TOM board and the service mapping path for each scenario. Table 6-5 Mapping between the working modes and the service mapping paths Board Workin g Mode

Scenar io No.

Port Working Mode

Mapping Path


Cascadin g

Scenari o1

ODU0 mode

Any->ODU0[>ODU1]

In this mode, the TN52TOM board cannot receive OTU1 signals, and an ESC channel cannot be provided. No configuration is required in this mode.

Scenari o2

ODU0 TributaryLine mode

Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1

6.6.2 Scenario 2: ODU0 tributaryline mode (cascading)

Scenari o3

ODU1 mode

Any->ODU1


Scenari o4

ODU1 TributaryLine mode

OTU1/Any->ODU1>OTU1

6.6.3 Scenario 4: ODU1 tributaryline mode (cascading)

Scenari o5

ODU0 mode

Any->ODU0[>ODU1]


Scenari o6

ODU0 TributaryLine Mode

Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1

6.6.4 Scenario 6: ODU0 tributaryline mode (noncascading)

Scenari o7

ODU1 mode

OTU1/Any->ODU1

6.6.5 Scenario 7: ODU1 mode (noncascading)

Noncascadin g

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


413


Board Workin g Mode


Scenar io No.

Port Working Mode

Mapping Path


Scenari o8

ODU1_ANY_ODU0 _ODU1 reencapsulation mode

OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0>ODU1

6.6.6 Scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU 0_ODU1 reencapsulation mode (non-cascading)

Scenari o9

ODU1_ANY_ODU0 _ODU1 reencapsulation tributary-line mode

OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1

6.6.7 Scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU 0_ODU1 reencapsulation tributary-line mode (non-cascading)

Scenari o 10

ODU1 tributary-line mode

OTU1/Any->ODU1>OTU1

6.6.8 Scenario 10: ODU1 tributaryline mode (noncascading)

Scenari o 11

ODU1_ODU0 mode

OTU1->ODU1>ODU0

6.6.9 Scenario 11: ODU1_ODU0 mode (non-cascading)

Scenari o 12

ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode

OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0

6.6.10 Scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU 0 re-encapsulation mode (noncascading)

NOTE

[->ODU1]: indicates that "ODU1" is optional. For example, in non-cascading ODU0 tributary mode, there are two service signal mapping paths: Any->ODU0 and Any->ODU0->ODU1.

6.6.2 Scenario 2: ODU0 tributary-line mode (cascading) The application scenario in which the TN52TOM board works in cascading mode with its ports working in ODU0 tributary-line mode is defined as scenario 2: cascading ODU0 tributary-line mode.When the TN52TOM board works in cascading ODU0 tributary-line mode, an intra-board WDM-side OTU1 cross-connection must be configured to provide an ESC channel.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board receives a maximum of six services on the client side and the other two client-side ports work as WDM-side ports, which selectively receive services. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

414


l



Figure 6-13 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 2: Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1) Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: 1xOTU1

1xOTU1 TOM

TOM

1

FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI

6×Any

6

2×ODU0

MUX/ DMUX

1×OTU1

MUX/ DMUX

1

1×ODU1

MUX/ DMUX

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

2×ODU0

6×Any


MUX/ DMUX

6

Any

Any


1xOTU1

TOM

TOM

1

1


7×Any

2×ODU0

MUX/ DMUX

1×OTU1

MUX/ DMUX

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

2×ODU0

7×Any


7

7

Any

Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot

Cross-Connection Diagram Create an OTU1 cross-connection between the internal 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and WDMside ports on the TN52TOM board, which is marked (2) in Figure 6-14. Figure 6-14 Cross-connection diagram for the TN52TOM board (scenario 2: Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1) Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


415

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Installing, Operating and Maintaining Your Network(For Field Engineer) Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1

1


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-5 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-6 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-7 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8


161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-1

51(ODU1LP1/ ODU1LP1)-1

9(TX7/RX7)-1

WDM side

10(TX8/RX8)-1 3

3

2


TOM


Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS


3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1

1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-5 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-6 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-7 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8




WDM side 10(TX8/RX8)-1 2

3

3 161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-2


TOM Cross-connect module


NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TN52TOM board. Set Board Working Mode to Cascading and Port Working Mode to ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the TN52TOM board and choose Configuration > Working Mode in the navigation tree.

2.

In the Board Working Mode pane, double-click the Board Working Mode field and set it to Cascading.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

In the Port Working Mode pane, set Port Working Mode for the 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) port. Double-click the Port Working Mode field and choose ODU0 tributaryline mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


416



5.

Click Apply.

6.


Step 2 Set the port type. Set an RX/TX port as a WDM-side port according to the network plan. It is recommended to set the type for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. For the application of "dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side", set the type for the port planned to carry the working channel. 1.


2.


3.


4.


Step 3 Configure an intra-board WDM-side cross-connection. Configure a bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between an ODU1LP port and a WDM-side port. Ensure that the WDM-side port the one for which the port type is changed in step 3. 1.


2.


3.

Set Service Level to OTU1, and set other parameters as required.

4.


----End

6.6.3 Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading) The application scenario in which the TN52TOM board works in cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode is defined as scenario 4: cascading ODU1 tributary-line Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


417



mode. When the TN52TOM board works in cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode, an intra-board WDM-side OTU1 cross-connection must be configured to provide an ESC channel.


Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board receives a maximum of six services on the client side and the other two client-side ports work as WDM-side ports, which selectively receive services.

l


Figure 6-15 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (scenario 4: OTU1/Any->ODU1>OTU1) Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: 1xOTU1

1xOTU1 TOM

TOM 1

1

MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

6×Any

MUX/ DMUX

1×OTU1

6

MUX/ DMUX

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

6×Any

FE, GE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC48, FC100, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI

6

Any


Any


1xOTU1

TOM

TOM

1

1

7×Any

MUX/ DMUX

1×OTU1

MUX/ DMUX

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

7×Any


7

7

Any


Any


Cross-Connection Diagram Create an OTU1 cross-connection between the internal 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and WDMside ports on the TN52TOM board, which is marked (2) in Figure 6-16. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


418



Figure 6-16 Cross-connection diagram for the TN52TOM board (scenario 4: OTU1/Any>ODU1->OTU1) Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: Client side

WDM side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1

1



51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

9(TX7/RX7)-1

3

10(TX8/RX8)-1 2 TOM





WDM side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1

1



51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 3


2

10(TX8/RX8)-1

TOM



NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TN52TOM board. Set Board Working Mode to Cascading, and Port Working Mode to ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1). 1.


2.

In the Board Working Mode pane, double-click the Board Working Mode field and set it to Cascading.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

In the Port Working Mode pane, set Port Working Mode for the 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) port. Double-click the Port Working Mode field and set it to ODU1 tributaryline mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1).

5.

Click Apply.

6.


Step 2 Set the port type. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


419



Set an RX/TX port as a WDM-side port according to the network plan. It is recommended to select the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. For the application of "dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side", set the type for the port planned to carry the working channel. 1.


2.


3.


4.


Step 3 Configure an intra-board WDM-side cross-connection. Configure a bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between an ODU1LP port and a WDM-side port. Ensure that the WDM-side port is the one for which the port type is changed in step 3. 1.


2.

In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration pane, click New. The Create CrossConnection Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters.

3.


----End

6.6.4 Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (non-cascading) The application scenario in which the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading mode with its ports working in ODU0 tributary-line mode is defined as scenario 6: non-cascading ODU0 tributary-line mode. When the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU0 tributary-line mode, an intra-board WDM-side OTU1 cross-connection must be configured to provide an ESC channel. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


420



Application Diagram Figure 6-17 shows two scenarios in which the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU0 tributary-line mode. Configure the TN52TOM board according to the network plan. l

Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board receives a maximum of four services on the client side and the other two client-side ports work as WDM-side ports, which selectively receive services.

l

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board receives a maximum of six services on the client side and the other client-side port works as a WDMside port, which also receives services.

Figure 6-17 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 6: Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1) Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: 2xOTU1

2xOTU1

TOM

TOM 1


4×Any

4

4×ODU0

MUX/ DMUX

2×OTU1

MUX/ DMUX

1

2×ODU1

MUX/ DMUX

2×OTU1

2×ODU1

4×ODU0

4×Any


MUX/ DMUX

4

Any

Any


2xOTU1

TOM

TOM

1

1


6×Any

4×ODU0

MUX/ DMUX

2×OTU1

MUX/ DMUX

2×ODU1

2×OTU1

4×ODU0

2×ODU1

6×Any


6

6

Any

Any


Cross-Connection Diagram Create an OTU1 cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP and WDM-side ports on the TN52TOM board, which is marked (2) in Figure 6-18. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


421



Figure 6-18 Cross-connection diagram for the TN52TOM board (scenario 6: Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1) Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1

1



3


3

51(ODU1LP1/ ODU1LP1)-1 2


WDM side



TOM





The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS



1



3


3

10(TX8/RX8)-1




9(TX7/RX7)-1 2

161(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-1

WDM side


TOM



NOTE

l All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. l A cross-connection can be configured between any ODU1LP port and any WDM-side port.

Procedure Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TN52TOM board. Set Board Working Mode to Non-Cascading, and Port Working Mode to ODU0 tributaryline mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). 1.


2.

In the Board Working Mode pane, double-click the Board Working Mode field and set it to Non-Cascading.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

In the Port Working Mode pane, double-click the Port Working Mode field and set the 205 (or 207) port to None (not for ports) first. Then set the 201 (or 203) port to ODU0 tributary-line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). It is recommended to set a working mode for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


422



5.

Click Apply.

6.


Step 2 Set the port type. Set an RX/TX port as a WDM-side port according to the network plan. It is recommended to set the type for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. For the application of "dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side", set the type for the port planned to carry the working channel. 1.


2.

Right-click the port and choose Modify Port from the shortcut menu. The Modify Port dialog box is displayed. Set Type according to the network plan.

3.

Click OK to apply the configuration.

Step 3 Configure an intra-board WDM-side cross-connection. Select an internal port from (3) in Figure 6-18. The internal port that is identical to the service port specified in the network plan is recommended. Then configure an intra-board crossconnection between the internal port and a WDM-side port. Ensure that the WDM-side port is the one for which the port type is changed in step 3. 1.


2.


3.

Set Service Level and Service Type, and set other parameters as required.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


423


4.



----End

6.6.5 Scenario 7: ODU1 mode (non-cascading) The application scenario in which the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1) is defined as scenario 7: application 1 of non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode. When the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode, an intra-board OTU1 client-side cross-connection must be configured so an ESC channel is available between the NE equipped with the TN52TOM board and its connected NEs.

Application Diagram Figure 6-19 shows the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system where the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode. Figure 6-19 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 7: OTU1->ODU1) 4xODU1

4xODU1

1xOTU2

1xOTU2

TOM 1

1

1 MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

NS2

4

ODU1

4×OTU1

NS2

4×ODU1

4×OTU1 4

4×ODU1

OTU1

TOM 1

OTU1

4

4

ODU1

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


424



NOTE

In this working mode, configurations for the TN52TOM board to receive Any services differ from those for the board to receive OTU1 services. If the TN52TOM board is configured to receive Any services, it cannot carry an ESC channel. In this case, no configuration is required.

Cross-Connection Diagram Create an OTU1 cross-connection between the internal client-side and ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board, which is marked (1) in Figure 6-20. Figure 6-20 Cross-connection diagram for the TN52TOM board (scenario 7: OTU1->ODU1)

Other board

Client side


1





WDM side

WDM side

2

TOM



NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TN52TOM board. Set Board Working Mode to Non-Cascading and Port Working Mode to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1). 1.


2.


3.

Click Apply.

4.

In the Port Working Mode pane, set Port Working Mode for a ClientLP port. The port that is carrying the channel specified in the network plan is recommended. Double-click the Port Working Mode field and set it to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1).

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


425



5.

Click Apply.

6.


Step 2 Configure the working mode for the client-side ports on the TN52TOM board as OTN Mode. Because the service type is OTU1, set Service Mode to OTN Mode for the port. It is recommended to select the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. 1.


2.

Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list.

3.

Click the Basic Attributes tab and select a client-side port. Double-click the Service Mode field and choose OTN Mode.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 3 Set the service type to OTU-1 for the ClientLP ports. It is recommended to select the ClientLP port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. 1.

Click the Basic Attributes tab and select a ClientLP port.

2.

Double-click the Service Type field and set it to OTU-1.

3.

Click Apply.

Step 4 Configure an intra-board client-side cross-connection. Configure an intra-board bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between a client-side port and a ClientLP port. Ensure that the client-side and ClientLP ports are identical to those configured in steps 3 and 4. 1.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical CrossConnection Service Management in the navigation tree. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

426



2.


3.


4.


----End

6.6.6 Scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (non-cascading) The application scenario in which the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1) is defined as scenario 8: application 4 of non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode. When the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode, an intra-board OTU1 client-side crossconnection must be configured so an ESC channel is available between the NE equipped with the TN52TOM board and its connected NEs.

Application Diagram Figure 6-21 shows the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system where the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


427



Figure 6-21 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1) 4xODU1 1xOTU2

1xOTU2 4xODU1 TOM

TOM

1

1

4

OTU1

4

ODU1

ODU1

4×OTU1

4

32×Any

N S 2

4×ODU1

Any

4

1

64×Any

4

4

M U X / D M U X

4×ODU1

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU0

4×ODU1

64×Any 8×Any

8×ODU0 8×Any

32×Any

4×OTU1

4×ODU1

OTU1

1

8×Any

1

8×Any

1

Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Cross-Connection Diagram Create a cross-connection between the internal client-side and ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board, which is marked (1) in Figure 6-22. Figure 6-22 Cross-connection diagram for the TN52TOM board (scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1)

Other board

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1

1

201(ClientLP1 /ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3 /ClientLP3)-1

6(TX4/RX4)-1

205(ClientLP5 /ClientLP5)-1

7(TX5/RX5)-1

207(ClientLP7 /ClientLP7)-1

8(TX6/RX6)-1



237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1


2

3

2 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8

WDM side 4

237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1







9(TX7/RX7)-1


WDM side




244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)1

10(TX8/RX8)-1

TOM










Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


428



NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TN52TOM board. Set Board Working Mode to Non-Cascading, and Port Working Mode to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1). 1.


2.


3.

Click Apply.

4.

In the Port Working Mode pane, set Port Working Mode for a ClientLP port. The port that is carrying the channel specified in the network plan is recommended. Double-click the Port Working Mode field and choose ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1).

5.

Click Apply.

6.


Step 2 Configure the service mode for the client-side ports on the TN52TOM board as OTN Mode. Because the service type is OTU1, Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode for the ports. It is recommended to select the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. 1.


2.


3.

Click the Basic Attributes tab and select a client-side port.

4.

Double-click the Service Mode field and set it to OTN Mode.

5.

Click Apply.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


429





2.


3.

Click Apply.

Step 4 Configure intra-board client-side cross-connections. Configure an intra-board bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between a client-side port and a ClientLP port. Ensure that the client-side and ClientLP ports are identical to those configured in steps 3 and 4. 1.


2.


3.


4.


----End

6.6.7 Scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (non-cascading) The application scenario in which the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) is defined as scenario 9: application 1 of non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode. When the Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


430



TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode, it can receive OTU1 services on the client side and also transmit OTU1 services on the WDM side. To provide an ESC channel between the local and remote NEs, configure an intra-board client-side OTU1 cross-connection. In other cases, either a WDM-side or a client-side intra-board crossconnection is required to provide an ESC channel.

Application Diagram Figure 6-23 shows the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system where the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1). Figure 6-23 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 9: OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) 2xOTU1

TOM

MUX/ DMUX

1

2×OTU1

16×Any

2×ODU1

MUX/ DMUX

32×Any 4×ODU0

MUX/ DMUX

1

2×OTU1

2

TOM

MUX/ DMUX

2×ODU1

2×OTU1

2×ODU1

4×ODU0 32×Any

16×Any

2×OTU1

2×ODU1

OTU1

2xOTU1

OTU1 2


Create a cross-connection between the internal client-side and ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board, which is marked (1) in Figure 6-24.

l

Create an OTU1 cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP and WDM-side ports on the TN52TOM board, which is marked (4) in Figure 6-24.

Figure 6-24 Cross-connection diagram for the TN52TOM board (scenario 9: OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) Client side

WDM side


1



233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 2

3 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8



237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8





2


8(TX6/RX6)-1


7(TX5/RX5)-1


9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1


TOM








Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


431



NOTE

l All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. l A cross-connection can be configured between any client-side port and any ClientLP port. l A cross-connection can be configured between any ODU1LP port and any WDM-side port.


Task



1


Yes

Yes

2


Yes

Yes

3

Set the port type.

No

Yes

4


Yes

No

5


Yes

No

6


Yes

Yes

7


Yes

Yes


Procedure Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TN52TOM board. Set Board Working Mode to Non-Cascading, and Port Working Mode to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). 1.


2.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


432



3.

Click Apply.

4.

In the Port Working Mode pane, double-click the Port Working Mode field and set the 205 (or 207) port to None (not for ports) first. Then set the 201 (or 203) port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). It is recommended to set a working mode for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan.

5.

Click Apply.

6.




Set an RX/TX port as a WDM-side port according to the network plan. It is recommended to set a service type for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. 1.


2.

Right-click the port and choose Modify Port from the shortcut menu. The Modify Port dialog box is displayed.

3.

Set Type according to the network plan.

4.


Step 3 Optional: Configure a service mode for the client-side ports on the TN52TOM board. It is recommended to set a service type for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. NOTE


Because the service type is OTU1, Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode for the ports. 1. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Click the Basic Attributes tab in the WDM Interface pane. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

433



2.


3.

Click Apply.

Step 4 Optional: Set the service type to OTU-1 for the ClientLP ports. It is recommended to select the ClientLP port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. NOTE


1.

Click the Basic Attributes tab in the WDM Interface pane. Select a port, double-click the Service Type field, and set it to OTU-1 as shown in the following figure..

2.

Click Apply.



2.


3.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


434



l To configure a WDM-side cross-connection, configure a cross-connection between an ODU1LP port and the WDM-side port that is specified in step 3. The following figure shows an example of configuring such a cross-connection.

4.


----End

6.6.8 Scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading) The application scenario in which the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) is defined as scenario 10: application 2 of non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode. When the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode, it can receive OTU1 services on the client side and also transmit OTU1 services on the WDM side. To provide an ESC channel between the local and remote NEs, configure an intra-board client-side OTU1 cross-connection. In other cases, either a WDM-side or a client-side intra-board cross-connection is required to provide an ESC channel.

Application Diagram Figure 6-25 and Figure 6-26 show the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system where the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1->OTU1). Configure the TN52TOM board according to the network plan. l

Figure 6-25 shows a scenario in which OTU1 signals are electrically regenerated.

l

Figure 6-26 shows a scenario in which the TN52TOM board works in tributary-line mode and receives Any signals.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


435



– Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board receives a maximum of four services on the client side, and the other four client-side ports work as WDM-side ports, two of which selectively receive services. – Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board receives a maximum of six services on the client side, and the other two client-side ports work as WDM-side ports, which also receive services. Figure 6-25 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 10: OTU1->ODU1>OTU1) 4xOTU1

4xOTU1 TOM

4×OTU1 4×ODU1 4×OTU1

D M U 4 X

M 4 U X

TOM

4

4×OTU1 4×ODU1 4×OTU1

M U X

D M 4 U X

Figure 6-26 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 10: Any->ODU1>OTU1) Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: 2xOTU1

2xOTU1

TOM

TOM

MUX/ DMUX

2×OTU1

4×Any

MUX/ DMUX

1

4

2×ODU1

MUX/ DMUX

2×OTU1

MUX/ DMUX

4×Any

1

2×ODU1

FE, GE, FC100, FICON, STM-4, OC-12, DVBASI, ESCON, FDDI, SDI, STM-1, OC-3 , FC200, FICON Express, HDSDI, STM-16, OC-48

4

Any


Any


2xOTU1

TOM

TOM 1

1

6

6

Any

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

6×Any

MUX/ DMUX

2×OTU1

MUX/ DMUX

2×ODU1

2×OTU1

2×ODU1

6×Any




Any

436





Create a cross-connection between the internal client-side and ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board, which is marked (1) in Figure 6-27 and Figure 6-28.

l

Create an OTU1 cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP and WDM-side ports on the TN52TOM board, which is marked (3) in Figure 6-27 and Figure 6-28.

Figure 6-27 Cross-connection diagram for the TN52TOM board (scenario 10: OTU1->ODU1>OTU1) Client side

WDM side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 TOM

1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1


2



3




Figure 6-28 Cross-connection diagram for the TN52TOM board (scenario 10: Any->ODU1>OTU1) Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: Client side

WDM side


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 1

2

203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1



51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1


3

TOM




WDM side


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 1


2

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1

9(TX7/RX7)-1 3 10(TX8/RX8)-1 TOM





Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


437



NOTE

l All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. l A cross-connection can be configured between any client-side port and any ClientLP port.


Task



1


Yes

Yes

2


Yes

Yes

3

Set the port type.

No

Yes

4


Yes

No

5


Yes

No

6


Yes

Yes

7


Yes

Yes


Procedure Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TN52TOM board. Set Board Working Mode to Non-Cascading, and Port Working Mode to ODU1 tributaryline mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1). 1.


2.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


438



3.

Click Apply.

4.

In the Port Working Mode pane, double-click the Port Working Mode field and set Port Working Mode for each Optical Port. l For the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7) ports, set Port Working Mode to ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1).

5.

Click Apply.

6.



This operation is required to provide an ESC channel.

Set the port as a WDM-side port according to the network plan. It is recommended to select the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. 1.


2.

Right-click the port and choose Modify Port from the shortcut menu. The Modify Port dialog box is displayed. Set Type to Line Side Colorless Optical Port.

3.


Step 3 Optional: Configure a service mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board. NOTE


Because the service type is OTU1, Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode for the ports. It is recommended to select the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. 1.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Click the Basic Attributes tab in the WDM Interface pane. Select a client-side port, double-click the Service Mode field and set it to OTN Mode.


439


2.


Click Apply.

Step 4 Optional: Set the service type to OTU-1 for the ClientLP ports. It is recommended to select the ClientLP port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. NOTE


1.


2.

Select a ClientLP port, double-click the Service Type field, and set it to OTU-1.

3.

Click Apply.

Step 5 Configure an intra-board cross-connection. Configure bidirectional OTU1 cross-connections between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-54 (ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4) optical ports and 7(RX5/TX5)-10(RX8/TX8) optical ports based on Figure 6-27 and Figure 6-28. 1.


2.


3.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


440



l To configure a WDM-side cross-connection, configure the cross-connection between an ODU1LP port and the WDM-side port that is specified in step 3. The following figure shows an example of configuring such a cross-connection.

4.


----End

6.6.9 Scenario 11: ODU1_ODU0 mode (non-cascading) The application scenario in which the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) is defined as scenario 11: application 2 of non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode. When the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode, an intra-board OTU1 client-side cross-connection must be configured so an ESC channel is available between the NE equipped with the TN52TOM board and its connected NEs.

Application Diagram Figure 6-29 shows the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system where the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


441



Figure 6-29 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 11: OTU1->ODU1>ODU0) 1xOTU2 8xODU0

8xODU0 1xOTU2

TOM

TOM 1

8

1

1

N S 2 8

4×OTU1

8

4

1

4×ODU1

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU0

4×ODU1

8×ODU0 8×Any

4×OTU1

OTU1

1

M U X / D M U X

8×Any

1

8

OTU1

4

Cross-Connection Diagram Create a cross-connection between the internal client-side and ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board, which is marked (1) in Figure 6-30. Figure 6-30 Cross-connection diagram for the TN52TOM board (scenario 11: OTU1->ODU1>ODU0) 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2

Other board Cross-connect module

Client side


TOM

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 1

3

205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1


161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2


WDM side

WDM side

2



NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TN52TOM board. Set Board Working Mode to Non-Cascading, and Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0). Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


442



1.


2.


3.

Click Apply.

4.

In the Port Working Mode pane, set Port Working Mode for a ClientLP port. It is recommended to select the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. Double-click the Port Working Mode field and set it to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).

5.

Click Apply.

6.


Step 2 Configure the working mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board as OTN. Because the service type is OTU1, Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode for the ports. It is recommended to select the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. 1.


2.


3.

Click the Basic Attributes tab and select a client-side port. Double-click the Service Mode field and set it to OTN Mode.

4.

Click Apply.



2.

Double-click the Service Type field and choose OTU-1.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


443


3.


Click Apply.



2.


3.


4.

Click OK. The newly created cross-connection is displayed in the user interface.

----End

6.6.10 Scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (non-cascading) The application scenario in which the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) is defined as scenario 12: application 3 of non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode. When the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode, an intra-board OTU1 client-side cross-connection must be configured so an ESC channel is available between the NE equipped with the TN52TOM board and its connected NEs.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


444



Application Diagram Figure 6-31 shows the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system where the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode. Figure 6-31 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 12: OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0) 1xOTU2 8xODU0

8xODU0 1xOTU2 TOM

TOM 1

8

4×OTU1

N S 2

32×Any

8

1

1

4×ODU1

8

4

1

64×Any

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU0

64×Any

8×ODU0 8×Any

4×ODU1

32×Any

4×OTU1

OTU1

M U X / D M U X

1

8×Any

1

8

OTU1

4

Cross-Connection Diagram Create a cross-connection between the internal client-side and ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board, as marked (1) in Figure 6-32. Figure 6-32 Cross-connection diagram for the TN52TOM board (scenario 12: OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0) 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2

Other board Cross-connect module

Client side


3(TX1/RX1)-1 1

3

2

4(TX2/RX2)-1


5(TX3/RX3)-1


233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8

6(TX4/RX4)-1


7(TX5/RX5)-1




4


8(TX6/RX6)-1


10(TX8/RX8)-1

TOM



9(TX7/RX7)-1

WDM side



WDM side







Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


445



NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TN52TOM board. Set Board Working Mode to Non-Cascading and Port Working Mode to ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0). 1.


2.


3.

Click Apply.

4.

In the Port Working Mode pane, set Port Working Mode for a ClientLP port. It is recommended to set a working mode for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. Double-click the Port Working Mode field and set it to ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0).

5.

Click Apply.

6.


Step 2 Configure the service mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board as OTN Mode. Because the service type is OTU1, Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode for the ports. It is recommended to select the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. 1.


2.


3.

Click the Basic Attributes tab and select a client-side port. Double-click the Service Mode field and choose OTN Mode.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 3 Set the service type to OTU-1 for the ClientLP ports. It is recommended to select the ClientLP port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


446



1.


2.


3.

Click Apply.



2.


3.


4.


----End

6.7 Configuring the OA Boards Set optical attenuation and nominal gain for optical amplifier boards, with assistance from the engineers in the network management center (NMC).

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


447



Setting Optical Attenuation 1.

Right-click the board and choose WDM Interface. The WDM Interface window is displayed.

2.

Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.

3.

On the Basic Attributes tab page, double-click the Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio field, and enter the data provided by the engineers in the NMC, and click Apply. NOTE

The adjustable range of the built-in attenuator for a board depends on the board type.

Setting Nominal Gain 1.

Right-click the board and choose WDM Interface. The WDM Interface window is displayed.

2.

In the WDM Interface window, click By Function and choose Nominal Gain from the drop-down list.

3.

Double-click the Nominal Gain field, enter the data provided by the engineers in the NMC, and click Apply.

6.8 Checking NE Communication Status Correct configuration of each NE is the basis for the entire network to operate properly. This section describes how to check whether the configuration of each NE is correct.

Context After the initial network configuration of an NE is completed, check the NE communication status to determine whether the configuration is correct. You can determine that the NE communication status is normal if information about the NMS or other NEs is displayed in the IP Route Management area.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. ----End

Follow-up Procedure If no information about the NMS or other NEs is displayed in the IP Route Management area, perform the following checks on NE: l

Check the fiber connections against the fiber connection diagram in the network design. Correct fiber connections if there are incorrect ones.

l

Test the transmit and receive optical power on the line. Handle the line fault if the line attenuation is abnormal.

l

Check the network cable connections against the network cable connection diagram in the network design. Correct network cable connections if there are incorrect ones.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


448


l


Test the transmit and receive optical power of the OSC board or the DAS1 board if OSC communication is used. Do as follows if the transmit or receive optical power is abnormal: – Check the fiber connections between the OSC and FIU boards. – Check the fiber connections between TM and RX ports, and the fiber connections between RM and TX ports for the DAS1 board. – If the OSC or DAS1 board receive optical power queried on the Web LCT is remarkably lower than the IN port input optical power measured using an optical power meter, clean the fiber connected to the IN port. If the fault persists, replace the board. If the OSC or DAS1 board receive optical power exceeds the permitted range, add fixed optical attenuators (FOAs) with reference to OSC commissioning requirements. If the OSC or DAS1 board transmit optical power exceeds the permitted range, replace the board.

l

Check the status of the DCC channels to be used if ESC communication is used. Choose Communication > DCC Management. In the displayed window, check the value of Communication State for the DCC channels to be used. If Receiving failed, Transmitting failed, or Receiving/transmitting failed is displayed for any channel, perform the following checks: – Check the WDM-side transmit and receive optical power of the OTU board. – Check whether electrical cross-connections have been correctly configured for boards requiring cross-connections to implement ESC communication. An example of such boards is the TOM board. – Check whether the configuration of the remote NE is completed.

6.9 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board By backing up an NE database to an SCC board, you can ensure that the NE automatically restores to the normal state in case a power failure occurs. When you back up an NE database to an SCC board, you actually back up the NE data to the flash memory of the SCC board. After a power-off reset occurs on the NE, the SCC board automatically reads the configuration data from the flash memory and applies the data to the boards on this NE.

Prerequisites You must have logged in to an NE. The NE must be configured properly.

Precautions NOTE

After backing up an NE database to an SCC board, you can restore the NE database from the SCC board by performing a warm or cold reset on the SCC board.

Procedure 1.

Select one or more NEs in the NE list. Click Back Up NE Database > Back Up to SCC. NOTE

The Web LCT takes a few minutes to back up the NE database. Do not perform any operation in the process of backup.

2. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

449


3.


Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

6.10 Exiting the Web LCT After performing initial NE commissioning using the Web LCT, log out of the commissioned NE, reconnect the network cables to the NE, and exit the Web LCT.

Procedure Step 1 Highlight the NE that you are logged in to, and click the NE Logout at the bottom of the screen. Step 2 Physically disconnect the Web LCT from the NE Step 3 Close the browser. Step 4 Double-click the stopweblct.bat file at "WebLCT\WebLCT\Tomcat" to stop the Web LCT application. ----End

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


450


7

7 Routine Operation On-site

Routine Operation On-site

About This Chapter 7.1 Getting to Know Indicators This section introduces the indicators of equipment. 7.2 Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter This section describes the basic method for testing optical power by using an optical power meter during the detection of faults and the commissioning. 7.3 Checking Fiber Jumpers by Using an Optical Power Meter This section describes the basic method for checking a fiber jumper by using an optical power meter during the detection of faults or the commissioning. 7.4 Inserting and Removing Fiber Jumpers This section describes the basic method for replacing a fiber jumper when the fiber jumper is damaged. 7.5 Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors Cleaning optical components is to remove dust or other dirt to avoid performance degradation of optical transmission systems. Inspecting and cleaning fiber connectors used in fiber optic connections are described here. 7.6 Performing Hardware Loopback Manually perform loopback to a physical port (optical port) with a fiber. 7.7 Reset a Board

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


451



7.1 Getting to Know Indicators This section introduces the indicators of equipment.

7.1.1 Cabinet Indicators There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and yellow. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table 7-1. Table 7-1 Meanings of cabinet indicators Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

power

Power indicator

On (green)

The cabinet is powered on.

Off

The cabinet is not powered on.

Critical alarm indicator

On (red)

There is a critical alarm.

Off

There is no critical alarm.

Major alarm indicator

On (Orange)

There is a major alarm.

Off

There is no major alarm.

Minor alarm indicator

On (Yellow)

There is a minor alarm.

Off

There is no minor alarm.

critical

major

minor

7.1.2 Subrack Indicator There are four subrack indicators for the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Indicators are in the following colors: red, yellow and green. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table 7-2. NOTE

The OptiX OSN 8800 subrack indicators are on the panel of the fan tray assembly.

Table 7-2 Meanings of subrack indicators

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

PWR

Power indicator

On (Green)

The subrack works normally.

Off

The subrack does not work.


452



Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

OptiX OSN 6800: CRI OptiX OSN 8800: CRIT


On (Red)


Off


MAJ


On (Red)


Off



On (Yellow)


Blinking slowly (Yellow)

The MIN indicator is in the maintenance blinking mode.

Off


MIN

7.1.3 Chassis Indicators There are four chassis indicators in the following colors: green, yellow, orange and red. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table 7-3. Table 7-3 Meanings of chassis indicators Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

PWR

Chassis power supply indicator

On (green)

The chassis is powered on.

Off

The chassis is not powered on.

On (yellow)


Off


On (orange)


Off


On (red)


Off


MIN


MAJ


CRI


7.1.4 Board Indicators On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running status of the board. The meanings of the board indicators are listed in Table 7-4, Table 7-5, and Table 7-6. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


453



Table 7-4 Meanings of board indicators Indicato r

Name

Status

Meaning

STAT

Board hardware indicator

On (green)

The board works normally.

Blinking slowly (green)a

The STAT indicator is in the maintenance blinking mode.

On (red)

A critical/major alarm occurs on the board.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs on the board.

Off

The board is not powered on.

On (red)

The memory check fails.

PROG

Board software indicator

Loading the board software fails. The FPGA file is lost. The board software is lost.

SRV

ACTb

Service alarm indicator

Service activation indicator

Blinking quickly (red)

On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: The BOOTROM check fails.

Blinking quickly (green)

On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Writing the flash memory is in progress.

Blinking slowly (green)

On for 300 ms and off for 300 ms: The BIOS booting is in progress.

On (green)

The board software or FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully.

On (green)

The service is normal with any service alarm.

On (red)

A critical or major service alarm occurs.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote service alarm occurs.

Off

No service is configured.

On (green)

The board is in the working mode. The board is in the active mode.

Off

The board is not in the working mode. The board is in the standby mode.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


454


Indicato r

LINK/ ACTn

LAS

Name

Data port connection/data transceive indicator

Laser emission status indicator


Status

Meaning


On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Backing up the system database in batches is in progress.

On (green)

The data port connection is normal.

Off

The data port connection is abnormal.

Blinking quickly (yellow)

On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Data ports are receiving and transmitting data.

On (green)

The Raman laser is in the working mode.

Off

The Raman laser is ont in the working mode.

NOTE a: When the STAT indicator on a board is in maintenance blinking mode, the board can be removed. Most of the boards support this function except the following boards: ACS, APIU, ATE, BMD4, BMD8, CMR1, CMR2, CMR4, CRPC, DCM, DCU, DMR1, DFIU, EFI, FAN, TN21FIU, TN13FIU, GFU, TN11ITL, TN11L4G, MB2, MR2, MR4, MR8, PIU, SBM2, SCS, SFIU, STI, TBE, TN11XCS. b: During the testing of the indicators on the TN51AUX board, the ACT indicator is lit orange.

Table 7-5 Meanings of the indicators on the PQ2 sub-board

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Indicato r

Name

Status

Meaning

STAT


On (green)

The PQ2 sub-board works normally.

On (red)

The PQ2 sub-board is abnormal.

On (yellow)

Logical sub-board is not configured.

Off

The PQ2 sub-board is not powered on.


455



Table 7-6 Meanings of the indicators on the SCC board Indicato r

Name

Status

Meaning

STAT


On (green)

The board is working normally.

Blinking slowly (green)a

The STAT indicator is in the maintenance blinking mode.

On (red)

A critical alarm occurs on the board.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs on the board.

Off

The board is not powered on.

On (red)

The memory check fails.

PROG

Board software indicator

Loading the board software fails. The FPGA file is lost. The NE software is lost.

SRV

ACT

Service alarm indicator

Service activation indicator

Blinking quickly (red)

On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: The BOOTROM check fails.


On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Writing the flash memory is in progress.

Blinking slowly (green)

On for 300 ms and off for 300 ms: The BIOS booting is in progress.

On (green)

The board software or FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully.

On (green)

The service is normal with any service alarm.

On (red)

A critical or major service alarm occurs.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs.

On (green)

The board is in the working mode. The board is in the active mode.

Off

The board is not in the working mode. The board is in the standby mode.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Backing up the system database in batches is in progress.

456



Indicato r

Name

Status

Meaning

PWRA

Indicator for system power supply

On (green)

-48 V power supply A is normal.

On (red)

-48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or failed).

Off

No power is input.

On (green)

-48 V power supply B is normal.

On (red)

-48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or failed).

Off

No power is input.

Indicator for protection power supply

On (green)

The +3.3 V protection power is normal.

On (red)

The +3.3 V protection power is lost.

Alarm cut-off indicator

On (yellow)

There is no audible or visual warning in case of an alarm.

Off

Audible warning is generated in case of an alarm.

PWRB

PWRC

ALMC

Indicator for system power supply

NOTE a: When the STAT indicator on a board is in maintenance blinking mode, the board can be removed. The boards that support this function include: TN11SCC, TN16SCC, TN51SCC, TN52SCC, and TNK2SCC.

7.1.5 Fan Indicator There is one indicator on the FAN, indicating the status of the FAN. The corresponding meanings of the Fan indicator are listed in Table 7-7. Table 7-7 Meanings of the FAN indicator

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: STAT OptiX OSN 8800: FAN

Fan indicator

On (green)

The fan is normal.

On (red)

A major alarm occurs or two or more fans are faulty.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs or one fan is faulty.

Off

The fan is not powered on, is absent, or the software is not loaded.


457



7.1.6 PIU Indicator There is one indicator on the PIU, indicating power access status. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table 7-8. Table 7-8 Meanings of the PIU indicator Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: RUN OptiX OSN 8800: PWR

Running status indicator

On (green)

Indicates that the power is accessed normally.

Off

Indicates that the power is not accessed.

7.2 Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter This section describes the basic method for testing optical power by using an optical power meter during the detection of faults and the commissioning.

Prerequisites Before the test, make sure that the laser is closed. After the fiber jumper is connected to the board, open the laser.

Impact on System The services on the tested board are interrupted.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Fiber jumper, optical power meter, optical fiber extractor

Precaution

DANGER Laser is dangerous. The light is not visible to the eyes with or without laser protective glasses. Do not look into optical connectors or ports. Failure to follow this warning can cause damage to the eyes, or even blindness.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


458



WARNING Wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap whenever you touch any equipment. Make sure that the wrist strap fully touches your skin. Insert the connector of the ESD strap into the ESD socket in the subrack.

CAUTION Keep the optical connector and end face clean. Cover the fiber immediately after the fiber is removed.

Procedure Step 1 Turn on the optical power meter, set the unit of the optical power to dBm, and set the operating wavelength of the meter to 1550 nm. Step 2 The test of optical power consists of the following two parts: l

Testing the receive optical power: In this test, remove the fiber jumper that is connected to the receive optical port and connect the fiber jumper to the optical power meter.

l

Testing the transmit optical power: In this test, remove the fiber jumper that is connected to the transmit optical port. Connect one end of a known-good fiber jumper to the transmit optical port and the other end to the optical power meter.

Step 3 Open the laser, after the optical power value displayed on the meter is stable, record the value. Step 4 Close the laser, connect the removed fiber jumper back to the optical port, and then open the laser. ----End

7.3 Checking Fiber Jumpers by Using an Optical Power Meter This section describes the basic method for checking a fiber jumper by using an optical power meter during the detection of faults or the commissioning.

Prerequisites The light source must exist and the transmit optical power must be stable. The checked fiber does not have services or services are interrupted.

Impact on System During the test, the services in the tested fiber are interrupted. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


459



Tools, Equipment, and Materials Fiber jumper, optical power meter, optical fiber extractor, light source

Precaution



CAUTION Keep the optical connector and end face clean. Cover the fiber immediately after the fiber is removed.

Procedure Step 1 Turn on the optical power meter, set the unit of the optical power to dBm, and set the operating wavelength of the meter to 1550 nm. Step 2 Connect one end of a known-good fiber jumper to the light source. Step 3 Connect the other end of the known-good fiber jumper to the optical power meter. Step 4 Enable the laser of the light source that is connected to the fiber jumper. Step 5 Measure the transmit optical power P1 of the light source by using the optical power meter. Step 6 Disconnect the two ends of the fiber jumper. Step 7 Connect one end of the tested fiber jumper to the light source. Step 8 Connect the other end of the tested fiber jumper to the optical power meter. Step 9 Measure the transmit optical power P2 of the light source by using the optical power meter. l

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

If the difference between P1 and P2 is less than 1 dB, it indicates that the fiber connection is normal. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

460


l


If the difference between P1 and P2 is greater than 1 dB, it indicates that the fiber connection is faulty.

----End

7.4 Inserting and Removing Fiber Jumpers This section describes the basic method for replacing a fiber jumper when the fiber jumper is damaged.

Prerequisites The laser that is connected to the fiber jumper must be disabled before the replacement.

Impact on System The services on the fiber jumper where the fiber jumper is replaced are interrupted.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials New fiber jumper, optical fiber extractor

Precaution



CAUTION Before installing a fiber jumper, attach temporary labels to the two ends for distinguishing.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


461



CAUTION When replacing the fiber jumper that leads out the cabinet, make sure that the new fiber jumper is routed along the route for the original fiber jumper. In addition, the open corrugated pipe is used to protect the new fiber jumper.

CAUTION Keep the optical connector and end face clean. Cover the fiber immediately after the fiber is removed. NOTE

The type of the fiber jumper before and after the replacement must be the same.

Procedure Step 1 Disconnect the two ends of the fiber jumper to be replaced. Step 2 Insert the new fiber connectors into the corresponding optical ports on the board. Step 3 Lead the optical fibers out from the subrack through the holder at the subrack bottom and the hole at the subrack side. Step 4 Pass the optical fibers to the corresponding subrack side along the space at both sides of the cabinet. Step 5 Make the optical fibers pass through the hole at the subrack side and the holder at the subrack bottom. Step 6 Insert the fiber connectors into corresponding optical ports on the board. Step 7 Coil the redundant optical fibers around the fiber spool at the side of the subrack. Step 8 After the fiber installation, insert fiber plugs in idle ports and cover idle fibers with fiber caps. Step 9 Label the new fiber jumper according to the methods and specifications of labeling for the original fiber jumper. Step 10 Bind the new fiber jumper. NOTE

After replacing the fiber jumper, you should recover the laser status to the status before the replacement.

----End

7.4.1 Inserting the LC/PC Fiber Connector This section describes how to insert LC/PC fiber connectors.

Prerequisites The end face of the fiber must be clean. Wear an ESD wrist strap before carrying out this operation. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


462



Tools, Equipment, and Materials None

Precautions

DANGER Laser is dangerous. The light is not visible to the eyes with or without laser protective glasses. Do not look into optical connectors or ports. Failure to follow this warning can cause damage to eyes, or even blindness.

CAUTION Wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap whenever you touch any equipment or board. Make sure that the wrist strap fully touches your skin. Insert the connector of the ESD strap into the ESD socket in the subrack.

Procedure Step 1 Remove protective cap on the LC/PC connector. Step 2 Align the LC/PC connector to the optical port on the board. Step 3 Push the connector gently in along the guide rail until it clicks. Figure 7-1 LC/PC fiber connector

LC/PC connector Protective cap

----End

7.4.2 Removing the LC/PC Fiber Connector This section describes how to remove LC/PC fiber connectors. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


463



Prerequisites The end face of the fiber must be clean. Wear an ESD wrist strap before carrying out this operation.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Optical fiber extractor, protective cap

Precautions



Procedure Step 1 Clamp the fiber connector from the up and down sides by hand or with optical fiber extractor. Press down the hook switch. NOTE

The LC/PC fiber connector can be directly pulled out by hand. However, if the optical fibers are arranged densely, a dedicated optical fiber extractor shall be used. Figure 7-2 shows the tweezers-like optical fiber extractor.

Figure 7-2 Tweezers-like optical fiber extractor

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


464



Step 2 Pull out the optical fiber gently. Step 3 Cover the fiber connector with the protective cap. Figure 7-3 LC/PC fiber connector

LC/PC connector Protective cap

----End

7.4.3 Inserting the LSH/APC Fiber Connector This section describes how to insert LSH/APC fiber connectors.



Precautions


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


465



DANGER Raman amplifier emits strong light. Do not insert or remove the fiber connector when the laser is working, to avoid damage to human body.


Procedure Step 1 Remove dust-proof protection cover on the LSH/APC fiber connector. Step 2 Align the connector on optical fiber with the optical port of the board. Step 3 Push the connector gently in along the guide rail. Figure 7-4 LSH/APC fiber connector

LSH/APC connector

Protective slidding cover

----End

7.4.4 Removing the LSH/APC Fiber Connector This section describes how to remove LSH/APC fiber connectors.


Tools, Equipment, and Materials Optical fiber extractor Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


466



Precautions


DANGER Raman amplifier emits strong light. Do not insert or remove the fiber connector when the laser is working, to avoid damage to human body.


Procedure Step 1 Clamp the connector by hand. Step 2 Pull it out gently when it gets loose. NOTE

The LSH/APC fiber connector has a dust-proof protection cover. When the connector is pulled out from the optical port, the protection cover will be closed automatically so as to protect against dust and intense light signals output.

Figure 7-5 LSH/APC fiber connector

Protective slidding cover

LSH/APC connector

----End Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


467



7.4.5 Inserting the FC/PC Fiber Connector This section describes how to insert FC/PC fiber connectors.



Precautions



Procedure Step 1 Remove protective cap on the FC/PC connector. Step 2 Align the keyed ridge on the FC/PC fiber connector with the concave slot of the optical port. Step 3 Push in the connector with proper force not to damage the fiber connector. After the connector is seated properly, the keyed ridge shall match the concave slot and the optical connector cannot be turned around. Step 4 When the optical fiber connector is pushed to the bottom, turn the outer ring of the optical connector clockwise to secure the optical fiber connector.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


468



Figure 7-6 FC/PC fiber connector Protective cap

FC/PC connector

----End

7.4.6 Removing the FC/PC Fiber Connector This section describes how to remove FC/PC fiber connectors.



Precautions



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


469



Procedure Step 1 Turn the outer ring of the fiber connector anticlockwise. Step 2 Pull it out gently when it gets loose. Step 3 Cover the fiber connector with the protective cap. Figure 7-7 FC/PC fiber connector Protective cap

FC/PC connector

----End

7.4.7 Inserting the SC/PC Fiber Connector This section describes how to insert SC/PC fiber connectors.



Precautions


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


470




Procedure Step 1 Remove protective cap on the SC/PC connector. Step 2 Align the keyed ridge on the SC/PC fiber connector with the concave slot of the optical port. Step 3 Push the connector in with proper force. After the connector is seated properly, the keyed ridge shall match the concave slot. Step 4 The fiber is not seated properly until it clicks. Figure 7-8 SC/PC fiber connector Protective cap

SC/PC connector

----End

7.4.8 Removing the SC/PC Fiber Connector This section describes how to remove SC/PC fiber connectors.


Tools, Equipment, and Materials Optical fiber extractor

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


471



Precautions



Procedure Step 1 Clamp the SC/PC fiber connector from the up and down sides with the optical fiber extractor. Step 2 Pull out the connector slowly from the optical port with force. Step 3 Cover the fiber connector with the protective cap. Figure 7-9 SC/PC fiber connector Protective cap

SC/PC connector

----End

7.5 Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors Cleaning optical components is to remove dust or other dirt to avoid performance degradation of optical transmission systems. Inspecting and cleaning fiber connectors used in fiber optic connections are described here. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


472



7.5.1 Overview Overview of the purpose and procedure of cleaning optical fiber connectors, the items that may cause pollution to optical connectors are also described here. Cleaning optical components is to remove dust or other dirt to avoid performance degradation of optical transmission systems. Here describes how to inspect and clean fiber connectors used in fiber optic connections. Figure 7-10 shows the optical fiber connector. Figure 7-10 Optical fiber connector

The following items should be removed because they pollute optical connectors that are extensively adopted in optical transmission systems: l

Dust

l

Oils (frequently from human hands)

l

Film residues (condensed from vapors in the air)

l

Powdery coatings (left after water or other solvents evaporate)

Dust is the most common dirt in optical connectors. Even small dust that can be seen only under a microscope can affect the quality of optical signals, degrade the system performance and cause potential instability in network operation. A one-micrometer dust granule on an optical connector of a single mode fiber can block 1% light and cause 0.05 dB lost. A nine-micrometer dust granule that cannot be seen by human eyes can block an entire fiber core. Therefore, small dirt even that cannot be seen by human eyes should be removed. NOTE

Before you connect any optical component, make sure that you have inspected and cleaned the component.

General Procedure Table 7-9 below describes the general procedure of how to inspect and clean the optical fiber connectors. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


473



Table 7-9 General procedure of inspecting and cleaning the optical fiber connectors Operation

Details

Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Cartridge Cleaners

See "7.5.5 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Cartridge Cleaners"

Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue

See "7.5.6 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue"

Cleaning Optical Adapters Using Optical Cleaning Sticks

See "7.5.7 Cleaning Optical Adapters Using Optical Cleaning Sticks"

7.5.2 Protection of Optical Connectors The requirements of optical connector protection are listed here. The requirements of optical connector protection are: l

All optical port boards must be transported and stored in reliable packing. This serves to avoid mechanical and electrostatic damages and to reduce vibrations.

l

Store the protective caps in an ESD bag.

l

Cover the optical ports of the replaced boards with protective caps in time. Store them in proper packages to keep the optical ports clean.

l

The protective caps recommended are shown in Figure 7-11, and the protective caps not recommended are shown in Figure 7-12.

Figure 7-11 Protective caps recommended

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


474



Figure 7-12 Protective caps not recommended

NOTE

The air filter caps made of soft rubber are not recommended, which tends to collect dust and sundries. This type of caps provides poor dustproof function.

7.5.3 Tools, Equipment, and Materials The recommended tools, equipment and materials used in cleaning the optical connector are listed here. The recommended tools, equipment and materials are listed below: l

Optical power meter

l

Optical fiberscope with 400x magnification (a video fiberscope is recommended)

l

CLETOP cassette cleaner, see Figure 7-13

l

Clean solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl can be used, alcohol or formalin is never used)

l

Non-woven lens tissue, lint-free wipes or fiber cleaning tissue (Non-woven lens tissue is recommended)

l

Compressed air

l

Optical cleaning sticks used for optical connectors or cotton swabs (medical cotton or long fiber cotton) See Figure 7-14 and Figure 7-15

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


475



Figure 7-13 CLETOP cassette cleaner

Figure 7-14 Cleaning stick for the SC and FC optical ports (for reference only)

Figure 7-15 Cleaning stick for the LC optical port

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


476



7.5.4 Inspecting Optical Connectors The following describes how to inspect the optical connectors and check the status of the fiber surface.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials The tools, equipment and materials are listed below: l

Optical power meter

l


Precautions

WARNING Laser is dangerous. The light is not visible to the eyes with or without laser protective glasses. Do not look into optical connectors or ports. Failure to follow this warning can cause damage to the eyes, or even blindness. Use a fiberscope equipped with a safety device or a desktop video fiberscope when you inspect the optical connectors. If one is not available, turn off the lasers and disconnect both ends of the fiber before you inspect the optical connectors

CAUTION Electro static discharge (ESD) is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Use proper handlings to prevent damage to the electronic equipment. Failure to follow this caution can cause equipment damage and/or loss of traffic

Procedure Step 1 Turn off the lasers before the inspection. Disconnect both ends of the fiber to be inspected. Step 2 Test the optical power using a power meter. Ensure that the laser is turned off. Step 3 Use a fiberscope to inspect the fiber to check if there is any dirt or damage. See the examples shown below. l For an image of the intact fiber optic surface through a fiberscope that can be used successfully in the equipment, see Figure 7-16.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


477



Figure 7-16 An intact fiber

l For images of fibers through a fiberscope with imperfections that can impair the function of the assembly, see Figure 7-17. The image on the left shows clearly a damaged fiber. Severely damaged fibers must not be used in the system equipment. Otherwise, permanent and severe damage to the assembly can occur. The image on the right shows a fiber that is suspect. If the output power is within an acceptable range, the fiber might not cause any damage to the assembly. If the output power is unstable or falls outside the acceptable range, however, the fiber can cause damage to the assembly and must not be used. Figure 7-17 Damaged or suspect fibers

NOTE

The views shown do not represent the entire surface of the fiber optic. Much of the surface is the metal connector and only the 800-micron core is the actual fiber.

l For details on acceptable and unacceptable fibers, see Figure 7-18, Figure 7-19 and Figure 7-20. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


478



Figure 7-18 An intact fiber

Figure 7-19 Acceptable fibers with imperfections

Figure 7-20 Unacceptable fibers with imperfections

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


479



Step 4 If any dirt is detected, clean the optical connector. For details, see "7.5.5 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Cartridge Cleaners" and "7.5.6 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue". Step 5 If any damage is detected, replace the fiber or board. ----End

7.5.5 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Cartridge Cleaners Clean the fiber optic only in the case that there are flaws on it. The following describes how to clean the fiber optic with a type of CLETOP cassette cleaner.

Prerequisites Before cleaning, inspect the fiber optic surface with a fiberscope or a magnifier to determine the extent to which the fiber optic might be damaged or dirty. Clean the fiber optic only in the case that there are flaws on it. If there are not, do not clean it. That is because the cleaning itself might introduce dust, dirt, or cause potential damage to the fiber optic. The following procedure provides the steps to clean the fiber connectors using cartridge type cleaners. There are several types of cartridge cleaners. The following describes a type of CLETOP cassette cleaner.


CLETOP cassette cleaner

l

Optical power meter

l


Precautions

WARNING Laser is dangerous. The light is not visible to the eyes with or without laser protective glasses. Do not look into optical connectors or ports. Failure to follow this warning can cause damage to the eyes, or even blindness.

CAUTION ESD is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Use proper handlings to prevent damage to the electronic equipment. Failure to follow this caution can cause equipment damage and/or loss of traffic.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


480



Procedure Step 1 Turn off the lasers before the inspection. Disconnect both ends of the fiber to be inspected. Step 2 Use a power meter to measure and ensure that there is no laser light on the optical connector. Step 3 Press down and hold the lever of the cassette cleaner, and the shutter slides back and exposes a new cleaning area. See Figure 7-21. Figure 7-21 Using the CLETOP cassette cleaner

Step 4 Place the fiber tip lightly against the cleaning area so that the end face is flat on the cleaning area Step 5 Drag the fiber tip lightly on one cleaning area in the direction of the arrow once. See Figure 7-22. Do it again on the other cleaning area in the same direction as the first time once. See Figure 7-23.

CAUTION Do not scrub the fiber against fabric or clean over the same cleaning area more than once. Otherwise, the connector can be dirtied or damaged.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


481



Figure 7-22 Dragging the fiber tip lightly on one cleaning area

Figure 7-23 Dragging the fiber tip lightly on the other cleaning area

Step 6 Release the lever of the cassette cleaner to close the cleaning area. Step 7 Use a fiberscope to inspect the adapter to check if there is any dirt. For details see the examples shown in 7.5.4 Inspecting Optical Connectors. If the optical adapter is still dirty, repeat the Step 1 to Step 6. Step 8 Connect the fiber connector to the board. Step 9 Turn on the lasers after you connect the fiber to the board. ----End Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


482



7.5.6 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue Clean the fiber optic only in the case that there are flaws on it. The following procedure provides the steps to clean the fiber connectors using lens tissue.

Prerequisites Before cleaning, inspect the fiber optic surface with a fiberscope or a magnifier to determine the extent to which the fiber optic might be damaged or dirty. Clean the fiber optic only in the case that there are flaws on it. If there are not, do not clean it. That is because the cleaning itself might introduce dust, dirt, or cause potential damage to the fiber optic. The following procedure provides the steps to clean the fiber connectors using lens tissue. Use only the special materials for cleaning the fiber connectors. See the local site practices.


Optical power meter

l


l

Clean solvent. (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl can be used. Alcohol or formalin is never used)

l

Non-woven lens tissue, lint-free wipes or fiber cleaning tissue (Non-woven lens tissue is recommended)

l

Compressed air

Precautions



Procedure Step 1 Turn off the lasers before the inspection. Disconnect both ends of the fiber to be inspected. Step 2 Use a power meter to measure and ensure that there is no laser light on the optical connector. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


483



Step 3 Place a small amount of cleaning solvent on the lens tissue. Step 4 Clean the fiber tip on the lens tissue. See Figure 7-24 and Figure 7-25.

CAUTION Do not scrub the fiber against fabric or clean over the same cleaning area more than once. Failure to comply can result in connector dirt or damage.

CAUTION Move the fiber connector in the same direction when you wipe the fiber connector on the lens tissue. Figure 7-24 Cleaning the fiber tip with the lens tissue on the desk

Figure 7-25 Cleaning the fiber tip with the lens tissue on the hand

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


484



Step 5 Repeat Step 4 several times on the areas of the lens tissue that have not been used. Step 6 Use the compressed air to blow off the fiber tip. NOTE

l When you use the compressed air, keep the injector nozzle as close as possible to the fiber connector surface without touching it. l When you use the compressed air, first spray it into the air as the initial spray of compressed air can contain some condensation or propellant. Such condensation leaves behind a filmy deposit. l If the compressed air is not available, a clean roll can be used.

Step 7 Use a fiberscope to inspect the adapter to check if there is any dirt. For details, see the examples shown in 7.5.4 Inspecting Optical Connectors. If the optical adapter is still dirty, repeat the Step 1 to Step 6. Step 8 Do not touch the fiber connector after you clean it. Connect it to the optical port board at once. If it is not used for the time being, put a protective cap on it. NOTE

A piece of lens tissue can be used for only one time.

Step 9 Turn on the lasers after you connect the fiber to the board. ----End

7.5.7 Cleaning Optical Adapters Using Optical Cleaning Sticks Optical adapters must be cleaned with special cleaning tools and materials. The following procedure provides the steps to clean optical adapters using optical cleaning sticks.

Prerequisites There are several types of optical cleaning sticks and cotton swabs that can be used. See the local site practices. You can obtain these tools and materials from a fiber cable and connector manufacturer.


Optical power meter

l


l

Clean solvent. (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl can be used. Alcohol or formalin is never used)

l

Compressed air

l

Optical cleaning sticks used for optical connectors or cotton swabs (medical cotton or long fiber cotton)

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


485



Precautions



Procedure Step 1 Turn off the lasers before the inspection. Disconnect both ends of the fiber to be inspected. Step 2 Test the optical power using a power meter. Ensure that the laser is turned off. Step 3 Select the cleaning stick with a proper diameter for a certain type of the adapter. NOTE

For the SC and FC optical port, use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 2.5 mm( 0.1 in.); for the LC optical port, use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 1.25 mm( 0.05 in.). See Figure 7-14 and Figure 7-15.

Step 4 Place a small amount of cleaning solvent on the optical cleaning stick. Step 5 Place the optical cleaning stick lightly on the optical adapters so that cleaning solvent is against the fiber tip. Hold the stick straight out from the adapter and turn the stick clockwise one circuit. Make sure that there is direct contact between the stick tip and fiber tip. Step 6 Use the compressed air to blow off the fiber tip. NOTE

l When you use the compressed air, keep the injector nozzle close to the connector surface without touching it. l When you use the compressed air, first spray it into the air as the initial spray of compressed air can contain some condensation or propellant. Such condensation leaves behind a filmy deposit.

Step 7 Use a fiberscope to inspect the adapter to check if there is any dirt. For details, see the examples shown in "7.5.4 Inspecting Optical Connectors". If the optical adapter is still dirty, repeat the Step 1 to Step 6. Step 8 Connect the fiber to the board, or put a protective cap on the port. Step 9 Turn on the lasers after you connect the fiber to the board. ----End Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


486



7.6 Performing Hardware Loopback Manually perform loopback to a physical port (optical port) with a fiber.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Optical power meter, fixed attenuator, fiber jumper

Background Information Figure 7-26 shows the difference between software loopback and hardware loopback. Based on the loopback position, hardware loopbacks on the SDH ports are classified into the self-loop at the same board and the cross-connect self-loop at the same site, as shown in Table 7-11. Figure 7-26 Differences between hardware loopback and software loopback Transmitting module

Hardware loopback

Software loopback

Receiving module

Table 7-10 Hardware loopback on the WDM port Category Description Diagram

Category Description Diagram

Hardware loopback on OTU boards

Client-side loopback


Rx Optical attenuator

IN OTU

Tx

OUT

Client side

WDM-side loopback

Rx

IN OTU

Tx Client side

Hardware loopback on tributary boards

Client-side loopback

WDM side

Optical attenuator

OUT

Optical attenuator

WDM side

Rx Tributary unit Tx Client side

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


487




Hardware loopback on line boards

WDM-side loopback



IN Optical attenuator

Line unit OUT WDM side

Table 7-11 Hardware loopback on the SDH port Category Description Diagram


Self-loop at the same board

Using one fiber jumper or cable to connect the transmit port to the receive port of the same port board.

Cross-connect self-loop at the same site

Using the fiber jumpers or cables to connect the transmit port of the west port board to the receive port of the east interface board, and to connect the transmit port of the east interface board to the receive port of the west interface board.


IN

IN

OUT OUT Optical Optical Interface Interface Board Board

IN

IN

OUT

OUT

West optical interface board

Eest optical interface board

Precautions

CAUTION When you perform hardware loopback, add an optical attenuator according to the range of the optical power received by different boards.

Procedure Step 1 Before a hardware loopback, use an optical power meter to measure the optical power of the output optical port (OUT).

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


488



Step 2 Based on the received optical power range of boards, select a proper fixed attenuator. For details about the range of each board, see the Hardware Description. Step 3 Use fiber jumper to connect the output optical port to the input port on the board, to perform a loopback. ----End

7.7 Reset a Board 7.7.1 Performing a Warm Reset on the Board When a board works abnormally, you might need to perform a warm reset of the board.

Prerequisites You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

Impact on System In the case of the SCC board, the impacts of resetting the board are as follows: l

The communication between the U2000 and the SCC board and between the SCC board and other boards stops.

A warm reset of boards does not affect the running services.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000

Background Information Warm reset of the SCC board: l

After a warm reset of the SCC board, FPGA of the board is not updated, and the configuration data in the memory of the board remains the same. When a fault is detected, a warm reset is preferred.

l

A warm reset can be performed in any of the following methods: – By using the U2000: It is applicable to remote maintenance. In this method, the communication between the U2000 and the SCC board must be normal. – By pressing the RESET button on the SCC board: It is applicable to field maintenance or the situation where the communication between the U2000 and the SCC board stops.

Warm reset of the other boards: l

After a warm reset of other boards, FPGA of the boards is not updated, and the configuration data in the memory of the board remains the same.

l

A warm reset can be performed in the following method:

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


489



– By using the U2000: It is applicable to remote maintenance. In this method, the communication between the U2000 and the SCC board and between the SCC board and other boards must be normal.

Performing a Warm Reset of a Board 1.

Right-click the desired board in the NE panel window.

2.

Select Warm Reset from the shortcut menu. The warm reset maybe service-affecting. Then, the Warning dialog box is displayed. Click OK. NOTE

If Cold Reset is not present in the shortcut menu, then board does not support the cold reset function.

3.

Click Close on the Result dialog box displayed.

7.7.2 Performing a Cold Reset on the Board When a board works abnormally, you might need to perform a cold reset of the board.

Prerequisites You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

Impact on System If you perform a cold reset of the SCC board, the U2000 stops communicating with the SCC board, and the SCC board stops communicating with the other boards. If you perform a cold reset of the TN16XCH board, the U2000 stops communicating with the TN16XCH board, and the TN16XCH board stops communicating with the other boards. A cold reset of other boards affects the running services. If a reset of such a board is failing, it affects the communication between the board and the system control board, or even interrupts services. A cold reset on boards other than the SCC board affects the running services. A reset failure on these boards affects the communication between the board and the system control board, or even interrupts services.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000

Background Information Cold reset of the SCC board: l

When the SCC board is faulty, perform a warm reset of the SCC board. If the fault persists after a warm reset, perform a cold reset.

l

The methods of performing a cold reset of the SCC board are as follows: – Perform a cold reset by removing and then inserting the SCC board. This method applies to field maintenance or scenarios where the SCC board fails to communicate with the U2000.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


490



– Perform a cold reset on the U2000. This method applies to remote maintenance where the communication between the SCC board and the U2000 is normal. Cold reset of the TN16XCH board: l

When the TN16XCH board is faulty, perform a warm reset of the TN16XCH board. If the fault persists after a warm reset, perform a cold reset.

l

The methods of performing a cold reset of the TN16XCH board are as follows: – Perform a cold reset by removing and then inserting the TN16XCH board. This method applies to field maintenance or scenarios where the TN16XCH board fails to communicate with the U2000. – Perform a cold reset on the U2000. This method applies to remote maintenance where the communication between the TN16XCH board and the U2000 is normal.

Cold reset of the other boards: l

After a cold reset of other boards, FPGA of the boards is updated, which is service-affecting. Perform a warm reset of the board, if the fault persists after a warm reset, perform a cold reset.

l

A cold reset can be performed in any of the following methods: – By using the U2000: It is applicable to remote maintenance. In this method, the communication between the U2000 and the system control board must be normal, and the communication between the board and the system control board must be normal. – By removing and then inserting the board: It is applicable to field maintenance or the situation where the communication between the board and the system control board stops. If you perform a cold reset of the board by reseating the board, see the procedure in Replacing a Board.

Performing a Cold Reset of a Board on the U2000 1.

Right-click the desired board in the NE panel window.

2.

Choose Cold Reset from the shortcut menu. The cold reset may be service-affecting. Then, the Warning dialog box is displayed. Click OK. NOTE

If Cold Reset is not present in the shortcut menu, then board does not support the cold reset function.

3.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Click Close on the Result dialog box displayed.


491


8 Parts Replacement

8

Parts Replacement

About This Chapter

8.1 General Guide for Replacing a Board Most boards are replaced in similar fashion, and this section provides guidance for replacing a common board. 8.2 Replacing an SCC Board with One of the Same TNxx Version This section describes the procedure for replacing an SCC board with one of the same TNxx version. 8.3 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different TNxx Version This section describes how to replace an SCC board with an SCC board of a later TNxx version. The replacement mainly involves the SCC boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and OptiX OSN 6800. 8.4 Replacing the TN16XCH Board This section describes how to replace TN16XCH board. 8.5 Replacing the Cross-Connect Board This section describes how to replace the Cross-Connect boards. 8.6 Replacing the Raman Amplifier Board This section describes how to replace the Raman amplifier board. 8.7 Replacing the PID Board This section describes how to replace the PID board. 8.8 Replacing the AUX Board This section describes how to replace the AUX board. 8.9 Replacing the DCM This section describes how to replace the DCM. 8.10 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module This section describes how to replace the pluggable optical module (eSFP/XFP). 8.11 Replacing the EFI Frame This section describes how to replace the EFI frame in the OptiX OSN 6800. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


492


8 Parts Replacement

8.12 Replacing the EFI Board This section describes how to replace the EFI board in the OptiX OSN 8800. 8.13 Replacing the PIU Board This section describes how to replace the PIU board. 8.14 Replacing the Power Switch on the DC Power Distribution Box This section describes how to replace a faulty power switch on the DC power distribution box. 8.15 Replacing the Fan Tray Assembly This section describes how to replace the fan tray assembly. 8.16 Replacing the Air Filter Replace the air filter periodically to ensure efficient heat dissipation from the equipment. 8.17 Replacing SDI Components This section describes how to replace a component (such as fan module, power supply module, and control board) on the digital video O/E conversion chassis and how to replace the SDIspecific SFP module on the TOM board. 8.18 Replacing the Subrack If the backplane of a subrack has bent pins or other defects, the subrack must be replaced. This section describes how to replace the subrack.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


493


8 Parts Replacement

8.1 General Guide for Replacing a Board Most boards are replaced in similar fashion, and this section provides guidance for replacing a common board. It applies to the following boards: l

optical transponder boards

l

tributary and line boards

l

optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards

l

optical add and drop multiplexing boards

l

reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing boards

l

optical amplifier boards

l

optical supervisory channel boards

l

optical protection boards

l

spectrum analyzer boards

l

variable optical attenuator boards

l

optical power and dispersion equalizing boards

l

clock boards

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


494


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE

l If the software version of the spare board is V100R004C01 or earlier, perform the following operations before replacing the board: l If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 3800 subrack, no operation is required. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 functions as the master subrack, you need to take the following actions on the replacement board before replacing any original board on the NE. Otherwise, the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. l a. Install the spare board to any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. Note that the master subrack of the NE where the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is located cannot be OptiX OSN 8800 T64. l b. When the replacement board is in service, review the indicators on the board. If any indicator flashes abnormally, reset or replace the replacement board. For description of the indicators, see "Indicator". l c. Double-click the icon of the optical NE in the Physical View, and the NE Panel is displayed. Click the NE where the replacement board resides. l d. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. Choose Add Physical Board from the shortcut menu. l e. Right-click the slot where the replacement board resides. Choose Version from the shortcut menu to query the board software version information, and record the displayed version information. l f. Right click the slot where the replacement board resides. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu. l g. Right-click the slot where the board to be replaced or the board with the same type as the board to be replaced resides. Choose Version from the shortcut menu. If the version is the same as that recorded in Step e, it indicates that the process of the replacement board is successful. Otherwise, reset or replace the replacement board, and repeat Steps a to g. l h. Remove the replacement board, and the process of the replacement board is complete. l i. Replace the fault board. For more information, refer to "step 4, step 5, and step 6" of Procedure of Replacing a Board. l If the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 does not function as the master subrack, and the board to be replaced is in any slot of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack on the NE, you need to perform the following operations on the replacement board before replacing the original board. Otherwise, the services of the active boards in other slots may be interrupted. If the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack, no operation is required. l a. Install the spare board in any available slot of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack of version V100R004C02 or later. l b. For other operations, see the previous steps b to i.

8.1.1 Prerequisite For the operations on the NMS, you must be an NMS user with "NE operator and network " authority or higher.

8.1.2 Impact on the System This section describes the impact of board replacement on services. Board Type

Impact on System when Replacing a Board

Optical Transponder Board Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Protection is configured

No protection is configured

Client 1+1 protection

Replacing a board causes all

Replacing a board has no impact on services.


495


Board Type

Impact on System when Replacing a Board

Tributary Board

Line Board

8 Parts Replacement

Protection is configured


SNCP protection

When SNCP protection is configured, replacing the OTU where the sink node is located brings a service interruption. Replacing an OTU on other nodes generally brings no impact on services.

services carried by the board interruption

ERPS protection

Replacing a board causes service interruption at the site where the board is configured but has no impact on the services on the whole ring.



Tributary SNCP protection



Before replacing a line board, check if the service from the line to a tributary board is provided with the client 1+1 protection on the tributary board. If the protection is provided, replacing the line board brings no service interruption upon a normal switching. If the protection is not provided, replacing the line board brings a service interruption.

ODUk SNCP protection


ODUk SPRing protection

In the case of four-fiber ring, replacing a line board brings no service interruption in case of a normal switching.

When other protection is configured, replacing a board will cause service interruption.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


496


Board Type

8 Parts Replacement

Impact on System when Replacing a Board Protection is configured

Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board


Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Board

Replacing a board causes an interruption on all traditional services carried by the board. If ASON services traverse the board to be replaced, optimize the ASON services traversing the board to other paths (the preset restoration paths of the services are preferred if they do not traverse the board to be replaced) before board replacement. For optical-layer ASON services, the new paths must be commissioned; otherwise, the services may be interrupted. After board replacement, preset the insertion loss of the new board and re-commission the original paths. Then, switch the ASON services back to the original paths. If no other paths are available during board replacement, the ASON services will be interrupted.

Optical Supervisory Channel Board

Replacing a board causes interruption of the optical supervisory channel services, but has no impact on services.

Optical Protection Board

Replacing a board causes an interruption on all services carried by the board.

Spectrum Analyzer Board


Clock Board

For OptiX OSN 8800, 1+1 protection is configured for clock boards. Replacing a clock board will trigger switching on the active and standby clock boards, therefore, services are not affected.

Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board Optical Amplifier Board Variable Optical Attenuator Board

During board replacement, the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. At this point, the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators".

8.1.3 Tools, Equipment, and Materials ESD bag, ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flashlight, optical power meter, and U2000

8.1.4 Precautions This section describes the precautions to be taken before you replace optical transponder boards, line boards, tributary boards, and clock boards.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


497


8 Parts Replacement

Optical Transponder Board

CAUTION Before connecting a fiber to the input optical port of a board, measure the optical power. You can directly connect a fiber to the input optical power of the board only when the measured optical power is within the permitted range of the receive optical power for the optical module on the board. If the measured optical power is beyond the permitted range, you must add a VOA before connecting the fiber to prevent the receiver optical module from being burned or damaged. The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm, which must be considered with caution to prevent the optical module from being burned or damaged. l

Before replacing the board, ensure that the wavelength of the new board is consistent with that of the original board. NOTE

The wavelength of the board is printed on the PCB board.

l

Before replacing the board, test the input optical power. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point; otherwise, the receiver optical module will be burned or damaged.

l

Before replacing the board, query and record the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link.

l

If the client 1+1 protection is configured, perform the following steps: 1.

Before replacing the board, query the working status of the board to be replaced.

2.

If the board to be replaced is the current working board, perform an active/standby switchover on the U2000. NOTE

The channel status of the protection board must be normal. Otherwise, replacing the faulty board causes a service interruption. At the opposite end of the link, perform a manual switchover on the U2000 at the same time.

3. l

After replacing the board, query the state of the new board and ensure that it is the working board.

If the SNCP protection is configured, perform the following steps: 1.


2.

If the board to be replaced is the working board and the service sink does no reside on the board, perform an active/standby switchover on the U2000. NOTE


3. l

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


After replacing the board, query the wavelength of the new board on the U2000. Make sure the wavelength is the same as that of the original board. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

498


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE

If the replaced board is a tunable OTU, after the board is replaced, the SCC automatically delivers the wavelength configuration of the original board.

l

After replacing the board, query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. Make sure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement.

Line Board

CAUTION Before connecting a fiber to the input optical port of a board, measure the optical power. You can directly connect a fiber to the input optical power of the board only when the measured optical power is within the permitted range of the received optical power for the optical module on the board. If the measured optical power is beyond the permitted range, you must add a VOA before connecting the fiber to prevent the receiver optical module from being burned or damaged. The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm, which must be considered with caution to prevent the optical module from being burned or damaged. l

Before replacing the board, ensure that the wavelength of the new board is consistent with that of the original board. NOTE

The wavelength of the board is printed on the PCB board.

l

Before replacing the board, query and record the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link.

l


l

If the ODUk SNCP protection or ODUk SPRing protection (four-fiber ring) is configured, perform the following steps: 1.


2.



3.


l

After replacing the board, query the wavelength of the new board on the U2000. Ensure the wavelength is the same as that of the original board.

l

After replacing the board, query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. Ensure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


499


8 Parts Replacement

Tributary Board

CAUTION Before connecting a fiber to the input optical port of a board, measure the optical power. You can directly connect a fiber to the input optical power of the board only when the measured optical power is within the permitted range of the received optical power for the optical module on the board. If the measured optical power is beyond the permitted range, you must add a VOA before connecting the fiber to prevent the receiver optical module from being burned or damaged. The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm, which must be considered with caution to prevent the optical module from being burned or damaged. l


l

If the client 1+1 protection or tributary SNCP protection is configured, perform the following steps: 1.


2.



3.


Clock Board Before replacing the board, perform an active/standby switchover on the U2000. NOTE

For OptiX OSN 8800 T32, assume that the clock board to be replaced is located in slot 42, it is the main clock board, the clock board in slot 44 works normally and the subrack where it is located has no BUS_ERR alarm. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64, assume that the clock board to be replaced is located in slot 75, it is the main cross-connect board, the clock board in slot 86 works normally and the subrack where it is located has no BUS_ERR alarm.

8.1.5 Procedure for Replacing a Board This section provides the common procedure for replacing a board. When replacing a board, strictly comply with the procedure provided in this section.

Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. Ensure the name, TNxx version, and type of the new board are the same as those of the original board. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


500


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE

If the TNxx versions of the new board and the original board are not the same, you need to determine whether the new board can be substituted for the original board. For more information regarding the substitution relationships between boards of different versions, refer to "Substitution Relationship".

Step 2 Review and record current NE alarms. 1.

In the Main Topology view, choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu.

2.

Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the filter conditions for the current alarms.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Record the current alarms of the NE. NOTE

You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records, or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE.

Step 3 On the NMS, enable the removal indication function for the board to be replaced. For details, see Enabling the Function of Board Removal Indication. NOTE

For the boards supporting the removal indication function, see Board Indicators. NOTE

After the removal indication function is enabled for the board to be replaced, the STAT indicator on the board and Minor alarm indicator in the subrack slowly blink green so that the onsite maintenance engineer can easily locate the board to be replaced.

Step 4 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and remove the fibers and cables on the board to be replaced. 1.

Wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap. Make sure that the wrist strap fully touches your skin. Insert the connector of the ESD strap into the ESD socket in the subrack.

2.

Record the mapping relationships of the board ports and the fibers.

3.

Remove the fiber jumpers connecting to the optical interfaces on the board. Keep the optical connector and end face clean. Cover the fiber immediately after the fiber is removed. The cable connector must be sealed to avoid short circuit.

Step 5 Remove the board to be replaced. 1.

Optional: If there are screws on the front panel, loosen the captive screws on the front panel of the board.

2.

Grip the ejector levers and apply an outward force until the ejector levers become horizontal and the connector of the board leave the backplane.

3.

Apply force gently outward to pull out the board completely.

4.

Put the replaced board in an ESD bag and attach a maintenance label on the bag. The label should contain the NE name and fault description.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


501


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-1 Removing a board of OptiX OSN 8800/6800 subrack 2

Figure 8-2 Removing a cross-connect board of OptiX OSN 8800 subrack

1

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

2


502


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-3 Removing a board in the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 subrack 1

2

3

1 2

3

4

Figure 8-4 Removing a board of OptiX OSN 3800 chassis

Step 6 Insert the new board. 1. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Check the pins on the backplane using a flashlight. Ensure that no pin is bent. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

503


2.

8 Parts Replacement

Check that the connectors on the board are in good condition. Figure 8-5 Position of connectors on a board

Figure 8-6 Example of a damaged connector

3.

Raise the ejector levers of the board using two hands and align the board with the guide rail of the slot.

4.

Slowly slide the board along the guide rail into the slot until it can no longer move forward.

5.

Lower the ejector levers to hold the beam of the subrack.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


504


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-7 Installing a board of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800 subrack

Figure 8-8 Installing a cross-connect board of the OptiX OSN 8800 subrack

1

2

Figure 8-9 Installing a board in the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack 1

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

2


3

505


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-10 Installing a board of the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis

6.

Optional: If there are screws on the front panel, tighten the two captive screws on the panel of the board.

7.

Insert the fibers into the connectors on the board according to the mapping relationship. NOTE

After the board is replaced, the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically.

Step 7 Review the indicators of the new board. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator gives an abnormal indication, reinsert the board or replace the board again. Step 8 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE. Confirm that the original alarms or performances issues are cleared. ----End

8.1.6 Substitution Relationships This section describes the substitution relationships of the boards.

8.1.6.1 Optical Transponder Boards This section describes the substitution relationships of the optical transponder unit boards. The following board has substitution relationships.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


506


8 Parts Replacement

LOG Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11LOG

TN12LOG

The TN12LOG can be created as TN11LOG on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOG functions as the TN11LOG. NOTE l When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. l A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.

TN12LOG

None

-

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11LOM

TN12LOM

The TN12LOM can be created as TN11LOM on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOM functions as the TN11LOM.

LOM

NOTE l When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. l A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.

TN12LOM

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

None

-


507


8 Parts Replacement

LSX Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11LSX

TN12LSX

The TN12LSX can be created as TN11LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LSX functions as the TN11LSX. NOTE A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of received optical power are different.

TN13LSX

The TN13LSX can be created as TN11LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13LSX functions as the TN11LSX. NOTE l When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. l A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.

TN12LSX

TN13LSX

The TN13LSX can be created as TN12LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13LSX functions as the TN12LSX. NOTE l When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. l A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.

TN13LSX

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

None

-


508


8 Parts Replacement

TMX Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11TMX

TN12TMX

The TN12TMX can be created as TN11TMX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12TMX functions as the TN11TMX. NOTE l When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. l A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.

TN12TMX

None

-

8.1.6.2 Tributary and Line Boards This section describes the substitution relationships of the tributary and line boards. The following board has substitution relationships.

ND2 Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11ND2

TN12ND2

The TN12ND2 can be created as TN11ND2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12ND2 functions as the TN11ND2. NOTE When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply.

TN12ND2

TN53ND2

The TN53ND2 can be created as TN12ND2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53ND2 functions as the TN12ND2. NOTE The TN53ND2 does not support OTU2e services at rate 11.3 Gbit/s on the WDM side and it cannot substitute for the TN12ND2 in relay mode at rate 11.3 Gbit/s.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


509


8 Parts Replacement

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN52ND2

TN53ND2

The TN53ND2 can be created as TN52ND2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53ND2 functions as the TN52ND2. NOTE The TN53ND2 does not support OTU2e services at rate 11.3 Gbit/s on the WDM side and it cannot substitute for the TN52ND2 in relay mode at rate 11.3 Gbit/s.

TN53ND2

None

-

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN51NQ2

TN52NQ2/ TN53NQ2

The TN52NQ2 /TN53NQ2 board can be created as TN51NQ2 on the NMS to function as a TN51NQ2 board. In this scenario, the TN52NQ2 /TN53NQ2 only provides the functions of the TN51NQ2 board, and the board software does not need to be upgraded.

NQ2

NOTE When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply.

TN52NQ2

TN53NQ2/ TN54NQ2

The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 can be created as TN52NQ2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 functions as the TN52NQ2. NOTE Only OptiX OSN 8800 supports the TN54NQ2.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

TN54NQ2

TN53NQ2

The TN53NQ2 board can be created as TN54NQ2 on the NMS to function as a TN54NQ2 board. In this scenario, the TN53NQ2 board only provides the functions of the TN54NQ2 board, and the board software does not need to be upgraded.

TN53NQ2

None

-


510


8 Parts Replacement

NS2 Table 8-1 Substitution rules of the NS2 board Origin al Board

Substi tute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11N S2

None

-

TN12N S2

TN53 NS2

The TN53NS2 can be created as TN12NS2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53NS2 functions as the TN12NS2. NOTE When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply.

TN52N S2

TN53 NS2

The TN53NS2 can be created as TN52NS2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53NS2 functions as the TN52NS2.

TN53N S2

None

-

NS3 Table 8-2 Substitution rules of the NS3 board

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11NS3

TN52NS3

The TN52NS3 can be created as TN11NS3 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN52NS3 functions as the TN11NS3.

TN52NS3

None

-

TN54NS3

None

-

TN55NS3

None

-


511


8 Parts Replacement

TDX Table 8-3 Substitution rules of the TDX board Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11TDX

None

-

TN12TDX

TN53TDX

The TN53TDX can be created as TN12TDX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TDX functions as the TN12TDX.

TN52TDX

TN53TDX

The TN53TDX can be created as TN52TDX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TDX functions as the TN52TDX.

TN53TDX

None

-

TQX Table 8-4 Substitution rules of the TQX board Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11TQX

TN55TQX

The TN55TQX can be created as TN11TQX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN55TQX functions as the TN11TQX.

TN52TQX

TN55TQX


TN53TQX

TN55TQX


TN55TQX

None

-

8.1.6.3 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Boards This section describes the substitution relationships of the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards. The following board has substitution relationships. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


512


8 Parts Replacement

M40 Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11M40

TN12M40

The TN12M40 board can be created as TN11M40 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter without any software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN12M40 board functions as the TN11M40 board. The TN12M40 board occupies two physical slots and three logical slots while the TN11M40 board occupies three physical slots. After the substitution, the remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other board.

TN12M40

None

-

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11M40V

TN12M40 V

The TN12M40V can be created as TN11M40V on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN12M40V board functions as the TN11M40V board. The TN12M40V board occupies two physical slots and three logical slots while the TN11M40V board occupies three physical slots. After the substitution, the remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other board.

TN12M40V

None

-

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11D40

TN12D40

The TN12D40 can be created as TN11D40 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN12D40 board functions as the TN11D40 board. The TN12D40 board occupies two physical slots and three logical slots while the TN11D40 board occupies three physical slots. After the substitution, the remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other board.

TN12D40

None

-

M40V

D40

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


513


8 Parts Replacement

8.1.6.4 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Boards This section describes the substitution relationships of the optical add and drop multiplexing boards. This type of boards does not have substitution relationships.

8.1.6.5 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Boards This section describes the substitution relationships of the reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing boards. This type of boards does not have substitution relationships.

8.1.6.6 Optical Amplifier Boards This section describes the substitution relationships of the optical amplifier boards. The following board has substitution relationships.

OAU1 Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11OAU1

TN12OAU 1, TN13OAU 1

The TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 can be created as TN11OAU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 function as the TN11OAU1.

TN12OAU1

TN13OAU 1

The TN13OAU1 can be created as TN12OAU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter at type 01,03,05, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13OAU1 functions as the TN12OAU1.

TN13OAU1

None

-

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11OBU1

TN12OBU 1

The TN12OBU1 can be created as TN11OBU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU1 functions as the TN11OBU1.

TN12OBU1

None

-

OBU1

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


514


8 Parts Replacement

OBU2 Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11OBU2

TN12OBU 2

The TN12OBU2 can be created as TN11OBU2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU2 functions as the TN11OBU2.

TN12OBU2

None

-

8.1.6.7 Optical Supervisory Channel Boards This section describes the substitution relationships of the optical supervisory channel boards. This type of boards does not have substitution relationships.

8.1.6.8 Optical Protection Boards This section describes the substitution relationships of the optical protection boards. This type of boards does not have substitution relationships.

8.1.6.9 Spectrum Analyzer Boards This section describes the substitution relationships of the spectrum analyzer boards. This type of boards does not have substitution relationships.

8.1.6.10 Variable Optical Attenuator Boards This section describes the substitution relationships of the variable optical attenuator boards. This type of boards does not have substitution relationships.

8.1.6.11 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Boards This section describes the substitution relationships of the optical power and dispersion equalizing board. This type of boards does not have substitution relationships.

8.1.6.12 Clock Board This section describes the substitution relationship of the STG board. This type of boards does not have substitution relationships.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


515


8 Parts Replacement

8.2 Replacing an SCC Board with One of the Same TNxx Version This section describes the procedure for replacing an SCC board with one of the same TNxx version. NOTE

TNxx indicates the board hardware version that is displayed on the PCB board.

l

In the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the SCC board fills one slot in the subrack. The valid slots for the SCC board are IU9 and IU10. IU9 is the first choice. If there is 1+1 protection for the SCC board, IU10 is the default slot for the standby SCC.

l


l


l

In the OptiX OSN 6800, the SCC board fills one slot in the subrack. The valid slots for the SCC board are IU17 and IU18. IU18 is the first choice. If there is 1+1 protection for the SCC board, IU17 is the default slot for the standby SCC.

l

In the OptiX OSN 3800, the SCC board fills one slot in the subrack. The valid slots for the SCC board are IU8 and IU9. IU9 is the first choice. If there is 1+1 protection for the SCC board, IU8 is the default slot for the standby SCC. NOTE

If there is SCC 1+1 protection, the data on the active SCC board is synchronized to the standby SCC board after the standby board is replaced. No manual setting of NE ID is required on the standby board. When the 1+1 protection is not provided, NE ID must be set. Consult Huawei technical support engineers before replacing an SCC board.

CAUTION To help prevent unsynchronized data, do not remove the SCC board during batch data backup. Do not directly insert a standby SCC board that is removed from an ASON NE in to the master subrack of another ASON NE so that the SCC board functions as the active SCC board of the latter NE. Before inserting the SCC board, ensure that the node ID and OSPF IP address that are saved on the SCC board are unique on the entire ASON network. You can replace the SCC board on the OptiX OSN 8800/6800 when: l

The SCC board of the master subrack is configured with SCC 1+1 protection.

l

There is no protection for the SCC board of the master subrack.

l

You are replacing the SCC board of the slave subrack.

You can replace the SCC board on the OptiX OSN 3800 when: l Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

The SCC board of the master subrack is configured with SCC 1+1 protection. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

516


l

8 Parts Replacement

There is no protection for the SCC board.

8.2.1 Setting the Jumper on the SCC This section describes how to set the battery jumpers and BIOS jumpers on the spare SCC board before replacing the SCC board. The battery on the SCC helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of the SCC. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper.Figure 8-11 shows the battery jumper. The BIOS jumper helps clear the system parameter area and database in the flash memory on the SCC board. Table 8-5 shows the function of the BIOS jumper. Figure 8-11 battery jumper

Not used

Used

3

2

1

Table 8-5 Function of the BIOS jumper Jumper Settings

Description

1010

Clear the system parameter area.

1011

Clear the database in the flash memory.

1111

Clear all the data in the flash memory except the board manufacturing information. The data includes the system data, system parameter areas, and extended BIOS files. The upper layer part of BIOS is not started.

1001

Restores the system parameter area, database, and NE software from the CF card.

Figure 8-12 shows the position of jumpers on the TN11SCC board. Figure 8-13 shows the position of jumpers on the TN16SCC board. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


517


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-14 shows the position of jumpers on the TN21SCC board. Figure 8-15 shows the position of jumpers on the TN22SCC board. Figure 8-16 shows the jumpers on the TN51SCC board. Figure 8-17 shows jumpers on the TN52SCC board. Figure 8-18 shows jumpers on the TNK2SCC board. Figure 8-12 Position of the jumpers on the TN11SCC board 01 02 03 04

1010 01 02 03 04

1001 01 02 03 04

1011 01 02 03 04

CPU

1111 BIOS running mode

1 2 CF card

01020304

3 Battery jumper

BIOS running mode

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Battery jumper


518


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-13 Position of the jumpers on the TN16SCC board SW1 ON

1010 1

2

3

4

OFF

SW1 ON

1001 BIOS Running Mode

SW1 ON 1 234

J1

OFF

Battery Jumper

1

2

3

4

SW1 ON

321

1011 1

CF Card

OFF

2

3

4

OFF

SW1 ON

1111 1

2

3

4

OFF

BIOS Running Mode

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


519


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-14 Position of the jumpers on the TN21SCC board

BIOS running mode

CPU

01 02

03 04 J13

01 02

1010

J13

2

1001 J14

03 04 J13

01 02

1 Battery jumper

1011 J14

03 04 J13

3

J14 03 04

01 02

Battery jumper

J13J14

1111 J14

BIOS running mode

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


520


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-15 Position of the jumpers on the TN22SCC board

BIOS running mode

J11 J13

CPU

01 02

01 02 J11

03 04

J11 03 04

J13

1010

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

01 02

Battery jumper

01 02 J11

03 04

3 J11

03 04

J13

J13

1001

1011

BIOS running mode

2 1

J13

Battery jumper

1111


521


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-16 Position of the jumpers on the TN51SCC board BIOS running mode

04 03 1010 02 01

04 03 02 01

U45

J42

J42

J1

J12 Battery jumper

04 03 1001 02 01

U42

J42

CPU

321 04 03 1011 02 01

CF card J42

04 03 1111 02 01 J42 BIOS running mode

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


522


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-17 Position of the jumpers on the TN52SCC board 01 02 03 1010 04

CPU

J1

Battery jumper

321

BIOS running mode

01 02 03 04

U18

U33

J11 01 02 03 1001 04

J11 J11

01 02 03 1011 04

CF card J11

01 02 03 1111 04 J11 BIOS running mode

Figure 8-18 Position of the jumpers on the TNK2SCC board Battery jumper

BIOS running mode 01020304

J9

CPU

3 2 1

J44

CF card

01 02 03 04

01 02 03 04 J9

1010

01 02 03 04 J9

1001

01 02 03 04 J9

1011

J9

1111

BIOS running mode

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


523


8 Parts Replacement

8.2.2 Replacing the Protected SCC in a Master Subrack This section describes how to replace the SCC board of the master subrack when SCC 1+1 protection is configured.

Prerequisites l

You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

l

The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started. For more information, see U2000 User Guide for NE Software Management.

l

The SCC replacement board must be the same type as the SCC board being replaced.

Impact on the System Replacing an SCC board configured with protection does not affect the existing services. For SCC 1+1 protection, replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt communication between the NE where the SCC board resides and the U2000 after you switch services from one SCC board to the other SCC board.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials l

ESD bag

l

U2000

l

Multimeter

Background Information Before replacing an SCC board with a spare SCC board, set the battery jumper on the spare board according to the procedure described in 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper on the SCC. Clear the database on the spare SCC board before starting the replacement. Use setting jumpers on the spare board to configure the BIOS running mode and clear the database. Set the BIOS jumper on the spare board according to the procedure described in 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper on the SCC. The four jumpers used for setting the BIOS running mode are arranged in order from high to low values and are identified as 04, 03, 02, and 01. The setting for each jumper corresponds to a binary value of either 0 or 1. When a jumper is not capped, the setting corresponds to binary 0. When the jumper is capped, the setting corresponds to binary 1. The settings of the four jumpers can be arranged in 16 different combinations, representing the values 0 to 15 in the decimal system. The default setting of the four jumpers is 0000. Ignore the alarms that are reported during SCC board replacement.

Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement board. Ensure that the spare SCC board and the SCC board to be replaced have the same name and are of the same type.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


524


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE

The 1X3 battery jumper on the replacement board enables or disables the power supply from the battery. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper are capped. Then, remove the cap of pin 1 and cap of pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is not working. The selected SCC board cannot be used as a replacement board.

Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Step 3 Back up the NE database to the NMS server. This is to record the NE database for future reference when the SCC board is replaced. 1.

In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu.

2.

Right click the device(s) that you want to backup in the NE View table. NOTE

The Backup Information tab is unavailable when multiple devices are selected.

3.

Select Backup... to open the Backup dialog.

4.

Select the option NMS Server or NMS Client to backup the selected device information. NOTE

By default the NMS Server is selected. If the NMS Server is selected, the selected device information is stored on the NMS server.

5.

Optional: If the NMS Client is selected, click data are to be backed up.

6.

Click Start to start the backup operation for the selected device(s). On the NE View tab page, the backup progress is displayed.

7.

When the backup operation is successful, the NMS creates the dbf.pkg file in the NEName/ yyyymmddhhmmss directory. "NEName" indicates the name of the NE, "yyyymmdd" indicates the date when the backup is created, and "hhmmss" indicates the time when the backup is created.

to select the location where the device

Step 4 Follow the steps below to review the working state of the board to be replaced. 1.

In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Query.

Step 5 If the board to be replaced is the active board, go to Step 6. Otherwise, go to Step 7. Step 6 If the board to be replaced is the working board, complete the following the steps to perform an active/standby switching on the U2000. 1.

In the Main Topology, right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. The NE Explorer window is displayed.

2.

Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.

3.

In Board 1+1 Protection, right-click the desired SCC Board 1+1 Protection. Select Working/Protection Switching from the shortcut menu. Click OK in the window displayed.

4.

Click Query. If the Active Board is not the board to be replaced, the switching is successful.

5.

Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000. Check if services are normal. If services are normal, there must be no new abnormal alarms or performances. The switching is successful.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


525


8 Parts Replacement




Step 8 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For details about how to remove a board, see "step 4, step 5, and step 6" of Procedure of Replacing a Board. Step 9 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board to set the BIOS running mode. Then insert the SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board to format the file system of the new SCC board. 1.

Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1111 to clear all the data in the flash memory except the board manufacturing information. 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper on the SCC shows the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board.

2.

Insert the spare SCC board in the slot housing the original SCC board. Wait for 15 minutes to allow the database to be cleared.

Step 10 After the file system of the SCC board is formatted completely, remove the board. Remove the jumper caps which you set in Step 9. Reinsert this SCC board to the slot. Step 11 View the indicators on the front panel of the new board. It takes approximately 90 minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator is not steady green, you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. For details about the indicators, see Board Indicators. Step 12 Optional: Follow the steps below to switch the active/standby state of the SCCs back to the original state. 1.


2.


3.

In Board 1+1 Protection, right-click SCC Board 1+1 Protection. Select Restore Working/Protection from the shortcut menu. Click OK in the window displayed. NOTE

After you start the new SCC board, the system automatically synchronizes the data between the existing SCC board and the new SCC board. After data backup completes, perform the preceding step to initiate active/standby switching.

Step 13 Check and set the other parameters on the U2000 to ensure that the parameter values of the new board are the same as the original data. 1.

Check the software information of the new SCC against the original data.

2.

Synchronize the NE time with the NMS server time.

3.

Check the NE alarm attribute data against the original data. The data include saving mode, reversion mode and delayed report.

4.

Check the alarm suppression setting data against the original data.

5.

Enable the NE performance monitoring.

6.

Check whether the switching state is correct. Perform a switching test.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


526


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE

For details about how to set these parameters, see iManager U2000 Operator Guide for NG WDM NE Management.

Step 14 Query the current alarms of the NE using the U2000. 1.


2.


3.

Click OK.

4.


You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records, or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE. NOTE

After replacing the SCC, ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs, and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff, the battery of the SCC board is abnormal, check whether the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. If yes, use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is out. The board must be replaced.

CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3.6 V. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced. ----End

8.2.3 Replacing the Unprotected SCC in a Master Subrack This section describes how to replace an SCC board in the master subrack when no protection is configured for the SCC board. Table 8-6 Modes of replacing the SCC of the master subrack without protection Scenario

Mode

Remarks

The NE is reachable on the U2000.

Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data to the NMS

The database of the NE must be backed up. After replacing the SCC, restore the database to the NE. The first mode is recommended. If a slot is available for another SCC, configure the system to provide 1+1 SCC protection.

Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data to a CF Card Replacing the SCC Board After Configuring SCC 1+1 Protection Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


527


Scenario The NE is not reachable on the U2000.

8 Parts Replacement

Mode

Remarks

A backup database is stored on the U2000.

Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data from the NMS

No backup database is stored on the U2000.

Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data from a CF Card

The current database of the NE cannot be backed up. After the SCC is replaced, the NE can only read the database on the U2000 or the database on the CF card saved during the last backup.

No backup database is stored on the U2000, and the CF board has failed.

Manually reconfigure NE parameters as required

8.2.3.1 Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data from the NMS (NE Is Unreachable) If the NE is unreachable because of SCC damage, you can restore the NE database from the NMS after replacing the SCC board.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Impact on the System Replacing the SCC board does not affect traditional services, but ASON services may be affected for a short time when configurations are restored by downloading the database.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials ESD bag, U2000, multimeter, Web LCT

Background Information Before replacing an SCC board with a spare SCC board, set the battery jumper on the spare board according to the procedure described in 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper on the SCC. Clear the database on the spare SCC board before starting the replacement. Use setting jumpers on the spare board to configure the BIOS running mode and clear the database. Set the BIOS jumper on the spare board according to the procedure described in 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper on the SCC. The four jumpers used for setting the BIOS running mode are arranged in order from high to low values and are identified as 04, 03, 02, and 01. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


528


8 Parts Replacement

The setting for each jumper corresponds to a binary value of either 0 or 1. When a jumper is not capped, the setting corresponds to binary 0. When the jumper is capped, the setting corresponds to binary 1. The settings of the four jumpers can be arranged in 16 different combinations, representing the values 0 to 15 in the decimal system. The default setting of the four jumpers is 0000. Ignore the alarms that are reported during SCC board replacement.

Precautions

CAUTION l

If the NE where the SCC to be replaced resides is an ASON NE, the Node ID of the NE must be set according to the original data after the SCC is replaced. Otherwise, the NE database and ASON service cannot be restored.

l

Operations on the U2000 must be performed in the network management center.

l

Operations on the Web LCT must be performed on site.

Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board. Ensure that the spare SCC board and the SCC board to be replaced have the same name and are of the same type. NOTE

The 1X3 jumper on the replacement board enables or disables the power supply from the battery. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 of each jumper are capped. Then, remove the cap of pin 1 and cap pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is not working. The selected SCC board cannot be used as a replacement.




Step 3 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and remove the board. For details about how to remove a board, see "step 4, step 5, and step 6" of Procedure of Replacing a Board. Step 4 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board so as to set the BIOS running mode of the board and then insert it to the slot housing the original SCC board. In this manner, the database on the new SCC board is cleared. 1.

Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1011 to clear the database in the flash memory. 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper on the SCC shows the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board.

2.

Insert the spare SCC board in the slot housing the original SCC board. Wait for 2 minutes until the database on the spare SCC board is cleared. If the spare SCC board is of V100R006C03 or a later version, the database is being cleared when the STAT indicator

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


529


8 Parts Replacement

on the SCC board is quickly blinking and the database clearing is complete when the STAT indicator is steady green. 3.

Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1010 to clear the system parameter area. For the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board, see 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper on the SCC.

4.

Insert the spare SCC board in the slot housing the original SCC board. Wait for 2 minutes until the database on the spare SCC board is cleared. If the spare SCC board is of V100R006C03 or a later version, the database is being cleared when the STAT indicator on the SCC board is quickly blinking and the database clearing is complete when the STAT indicator is steady green.

Step 5 After the database of the SCC board is cleared completely, remove the board. Remove the jumper caps which are shown in Step 4. After that, reinsert this SCC board to the slot. Step 6 After the new SCC board starts, connect the Web LCT to the NE. 1.

Disconnect the cables from the NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 ports (if connected). That is, disconnect the NE from the computer where the U2000 (hereinafter the computer is referred to as U2000) is installed.

2.

Connect the Web LCT to NM_ETH1.

3.

Set the IP address of the Web LCT to ensure that Web LCT is in the same IP subnet segment as the NE IP address. If the IP address of the Web LCT and the NE IP address are in different network segments, the Web LCT cannot be connected to the NE. NOTE

The new board is initiated at the factory, and the default IP subnet segment of the board is 129.9.*.*.

4.

Log in to the Web LCT with the user name admin, and the initial password admin.

Step 7 Create the NE by using the Web LCT. 1.

Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE List. The Search NE dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click Manage Domain. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed.

3.

Click Add. The New Domain dialog box is displayed.

4.

Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address. Enter an IP address in the Domain Address field.

5.

Click OK. NOTE

Repeat step 3 through 5 to add multiple search domains.

6.

Close the Manage Domain Search dialog box.

7.

Select the appropriate network segment IP addresses within the Domain and click Search. NOTE

l The NE search function searches for only the NEs in the specified network segment. l When the search is in progress, you can click End Search.

8.

After the search is complete, select an NE from the list and click Add NE. A prompt message is displayed, indicating that the NE is successfully added. Click OK.

9.

Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or rightclick the NE and choose NE Login. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed, enter lct and password in the User Name and Password fields, and then click OK.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


530


8 Parts Replacement

TIP

You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift. If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box, you can log in to multiple NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line. If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box, you do not need to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the user name and password for login last time.

Step 8 Modify the NE IP, gateway IP and subnet mask based on the original information using the Web LCT. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

2.

Enter the NE IP address, gateway IP address and subnet mask, and click Apply.

3.

Click OK after the Warning dialog box pops up.

4.

Click OK after the Warning dialog box about communication interruption between NEs pops up.

5.

Click Close after the Result dialog box is displayed. NOTE

If the NE IP addresses before and after the modification are in different network segments, the Web LCT cannot be connected to the NE. When this occurs, set the IP address of the Web LCT in the same network segment as the NE IP address.

Step 9 Modify the NE ID and extended ID based on the original information using the Web LCT. 1.

In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID dialog box that is displayed, enter values in the New ID and New Extended ID fields, and then click OK.

3.

A Warning dialog box is displayed, click Yes. A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is displayed, click Close to complete changing the NE ID. At this time, the NE is unreachable.

Step 10 Check the NE communication parameters using the Web LCT. 1.

Select the NE you just created and click the NE Explorer.

2.

Select Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

3.

Check that all NE communication parameters are the same as the original ones.

Step 11 Create a user for an NE using the Web LCT. NOTE

The created NE user must be included in the activated database and the password must match that recorded in the database. Otherwise, activating the database fails.

1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Create and the Add NE User dialog box is displayed.

3.

Enter the NE user name in the NE User field.

4.

Select the User Level as needed.

5.

Enter the password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Confirm Password field.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


531


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE

You also need to set the Whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately parameter. The password is a string of 6-16 characters. It can consist of letters, symbols and numerals, and must contain at least one letter and one numeral.

6.

Click OK.

7.

Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. All created users of the NE are displayed in NE User Management Table.

Step 12 If the NE is an ASON NE, modify the node ID of the NE by using the Web LCT. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose ASON > ASON Feature Management from the Function Tree. Click the Node ID Management tab.

2.

Click Query to view the current node ID of the NE.

3.

Double-click the Node ID field to enter a node ID for the NE.

4.

Click Apply. After you confirm the operation twice, a prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. NOTE

You can also choose Configuration > WDM ASON > ASON Topology Management from the main menu and set the NE node ID.

Step 13 Recover the network connection of the NE. 1.

Remove the network cable which connected the NM_ETH1 port to the Web LCT.

2.

Connect the network cable removed in the Step 6. NOTE

After this procedure, you can use the original user name and password to access the NE by using the U2000.

Step 14 If the software version of the spare SCC board is different from the software version of the SCC board to be replaced, go to Step 15; otherwise, go to Step 16. Step 15 Upgrade or downgrade the software of the spare SCC board. For details, see the Upgrade Guide. Ensure that the software version of the spare SCC board is consistent with that of the SCC board to be replaced. Step 16 Restore the NE database from the NMS server. 1.


2.

Right click the devices that you want to recover in the NE View table.

3.

Select Recover... to open the Recover dialog.

4.

In the File Name drop-down list, select the file to be recovered. If the backup file is listed in the File Name drop-down list, select the file to be recovered, and turn to 16.7. If the backup file is not listed in the File Name drop-down list, click Browse... to select the backup file in the Select File dialog box.

5.

Select NMS Server or NMS Client to recover the backup file for the selected devices. By default NMS Server is selected. l If NMS Server is selected, select the appropriate backup file from the NMS server. The selected backup file path is displayed in the Select File field. to select the backup file from the NMS Client. l If NMS Client is selected, click The selected backup file path is displayed in the Select File field.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


532


6.

8 Parts Replacement

Click OK. NOTE

The selected backup file path from the NMS Server or NMS Client is displayed in the File Name dropdown list.

7.

Click Start, the Operation Confirmation dialog box is displayed.

8.

In the Operation Confirmation dialog, click Yes to start the recovery operation. The recovery operation status is displayed in the NE View table. NOTE

You must activate the NE database within five minutes after restoring it.

CAUTION During the process of backing up databases through restoring databases, do not modify the NE configurations to avoid database inconsistency. Step 17 Activate the NE database. 1.


2.

Select the NE where the SCC that has been replaced resides in the NE View table.

3.

Right-click the NE. A pop-up menu is displayed.

4.

Select Activate Database..., and the Activate Database dialog box is displayed.

5.

icon in Deliver To Board Activate. This icon is changed to . Optional: Click the Click Start to start the database activation process. The progress of the database activation is displayed on the NE View tab. NOTE

The operation on the U2000 may result in a service interruption.



2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Configure the OSPF IP address of the NE if the site complies with the models for separated optical and electrical NEs and the NE is on an optical-layer ASON network. NOTE

For details to set these parameters, see iManager U2000 Operator Guide for NG WDM NE Management.



2.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


533


3.

Click OK.

4.

Record the current alarms of the NE.

8 Parts Replacement

NOTE




8.2.3.2 Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data from a CF Card (NE Is Unreachable) When the NE is unreachable resulting from a damages SCC board, restore the NE database from the CF card after replacing the SCC board if there is no backup data on the NMS.

Prerequisites You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. The SCC replacement board must be the same type as the SCC board being replaced.



Background Information Before replacing an SCC board with a spare SCC board, set the battery jumper on the spare board according to the procedure described in 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper on the SCC. Clear the database on the spare SCC board before starting the replacement. Use setting jumpers on the spare board to configure the BIOS running mode and clear the database. Set the BIOS jumper on the spare board according to the procedure described in 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper on the SCC. The four jumpers used for setting the BIOS running mode are arranged in order from high to low values and are identified as 04, 03, 02, and 01. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


534


8 Parts Replacement

The setting for each jumper corresponds to a binary value of either 0 or 1. When a jumper is not capped, the setting corresponds to binary 0. When the jumper is capped, the setting corresponds to binary 1. The settings of the four jumpers can be arranged in 16 different combinations, representing the values 0 to 15 in the decimal system. The default setting of the four jumpers is 0000. Ignore the alarms that are reported during SCC board replacement.

Precautions

CAUTION l If the NE where the SCC to be replaced resides is an ASON NE, the Node ID of the NE must be set according to the original data after the SCC is replaced. Otherwise, the ASON service cannot be restored. l After the database of the NE is restored on the CF card, the restoration must be completed within two hours after you install the replacement SCC. If you wait more than two hours to restore the database of the NE on the CF card, the data automatically saved on the NE overwrites the original data stored on the CF card. If the original data is overwritten, the original database of the NE cannot be restored. l Operations on the U2000 must be performed in the network management center. l Operations on the Web LCT must be performed on site.

Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement board. Ensure that the spare SCC board and the SCC board to be replaced have the same name and are of the same type. NOTE

The 1X3 jumper (namely, the battery jumper) on the board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery. Make sure that pin 1 and pin 2 of each jumper are capped. Then, cap pin 2 and pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is not working. The board must be replaced.




Step 3 Remove the SCC board to be replaced. For details about how to remove a board, see "step 4, step 5, and step 6" of Procedure of Replacing a Board. Step 4 On the SCC board that has been removed, hold the CF card and pull the card out of the CF card slot. Put the SCC into an ESD bag. NOTE

Keep the CF card because it is required for NE data restoration.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


535


8 Parts Replacement

Step 5 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board so as to set the BIOS running mode of the board and then insert it to the slot housing the original SCC board. In this manner, the database on the new SCC board is cleared. 1.


2.


3.


4.


Step 6 After the database of the SCC board is cleared completely, remove the board. Remove the jumper caps which are shown in Step 5. After that, reinsert this SCC board to the slot. Step 7 After the new SCC board is started, connect the Web LCT to the NE. 1.


2.


3.


The new board is initiated at the factory, and the default IP subnet segment of the board is 129.9.*.*.

4.

Log in the Web LCT with the user name admin, and the initial password admin.

Step 8 Create the NE using the Web LCT. 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Click OK. NOTE


6.


7.

Select the appropriate network segment IP addresses within the Domain and click Search.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


536


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE


8.


9.

Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or rightclick the NE and choose NE Login. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed, enter lct and password in the User Name and Password fields, and then click OK. TIP




2.


3.


4.


5.





2.


3.




2.


3.


Step 12 Create a user for an NE using the Web LCT. NOTE

The created NE user must be included in the activated database and the password must match that recorded in the database. Otherwise, activating the database fails.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


537


8 Parts Replacement

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Enter the password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Confirm Password field. NOTE


6.

Click OK.

7.


Step 13 If the NE is an ASON NE, modify the node ID of the NE using the Web LCT. 1.


2.


3.


4.



Step 14 Restore the network connection of the NE. 1.


2.

Connect the network cable removed. NOTE

After this procedure, you can use the original user name and password to access the NE using the U2000.

Step 15 After the SCC board is started, remove the SCC board just inserted. Insert the CF card that has been removed in Step 4 into the CF card slot on the SCC board. Then insert the SCC. Step 16 If the software version of the spare SCC board is different from the software version of the SCC board to be replaced, go to Step 17;, otherwise, go to Step 18. Step 17 Upgrade or downgrade the software of the spare SCC board. For details, see the Upgrade Guide. Ensure that the software version of the spare SCC board is consistent with that of the SCC board to be replaced. Step 18 Restore the initial database of the NE using the U2000. 1.

In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu, and the NE Configuration Data Management interface is displayed.

2.

In the Object Tree on the left, select an NE and click

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


. 538


8 Parts Replacement

3.

In NE Configuration, select an NE or multiple NEs.

4.

Click Restore NE Database from CF Card. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the restoration of the NE database may lead to service interruption.

5.

Click OK to start to restore the NE database. NOTE

If the database is performing a scheduled backup task, a message will be displayed on the NMS, indicating that restoring data from the CF card will fail. In this scenario, you are advised to wait 5 minutes, and restore data again from the CF card after the database finishes the scheduled backup task.

6.

Click Closeafter an Operation Result dialog box is displayed. NOTE

After the NE databases are restored, the NE software issues the data in the CF card to only the SCC board but not other boards. To ensure that the configurations in the SCC board and the configurations in other boards are consistent, you need to perform warm resets on other boards.

CAUTION During the process from backing up databases to restoring databases, do not modify the NE configurations to avoid database inconsistency. Step 19 Check and set the other parameters on the U2000 to ensure that the parameter values of the new board are the same as the original data. 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.





2.


3.

Click OK.

4.




Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


539


8 Parts Replacement


8.2.3.3 Replacing the SCC After Configuring SCC 1+1 Protection If the slot designated for the standby SCC board is vacant and will not house a service board, you can replace the SCC board by installing the new SCC board in the vacant slot and then performing an active/standby switchover on the SCC boards.

Prerequisites l


l


l

The type of the replacement SCC board is the same as the SCC board to be replaced.

Impact on the System Replacing the SCC does not affect the existing services. The impact caused by replacing an SCC without protection is as follows: l

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the SCC is housed in IU9 by default. When IU10 is not occupied by another board, it is available for another SCC to implement 1+1 protection with the SCC in IU9. In this case, replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the communication between the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from this SCC to the other SCC is performed.

l


l

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, the SCC is housed in IU74 by default. When IU85 is vacant, it is available for another SCC to implement 1+1 protection with the SCC in IU74. In this case, replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the communication between the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from this SCC to the other SCC is performed.

l

For the OptiX OSN 6800, the SCC is housed in IU18 by default. When IU17 is not occupied by another board, it is available for another SCC to implement 1+1 protection with the SCC in IU18. In this case, replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the communication between the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from this SCC to the other SCC is performed.

l

For the OptiX OSN 3800, the SCC is housed in IU9 by default. When IU8 is not occupied by another board, it is available for another SCC to implement 1+1 protection with the SCC in IU9. In this case, replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


540


8 Parts Replacement

communication between the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from this SCC to the other SCC is performed.



Precautions

CAUTION l


l


l


Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement board. Ensure that the spare SCC board and the SCC board to be replaced have the same name and type. NOTE

The 1X3 battery jumper on the replacement board enables or disables the power supply from the battery. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper. Then, remove the cap of pin 1 and cap of pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is not working. The selected SCC board cannot be used as a replacement board.

Step 2 Back up the NE database to the NMS server. This records the NE database for future reference when the SCC board is replaced. 1.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

541


2.

8 Parts Replacement



3.


4.



5.


6.


7.



Step 3 Set the jumpers on the spare SCC board using the following methods and insert it to the specified slot for a standby SCC board. In this manner, the file system of the new SCC board is formatted. NOTE

After inserting the spare SCC board to the specified slot for a standby SCC board, you need to add a corresponding logical board on the U2000. Then, the system automatically configures 1+1 protection for the SCC.

1.

Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1111 so as to clear all the data in the flash memory except the board manufacturing information. 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper on the SCC shows the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board.

2.

Insert the spare SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board, and wait for 15 minutes to allow the file system to be formated.

Step 4 After the file system of the SCC board is formated completely, remove the board. Remove the jumper caps which are shown in Step 3. After that, reinsert this SCC board to the slot. Step 5 View the indicators on the front panel of the new board. It takes approximately 90 minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator is not steady green, you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. For details about the indicators, see Board Indicators. Step 6 Log in to the U2000 and complete the following steps to perform an active/standby switch between the SCC boards. 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


542


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE

After the new SCC board is started, the system automatically backs up the data on the existing SCC board to the new SCC board. After the data is backed up, you can perform the preceding step to initiate an active/ standby switching.



2.


3.


4.


5.

Enable the NE performance monitoring. NOTE




2.


3.

Click OK.

4.




CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3.6 V. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced. Step 9 Remove the physical SCC board and put it in an ESD bag. Then, on the U2000, delete the logical board of the SCC board to be replaced. ----End

8.2.3.4 Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data to the NMS (NE Is Reachable) Before replacing an SCC board, you can back up the NE database to the NMS if the NE is reachable and the slot for housing the standby SCC board is occupied by a service board. In this manner, you can restore the NE database from the NMS after replacing the SCC board. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


543


8 Parts Replacement

Prerequisites l


l


l





Precautions

CAUTION l


l


l


Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement board. Ensure that the spare SCC board and the SCC board to be replaced have the same name and are of the same type. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


544


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE

The 1X3 battery jumper on the replacement board enables or disables the power supply from the battery. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper. Remove the cap of pin 1 and cap of pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is not working. The selected SCC board cannot be used as a replacement board.

Step 2 Review and record the current NE alarms. Step 3 Back up the NE database to the NMS server. This records the NE database for future reference when the SCC board is faulty. 1.


2.



3.


4.




5.


6.


7.


Step 4 Follow the steps below to query the system to obtain the user data of the NE. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Query.

3.

Record the NE user data returned by the system for future restoration of the NE user data. NOTE

Also record the password for each user account of the NE.

Step 5 Follow the steps below to query the NE communication parameters. 1.

Select the NE you just created, and click the NE Explorer.

2.

Select Communication > Communication Parameters from Function Tree.

3.

Record NE communication parameters such as the IP address and the subnet mask in case you need them for parameter restoration.

Step 6 If the NE is an ASON NE, query and record the node ID of the NE. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose ASON > ASON Feature Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Node ID Management tab.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


545


3.

8 Parts Replacement

Click Query, and record the node ID.






2.


3.


4.




2.


3.


The new board is initiated at factory, and the default IP subnet segment of the board is 129.9.*.*.

4.


Step 12 Create the NE using the Web LCT. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


546


8 Parts Replacement

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Click OK. NOTE


6.


7.



8.


9.





2.


3.


4.


5.





2.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


547


3.

8 Parts Replacement




2.


3.


Step 16 According to the NE user data queried in Step 4, create a user for an NE using the Web LCT. 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.



6.

Click OK.

7.




2.


3.


4.





2.

Connect the network cable removed in Step 11. NOTE


Step 19 If the software version of the spare SCC board is different from the software version of the SCC board to be replaced, go to Step 20; otherwise, go to Step 21. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


548


8 Parts Replacement

Step 20 Upgrade or downgrade the software of the spare SCC board. For details, see the Upgrade Guide. Ensure that the software version of the spare SCC board is consistent with that of the SCC board to be replaced. Step 21 Restore the NE database from the NMS server. NOTE


1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Click OK. NOTE


7.


8.

In the Operation Confirmation dialog, click Yes to start the recovery operation. The recovery operation status is displayed in the NE View table.

CAUTION During the process from backing up databases to restoring databases, do not modify the NE configurations to avoid database inconsistency. Step 22 Activate the NE database. 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

icon in Deliver To Board Activate. This icon is changed to . Optional: Click the Click Start to start the database activation process. The progress of the database activation is displayed on the NE View tab.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


549


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE




2.


3.


4.


5.


6.





2.


3.

Click OK.

4.





8.2.3.5 Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data to a CF Card (NE Is Reachable) Before replacing an SCC board, back up the NE database to a CF card if the NE is reachable and the standby SCC slot is occupied by a service board. If you choose to back up the database, you can restore the NE database from the CF card after you replace the SCC board is replaced. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


550


8 Parts Replacement

Prerequisites You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. The SCC replacement board must be the same type as the SCC board being replaced.




Precautions

CAUTION l If the NE where the SCC to be replaced resides is an ASON NE, the Node ID of the NE must be set according to the original data after the SCC is replaced. Otherwise, the ASON service cannot be restored. l After the database of the NE is restored on the CF card, the restoration must be completed within two hours after you install the replacement SCC. If you wait more than two hours to restore the database of the NE on the CF card, the data automatically saved on the NE overwrites the original data stored on the CF card. If the original data is overwritten, the original database of the NE cannot be restored. l Operations on the U2000 must be performed in the network management center. l Operations on the Web LCT must be performed on site.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


551


8 Parts Replacement

Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement board. The spare SCC board and the SCC board to be replaced must have the same name and type. NOTE

The 1X3 battery jumper on the replacement board enables or disables the power supply from the battery. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper. Then remove the cap of pin 1 and cap of pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is not working. The selected SCC board cannot be used as a replacement board.

Step 2 Review and record the current NE alarms. Step 3 Back up the database on the U2000. 1.

In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu, and the NE Configuration interface is displayed.

2.

In the Object Tree, select an NE and click

3.

Select one or more NEs in the NE Configuration.

4.

Click Back Up NE Data and then choose Manually Back Up Database to CF Card.

5.

Click OK in the Confirm dialog box.

6.

Click Close in the Result dialog box is displayed.

.

Step 4 Wait four minutes and query the system to obtain the user data of the NE by following the steps below. 1.


2.

Click Query.

3.





2.


3.




2.


3.



For the boards supporting the removal indication function, see Board Indicators.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


552


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE






2.


3.


4.




2.


3.



4.



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE List. The Search NE dialog box is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

553


8 Parts Replacement

2.


3.


4.


5.

Click OK. NOTE


6.


7.



8.


9.





2.


3.


4.


5.





2.


3.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


554


8 Parts Replacement



2.


3.


Step 17 According to the NE user data queried in Step 4, create a user of the NE using the Web LCT. 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.



6.

Click OK.

7.




2.


3.


4.





2.



Step 20 After the SCC board is started, remove the SCC board just inserted. Insert the CF card that has been removed in Step 9 into the CF card slot on the SCC board. Then insert the SCC. Step 21 If the software version of the spare SCC board is different from the software version of the SCC board to be replaced, go to Step 22; otherwise, go to Step 23. Step 22 Upgrade or downgrade the software of the spare SCC board. For details, see the Upgrade Guide. Ensure that the software version of the spare SCC board is consistent with that of the SCC board to be replaced. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


555


8 Parts Replacement

Step 23 Restore the initial database of the NE using the U2000. 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Click OK to start to restore the NE database.

.

NOTE


6.





2.


3.


4.


5.


6.





2.


3.

Click OK.

4.

Record the current alarms of the NE.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


556


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE




8.2.4 Replacing the SCC Board in a Slave Subrack This section describes how to replace an SCC board in a slave subrack.

Prerequisites You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. The SCC replacement board must be the same type as the SCC board being replaced.

Impact on the System Replacing the SCC does not affect the existing services. If the SCC is configured with 1+1 protection, replacing the SCC does not affect the system. If an SCC is not configured with 1+1 protection, replacing the SCC has the following effects: l

The fan is automatically changed to the "High Speed" mode.

l

The ESC and OSC communication of the subrack where the replacement SCC resides fails.

l

The POWER_FAIL alarm of the subrack where the replacement SCC resides cannot be reported.

l

The subrack whose ID conflicts with the ID of the subrack where the replacement SCC resides cannot be detected.

l

Certain optical boards in the slave subrack housing the SCC board to be replaced go offline and cannot be managed. However, the services on these boards are not affected.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials ESD bag, U2000, multimeter Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


557


8 Parts Replacement


Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. Ensure the name, and the type of the spare board are the same as those of the original board. NOTE

The 1X3 jumper inside the board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 on the battery jumper are capped. Then, cap pin 2 and pin 3 on the battery jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is not working. In this case, the SCC board needs to be replaced.

Step 2 Review and record the current NE alarms. Step 3 On the NMS, enable the removal indication function for the board to be replaced. For details, see Enabling the Function of Board Removal Indication. NOTE



Step 4 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For more information regarding how to replace a board, refer to "step 4, step 5, and step 6" of Procedure of Replacing a Board. Step 5 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board to set the BIOS running mode, and then insert the SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board. In this manner, the file system on the new SCC board is formated. 1.


2.

Insert the spare SCC board in the slot housing the original SCC board. NOTE

After you set the jumpers and install the new SCC board in the slot, wait 15 minutes to allow the file system to be formated.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


558


8 Parts Replacement

Step 6 After the file system of the SCC board is formatted completely, remove the board. Remove the jumper caps which you set in Step 5. Reinsert this SCC board to the slot. Step 7 Review the indicators of the new board. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator gives an abnormal indication, reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators". Step 8 Query the current alarms of the NE using the U2000. 1.


2.


3.

Click OK.

4.





8.3 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different TNxx Version This section describes how to replace an SCC board with an SCC board of a later TNxx version. The replacement mainly involves the SCC boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and OptiX OSN 6800. NOTE

TNxx indicates a board hardware version displayed on the PCB board.

8.3.1 Substitution Relationships This section describes the substitution relationships of the SCC boards.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


559


8 Parts Replacement

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11SCC

TN51SCC

When the TN51SCC board is installed in a master subrack with ASON disabled, it can replace the TN11SCC board. But after the replacement, the board software must be upgraded. When it is installed in a master subrack with ASON disabled, it cannot replace the TN11SCC board. When it is installed in a slave subrack, it can directly replace the TN11SCC board.

TN52SCC

Software upgrade is required for the replacement.

TN16SCC

None

-

TN51SCC

TN52SCC


TN52SCC

None

-

TNK2SCC

None

-

TN21SCC

TN22SCC


TN22SCC

None

-

NOTE If a subrack/chassis uses two SCC boards (one is active and the other is standby), the versions of the two SCC boards must be the same.

8.3.2 Replacing the Protected SCC Board in a Master Subrack This section describes how to replace the SCC board in a master subrack when SCC 1+1 protection is configured.

Prerequisites l


l


l

If the replacement board and the SCC board to be replaced are of different types, the two SCC boards in the subrack must be replaced to ensure that the active and standby SCC boards are of the same type.

Impact on the System The replacement does not affect the existing services. For SCC 1+1 protection, replacing one SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the communication between the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from this SCC to the other SCC is performed.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials ESD bag, U2000, multimeter Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


560


8 Parts Replacement


Procedure Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement SCC board by referring to "Substitution Relationships". NOTE

The 1X3 jumper (namely, the battery jumper) on the SCC board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery. Make sure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper are capped. Then, cap pin 2 and pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is out of work. The SCC board needs to be replaced.

Step 2 Review and record the current NE alarms. Step 3 Back up the NE database to the NMS server. This is to record the NE database for future reference when the SCC board is replaced. 1.


2.



3.


4.



5.


6.


7.

When the backup operation is successful, the NMS creates the dbf.pkg file in the NEName/ yyyymmddhhmmss directory. "NEName" indicates the name of the NE, "yyyymmdd"

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)



561


8 Parts Replacement

indicates the date when the backup is created, and "hhmmss" indicates the time when the backup is created. Step 4 Follow the steps below to query the working state of the board to be replaced. 1.


2.

Click Query.

Step 5 If the board to be replaced is the active board, go to Step 6. Otherwise, go to Step 7. Step 6 If the board to be replaced is the working board, follow the steps below to perform an active/ standby switching on the U2000. 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.





Step 8 Set Replace Board Type on the U2000. 1.

Double-click the optical NE icon in the Main Topology. Then, the running status of the optical NE is displayed.

2.

Select the desired NE. In the NE Panel tab, right-click the desired SCC board and click Replace Board Type from the shortcut menu.

3.

The dialog box of Replacement Board Type is displayed, select the name of the target board to be replaced within the Usable Board Type. Click OK.

4.

After the replacement, a prompt appears asking you whether to immediately upload the NE data. Click OK. NOTE

If you click Cancel, the board is successfully upgraded, but you need to manually upload the NE data later.

5.

Click OK to confirm the uploading of the NE data again. NOTE


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


562


6.

8 Parts Replacement

Click Close in the displayed Result dialog box. NOTE

After changing the board type by setting Replace Board Type on the U2000, the WRG_BD_TYPE alarm will be reported.

Step 9 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For more information regarding how to replace a board, refer to "step 4, step 5, and step 6" of Procedure of Replacing a Board. Step 10 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board to set the BIOS running mode. Then insert the SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board to format the file system of the new SCC board. 1.


2.


Step 11 After the file system of the SCC board is formatted completely, remove the board. Remove the jumper caps which you set in Step 9. Reinsert this SCC board to the slot. Step 12 Wait ten minutes. If the U2000 reports a SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT alarm, a software upgrade is required for the replacement. For details, see Upgrade Guide. Step 13 View the indicators on the front panel of the new board. It takes approximately 90 minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator is not steady green, you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. For details about the indicators, see Board Indicators. NOTE

After the new board works normally, the WRG_BD_TYPE alarm will be cleared on the U2000.

Step 14 Follow the steps below to switch the active/standby state of the SCC boards back to the original state. 1.


2.


3.


After you start the new SCC board, the system automatically synchronizes the data between the existing SCC board and the new SCC board. After the data backup is complete, you can perform the preceding step to initiate active/standby switching.



2.


3.


4.


5.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


563


6.

8 Parts Replacement

Check whether the switching state is correct. Perform a switching test. NOTE


Step 16 Check the indicators of the new board. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady on green. If the indicator gives an abnormal indication, reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For the indicator definitions, see Board Indicators. Step 17 Query the current alarms of the NE using the U2000. 1.


2.


3.

Click OK.

4.




CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3.6 V. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced. Step 18 Repeat the preceding steps to replace the other SCC board in the protection group and ensure that the two SCC boards are of the same type after the replacement. ----End

8.3.3 Replacing the Unprotected SCC Board in a Master Subrack This section describes how to replace an SCC board in a master subrack when no protection is configured for the SCC board.

8.3.3.1 Replacing the SCC with the Database Backed Up to the NMS Before replacing an SCC board, you can back up the NE database to the NMS. In this manner, you can restore the NE database from the NMS after replacing the SCC board.

Prerequisites l Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

564


l

8 Parts Replacement


Impact on the System Replacing the SCC board does not affect traditional services, but ASON services may be affected for a short time when configurations are restored by downloading the database. The impact caused by replacing an SCC without protection is as follows: l

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, the SCC is housed in IU28 by default. If another board is installed in IU11, SCC 1+1 protection cannot be configured. In this case, replacing the SCC in an NE interrupts the communication between the NE and the U2000.

l

For the OptiX OSN 6800, the SCC is housed in IU18 by default. When IU17 is occupied by another board, SCC 1+1 protection cannot be configured. In this case, replacing the SCC in an NE interrupts the communication between the NE and the U2000.



Precautions

CAUTION l


l


l


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


565


8 Parts Replacement


The 1X3 jumper (namely, the battery jumper) on the SCC board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery. Make sure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper are capped. Then, cap pin 2 and of pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is out of work. The SCC board needs to be replaced.

Step 2 Review and record the current NE alarms. Step 3 Back up the NE database to the NMS server. This is to record the NE database for future reference when the SCC board is faulty. 1.


2.



3.


4.



5.



6.


7.


Step 4 Follow the steps below to query the system to obtain the user data of the NE. 1.


2.

Click Query.

3.





2.


3.


Step 6 If the NE is an ASON NE, query and record the node ID of the NE. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


566


8 Parts Replacement

1.


2.


3.







2.


3.


4.



5.



6.





2.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


567


8 Parts Replacement

3.


4.




2.


3.



4.




2.


3.


4.


5.

Click OK. NOTE


6.


7.



8.


9.

Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or rightclick the NE and choose NE Login. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed, enter lct and password in the User Name and Password fields, and then click OK.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


568


8 Parts Replacement

TIP




2.


3.


4.


5.





2.


3.




2.


3.


Step 17 According to the NE user data queried in Step 4,create an NE's user using the Web LCT. 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


569


8 Parts Replacement

6.

Click OK.

7.




2.


3.


4.





2.

Connect the network cable removed in Step 12. NOTE

After this procedure, you can use the original user name and password to access the NE using the U2000. NOTE

After recovering the network connection of the NE, the WRG_BD_TYPE alarm is cleared on the U2000.

Step 20 If the software version of the spare SCC board is different from the software version of the SCC board to be replaced, go to Step 21; otherwise, go to Step 22. Step 21 Upgrade or downgrade the software of the spare SCC board. For details, see the Upgrade Guide. Ensure that the software version of the spare SCC board is consistent with that of the SCC board to be replaced. Step 22 Restore the NE database from the NMS server. 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

570


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE


7.


8.

In the Operation Confirmation dialog, click Yes to start the recovery operation. The recovery operation status is displayed in the NE View table. NOTE


CAUTION During the process from backing up databases to restoring databases, do not modify the NE configurations to avoid database inconsistency. Step 23 Activate the NE database. 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

icon in Deliver To Board Activate. This icon is changed to . Optional: Click the Click Start to start the database activation process. The progress of the database activation is displayed on the NE View tab. NOTE




2.


3.


4.


5.


6.





2.


3.

Click OK.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


571


4.

8 Parts Replacement





8.3.3.2 Replacing the SCC with the Database Backed Up to a CF Card When replacing an SCC board, you can back up the NE database to a CF card. In this manner, you can restore the NE database from the CF card after replacing the SCC board.

Prerequisites l


Impact on the System Replacing the SCC board does not affect traditional services, but ASON services may be affected for a short time when configurations are restored by downloading the database. The impact caused by replacing an SCC without protection is as follows: l

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, the SCC is housed in IU28 by default. If another board is installed in IU11, SCC 1+1 protection cannot be configured. In this case, replacing the SCC in an NE interrupts the communication between the NE and the U2000.

l

For the OptiX OSN 6800, the SCC is housed in IU18 by default. When IU17 is occupied by another board, SCC 1+1 protection cannot be configured. In this case, replacing the SCC in an NE interrupts the communication between the NE and the U2000.


Background Information Before replacing an SCC board with a spare SCC board, set the battery jumper on the spare board according to the procedure described in 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper on the SCC. Clear the database on the spare SCC board before starting the replacement. Use setting jumpers on the spare board to configure the BIOS running mode and clear the database. Set the BIOS Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


572


8 Parts Replacement

jumper on the spare board according to the procedure described in 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper on the SCC. The four jumpers used for setting the BIOS running mode are arranged in order from high to low values and are identified as 04, 03, 02, and 01. The setting for each jumper corresponds to a binary value of either 0 or 1. When a jumper is not capped, the setting corresponds to binary 0. When the jumper is capped, the setting corresponds to binary 1. The settings of the four jumpers can be arranged in 16 different combinations, representing the values 0 to 15 in the decimal system. The default setting of the four jumpers is 0000. Ignore the alarms that are reported during SCC board replacement.

Precautions

CAUTION l If the NE where the SCC to be replaced resides is an ASON NE, the Node ID of the NE must be set according to the original data after the SCC is replaced. Otherwise, the ASON service cannot be restored. l After the database of the NE is restored on the CF card, the restoration must be completed within two hours after you install the replacement SCC is installed. If you wait more than two hours to restore the database of the NE on the CF card, the data automatically saved on the NE overwrites the original data stored on the CF card. If the original data is overwritten, the original database of the NE cannot be restored. l Operations on the U2000 must be performed in the network management center. l Operations on the Web LCT must be performed on site.


The 1X3 jumper (namely, the battery jumper) on the SCC board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery. Make sure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper are capped. Then, cap pin 2 and pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is out of work. The SCC board needs to be replaced.

Step 2 Review and record the current NE alarms. Step 3 Backup the database on the U2000. 1.

In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu, and the NE Configuration interface is displayed.

2.

In the Object Tree, select an NE and click

3.

Select one or more NEs in the NE Configuration.

4.

Click Back Up NE Data and then choose Manually Back Up Database to CF Card.

5.

Click OK in the Confirm dialog box.

6.

Click Close in the Result dialog box is displayed.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

.


573


8 Parts Replacement

Step 4 Wait four minutes later, and query the system to obtain the user data of the NE by following the steps below. 1.


2.

Click Query.

3.





2.


3.




2.


3.







2.


3.


4.



5.



6. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Click Close in the displayed Result dialog box. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

574


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE






2.


3.


4.




2.


3.



4.



Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE List. The Search NE dialog box is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

575


8 Parts Replacement

2.


3.


4.


5.

Click OK. NOTE


6.


7.



8.


9.





2.


3.


4.


5.





2.


3.


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


576


8 Parts Replacement



2.


3.


Step 18 According to the NE user data queried in Step 4,create an NE's user using the Web LCT. 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.



6.

Click OK.

7.




2.


3.


4.




Pull out the network cable which connected the NM_ETH1 port to the Web LCT.

2.


After this procedure, you can use the original user name and password to access the NE using the U2000. NOTE

After recovering the network connection of the NE, the WRG_BD_TYPE alarm is cleared on the U2000.

Step 21 After the SCC board is started, remove the SCC board inserted just now. Insert the CF card that has been removed in Step 10 into the CF card slot on the SCC board. Then, insert the SCC. Step 22 If the software version of the spare SCC board is different from the software version of the SCC board to be replaced, go to Step 23, otherwise go to Step 24. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


577


8 Parts Replacement

Step 23 Upgrade or downgrade the software of the spare SCC board. For details, see the Upgrade Guide. Ensure that the software version of the spare SCC board is consistent with that of the SCC board to be replaced. Step 24 Restore the initial database of the NE using the U2000. 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Click OK to start to restore the NE database.

.

NOTE


6.





2.


3.


4.


5.


6.





2.


3.

Click OK.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


578


4.

8 Parts Replacement





8.3.3.3 Replacing the Board After Configuring SCC 1+1 Protection If the slot designated for the standby SCC board is vacant and will not house a service board, you can replace the properly-functioning SCC board by installing the new SCC board in the vacant slot and then performing an active/standby switchover on the SCC boards.

Prerequisites l


l


Impact on the System The replacement does not affect the existing services. The impact caused by replacing an SCC without protection is as follows: l


l

For the OptiX OSN 6800, the SCC is housed in IU18 by default. When IU17 is not occupied by another board, it is available for another SCC to implement 1+1 protection with the SCC in IU18. In this case, replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the communication between the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from this SCC to the other SCC is performed.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials ESD bag, U2000, multimeter, Web LCT Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


579


8 Parts Replacement


Precautions

CAUTION l


l


l




Step 2 Back up the NE database to the NMS server. This is to record the NE database for future reference when the SCC board is replaced. 1.


2.



3.


4.

Select the option NMS Server or NMS Client to backup the selected device information.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


580


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE


5.


6.


7.



Step 3 Set the jumpers on the spare SCC board using the following methods and insert it to the specified slot for a standby SCC board. In this manner, the file system of the new SCC board is formatted. NOTE

After inserting the spare SCC board to the specified slot for a standby SCC board, you need to add a corresponding logical board on the U2000. Then, the system automatically configures 1+1 protection for the SCC.

1.

Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to 1111 so as to clear all the data in the flash memory except the board manufacturing information. 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper on the SCC shows the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board.

2.

Insert the spare SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board, and wait for 15 minutes to allow the file system to be formated.

Step 4 After the file system of the SCC board is formated completely, remove the board. Remove the jumper caps which are shown in Step 3. After that, reinsert this SCC board to the slot. Step 5 View the indicators on the front panel of the new board. It takes approximately 90 minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator is not steady green, you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. For details about the indicators, see Board Indicators. Step 6 Follow the steps below to perform an active/standby switching on the U2000. 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000. Check if services are normal. If services are normal, there must be no new abnormal alarms or performances. The switching is successful. NOTE

After you start the new SCC board, the system automatically synchronizes the data between the existing SCC board and the new SCC board. After data backup completes, you can perform the preceding step to initiate active/standby switching.

Step 7 Check and set the other parameters on the U2000 to ensure that the parameter values of the new board are the same as the original data. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


581


8 Parts Replacement

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Enable the NE performance monitoring. NOTE




2.


3.

Click OK.

4.




CAUTION The standard voltage of the battery is 3.6 V. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be replaced. Step 9 Remove the physical SCC board and put it in an ESD bag. Then, on the U2000, delete the logical board of the SCC board to be replaced. ----End

8.3.4 Replacing the SCC in a Slave Subrack This section describes how to replace an SCC board in a slave subrack.

Prerequisites You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Impact on the System Replacing the SCC does not affect the existing services. If the SCC is configured with 1+1 protection, replacing the SCC does not affect the system. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


582


8 Parts Replacement

If an SCC is not configured with 1+1 protection, replacing the SCC has the following effects: l

The fan is automatically changed to the "High Speed" mode.

l

The ESC and OSC communication of the subrack where the replacement SCC resides fails. NOTE

For an NE where only one SCC is configured, change the SCC board type on the U2000 before replacing the SCC.

l

The POWER_FAIL alarm of the subrack where the replacement SCC resides cannot be reported.

l

The subrack whose ID conflicts with the ID of the subrack where the replacement SCC resides cannot be detected.

l

Certain optical boards in the slave subrack housing the SCC board to be replaced go offline and cannot be managed; however, the services on these boards are not affected.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials ESD bag, U2000, multimeter




Step 2 Review and record the current NE alarms. Step 3 On the NMS, enable the removal indication function for the board to be replaced. For details, see Enabling the Function of Board Removal Indication. NOTE

For the boards supporting the removal indication function, see Board Indicators.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


583


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE




2.


3.


4.



5.



6.



Step 5 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For more information regarding how to replace a board, refer to "step 4, step 5, and step 6" of Procedure of Replacing a Board. Step 6 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board to set the BIOS running mode. Then insert the SCC board to the slot housing the original SCC board to format the file system of the new SCC board. 1.


2.


Step 7 After the file system of the SCC board is formated completely, remove the board. Remove the jumper caps which are shown in Step 6. After that, reinsert this SCC board to the slot. Step 8 Wait ten minutes. If the U2000 reports a SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT alarm, a software upgrade is required for the replacement. For details, see Upgrade Guide. Step 9 View the indicators on the front panel of the new board. It takes approximately 90 minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator is not steady green, you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. For details about the indicators, see Board Indicators. NOTE

After the new board works normally, the WRG_BD_TYPE alarm will be cleared on the U2000.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


584


8 Parts Replacement



2.


3.

Click OK.

4.





8.4 Replacing the TN16XCH Board This section describes how to replace TN16XCH board.

8.4.1 Setting the Battery Jumper on the TN16XCH Board This section describes how to set the battery jumper on the spare TN16XCH board before replacing the TN16XCH board. The battery on the TN16XCH helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of the TN16XCH. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper. Figure 8-19 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN16XCH board.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


585


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-19 Position of the battery jumper on the TN16XCH board

J1 CPU

Battery Jumper

321

CF Card

Figure 8-20 shows the power jumper. Figure 8-20 battery jumper

Not used

Used

3

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

2

1


586


8 Parts Replacement

8.4.2 Replacing the TN16XCH Board in a Master Subrack This section describes how to replace the TN16XCH board of the master subrack when TN16XCH 1+1 protection is configured.

Prerequisites l

You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

l


Impact on the System Replacing an TN16XCH board configured with protection does not affect the existing services. For TN16XCH 1+1 protection, replacing one of the TN16XCH in the protection group does not interrupt the communication between the NE where the TN16XCH resides and the U2000 after a switching from this TN16XCH to the other TN16XCH is performed.

Tools, Equipment and Materials ESD bag, U2000, multimeter

Background Information Before an TN16XCH board is replaced with a spare board, the battery jumper on the spare TN16XCH board must be set with reference to Setting the Jumper on the TN16XCH Board. In addition, the file system on the spare TN16XCH board must be formated before the replacement. This can be achieved by setting the BIOS running mode to 1111 through DIP switch on the spare TN16XCH board reference to Setting the Jumper on the TN16XCH Board.

Procedure Step 1 Select a spare TN16XCH board as the replacement board. Ensure that the spare TN16XCH board and the TN16XCH board to be replaced have the same name and type. NOTE

The 1 x 3 jumper (namely, the battery jumper) on the TN16XCH board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper are capped. Then, cap pin 2 and pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is not working. The TN16XCH board needs to be replaced.

Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Step 3 Back up the NE database to the NMS server. This is to record the NE database for future reference when the TN16XCH board is replaced. 1.


2.



3. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Select Backup... to open the Backup dialog. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

587


4.

8 Parts Replacement



5.


6.


7.



Step 4 Follow the steps below to review the working state of the board to be replaced. 1.


2.

Click Query.



2.


3.


4.


5.




Step 8 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For more information regarding how to remove a board, refer to "step 4, step 5, and step 6" of Procedure of Replacing a Board. Step 9 Set the DIP switch on the spare TN16XCH board to set the BIOS running mode and then insert the TN16XCH board to the slot housing the original TN16XCH board. In this manner, the database on the new TN16XCH board is cleared. 1.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Set the BIOS running mode of the spare TN16XCH board to 1111 to format the file system in the flash memory. Setting the Jumper on the TN16XCH Board shows the settings of the DIP switch on the TN16XCH board. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

588


2.

8 Parts Replacement

Insert the spare TN16XCH board to the slot housing the original TN16XCH board. Wait for 15 minutes to allow the database to be cleared.

Step 10 After the database on the new TN16XCH board is cleared, remove it. In addition, reset the DIP switch to the 0000 state which is shown in Step 9. Then reinsert this TN16XCH board to the slot. Step 11 Review the indicators of the new board. It takes 90 minutes for a board to work normally after the board is inserted. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator gives an abnormal indication, reinsert the board or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Indicators". Step 12 Optional: Follow the steps below to switch the active/standby state of the SCCs back to the original state. 1.


2.


3.


After the new TN16XCH board is started, the system automatically backs up the data on the existing TN16XCH board to the new TN16XCH board. After the data is backed up, you can perform the preceding step to initiate an active/standby switching.



2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Check whether the switching state is correct. Perform a switching test. NOTE


Step 14 Query the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000. 1.


2.


3.

Click OK.

4.


You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records, or rightclick to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the NE.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


589


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE

After the TN16XCH is replaced, ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs, and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff, the battery of the TN16XCH board is abnormal, determine if the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. If yes, use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is not working. The board needs to be replaced.


8.4.3 Replacing the TN16XCH Board in a Slave Subrack This section describes how to replace TN16XCH board in a slave subrack.


Impact on the System Replacing the TN16XCH does not affect the existing services and system.

Tools, Equipment and Materials ESD bag, U2000, multimeter

Background Information Before TN16XCH board is replaced with a spare board, the battery jumper on the spare TN16XCH board must be set. Reference to Setting the Jumper on the TN16XCH Board for more information.

Procedure Step 1 Select a spare TN16XCH board as the replacement board. Ensure that the spare TN16XCH board and the TN16XCH board to be replaced have the same name and type. NOTE

The 1 x 3 jumper (namely, the battery jumper) on the TN16XCH board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 of this jumper are capped. Then, cap pin 2 and pin 3 on the jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is not working. The TN16XCH board needs to be replaced.

Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Step 3 Follow the steps below to review the working state of the board to be replaced. 1.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

590


2.

8 Parts Replacement

Click Query.



2.


3.


4.


5.




Step 7 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For more information regarding how to remove a board, refer to "step 4, step 5, and step 6" of Procedure of Replacing a Board. Step 8 Review the indicators of the new board. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator gives an abnormal indication, reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators". Step 9 Query the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000. 1.


2.


3.

Click OK.

4.



After the TN16XCH is replaced, ensure that the monitoring of the POWER_FAIL alarm is enabled. If the POWER_FAIL alarm occurs, and the alarm parameter is 0x5 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff, the battery of the TN16XCH board is abnormal, determine if the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. If yes, use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is not working. The board needs to be replaced.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


591


8 Parts Replacement


8.5 Replacing the Cross-Connect Board This section describes how to replace the Cross-Connect boards. You can replace the Cross-Connect board if: l

The Cross-Connect board 1+1 protection is configured.

l

There is no protection for the Cross-Connect board.

8.5.1 Substitution Relationships This section describes the substitution relationships of the cross-connect board. The following board has substitution relationships.

SXM Table 8-7 Substitution rules of the SXM board Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TNK2SXM

TNK4SXM

The TNK4SXM can be created as TNK2SXM on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TNK4SXM functions as the TNK2SXM.

TNK4SXM

None

None

XCH TN52XCH and TN16XCH are the versions of this boards. The description of replacing the TN16XCH board will be described separately because its functions are different from those of a common cross-connect board.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


592


8 Parts Replacement

XCT Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TNK2XCT

TNK4XCT

The TNK4XCT can be created as TNK2XCT on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TNK4XCT functions as the TNK2XCT.

TNK4XCT

None

None

8.5.2 Under Board 1+1 Protection This section describes how to replace the cross-connect board when cross-connect board 1+1 protection is configured.


Impact on System When cross-connect 1+1 board protection is configured, replacing the cross-connect board brings no impact on the services in case of a normal switching. During board replacement, the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. At this point, the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators".

Tools, Equipment, and Materials ESD bag, U2000

Procedure Step 1 Select a spare board. Ensure the name, version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original. NOTE

If the version is inconsistent, determine if the board with different versions can be replaced.

Step 2 Query and record the current alarms on the NE. Check whether the BUS_ERR alarm has occurred to the subrack where the cross-connect board is located. If it has occurred, clear the alarm before the replacement. Otherwise, replacing the board causes a service interruption. Step 3 Perform an active/standby switching on the U2000.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


593


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE

For OptiX OSN 8800 T32, assume that the cross-connect board to be replaced in slot 9 is the active crossconnect board, and that the cross-connect board in slot 10 works normally and no BUS_ERR alarm is generated on the subrack. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64, assume that the cross-connect board to be replaced in slot 9 (slot 10) is the active cross-connect board, and that the cross-connect board in slot 43 (slot 44) works normally and no BUS_ERR alarm is generated on the subrack. NOTE

For OptiX OSN 6800, assume that the XCS board to be replaced is located in slot 9 and it is the main XCS board, and that the XCS board in slot 10 works normally and the subrack where it is located has no BUS_ERR alarm.

1.


2.


3.

In Board 1+1 Protection, right-click the desired Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection . Select Working/Protection Switching from the shortcut menu. Click OK in the window displayed.

4.


5.



For the boards supporting the removal indication function, see Board Indicators . NOTE


Step 5 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For details about how to replace a board, see "step 4, step 5, and step 6" of Procedure of Replacing a Board. NOTE


Step 6 Check the indicators of the new board. It takes four or five minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady on green. If the indicator is not steady on green, you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. For details about the indicators, see "Indicators". Step 7 Follow the steps below to cancel the switching. 1.


2.


3.

In Board 1+1 Protection, right-click the desired Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection. Select Working/Protection Switching from the shortcut menu. Click OK in the window displayed.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


594


8 Parts Replacement

Step 8 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE. Confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. ----End

8.5.3 Under No Protection This section describes how to replace the cross-connect board when no protection is configured.


Impact on System When you replace the cross-connect board without protection, that is, the only cross-connect board (suppose it is in IU9) on an NE. l

For OptiX OSN 6800, – When IU10 is occupied by other boards, cross-connect board protection cannot be configured. Replacement of the cross-connect board causes interruption of traditional services. − If the NE whose cross-connect board needs to be replaced is an intermediate NE of electrical-layer ASON services, optimize the electrical-layer ASON services traversing the NE to other paths (the preset restoration paths are preferred if the preset restoration paths of the services do not traverse the NE) before board replacement. Then, switch the services back to the original paths after board replacement and verify that the services are running correctly. − If the NE whose cross-connect board needs to be replaced is an NE where electricallayer ASON services are added or dropped, the services will be interrupted during board replacement. – When IU10 is not occupied by other boards, it is available for another cross-connect board to realize 1+1 protection with the cross-connect board in IU10. When the crossconnect board has 1+1 protection and when the switching is normal, replacement of the cross-connect board does not cause service interruption

During board replacement, the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. At this point, the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators".




Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


595


8 Parts Replacement

Step 3 For OptiX OSN 6800, if IU10 is not occupied by other boards, insert another cross-connect board in IU10 and add a corresponding logical board on the U2000. Then the system automatically configures the cross-connect board 1+1 protection. For steps to replace an crossconnect board that is configured with board 1+1 protection, see 8.5.2 Under Board 1+1 Protection. Step 4 On the NMS, enable the removal indication function for the board to be replaced. For details, see Enabling the Function of Board Removal Indication. NOTE



Step 5 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For details about how to remove a board, see "step 4, step 5, and step 6" of Procedure of Replacing a Board. NOTE


Step 6 Check the indicators of the new board. It takes four or five minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady on green. If the indicator is not steady on green, you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. For details about the indicators, see "Indicators" . Step 7 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE. Confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. ----End

8.6 Replacing the Raman Amplifier Board This section describes how to replace the Raman amplifier board.

Prerequisites You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. Be aware of the laser security level, potential injuries and protective precautions. Confirm the amount of the adopted Raman amplifier board. Be familiar with the fiber connection between the local Raman amplifier board and the remote board. Be familiar with the location of the connector. Take the drawings into the room.

Impact on the System Replacement of boards that process services causes interruption of traditional services. If ASON services traverse the board to be replaced, optimize the ASON services traversing the board to other paths (the preset restoration paths of the services are preferred if they do not traverse the board to be replaced) before board replacement. For optical-layer ASON services, the new paths must be commissioned; otherwise, the services may be interrupted. After board replacement, switch the ASON services back to the original paths. If no other paths are available during board replacement, the ASON services will be interrupted. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


596


8 Parts Replacement


Precautions

WARNING When replacing the Raman amplifier board or before removing or inserting the Raman amplifier board shut down the pump laser on the CRPC/RAU1. Otherwise, the laser may bring damage to human body.



Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Step 3 Disabling the IPA. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Query to query the created IPA information. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

3.

Select the IPA that you want to enable or disable, double-click the field of IPA Status, and set the value to Enabled or Disabled.

4.

Click Apply. The Warning dialog box is displayed and click Yes. The Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close.

5.

In the NE Explorer of the opposite NE, repeat the steps above.

Step 4 Shutting down the Raman laser. 1.

Double-click the Optical NE icon on the Main Topology. The NE Panel tab is displayed. Right-click the NE icon and select NE Explorer.

2.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM interface from the Function Tree.

3.

Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Channel from the drop-down list.

4.

In the Basic Attributes tab, double-click the Laser Status field of the port. Then choose On or Off from the drop-down list to change the laser state.

5.

Click Apply. l After you open the laser, the You are starting up to a high power Optical Fiber Communications System. You must ensure that the fiber is continuous. Do you wish to continue and enable this system? dialog box is displayed. Click OK. Then, click Close on the Operation Result dialog box.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


597


8 Parts Replacement

l After you close the laser, the You can turn on a laser again only when the board belongs to an IPA pair. Continue? dialog box is displayed. Click OK. Then, click Close on the displayed Operation Result dialog box. Step 5 Replacing the Raman amplifier board. 1.

Disconnect the fibers at the LINE port and the SYS port.

2.

Remove the Raman amplifier board and put it into the ESD bag.

3.

Insert the new Raman amplifier board.

4.

Connect the fibers at the LINE port and the SYS port.

Step 6 View the indicators on the front panel of the new board. It takes approximately three or four minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the RUN indicator is green. If the indicator is not green, reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. For details about the indicators, see "Indicators". Step 7 Enable the IPA function and turn on the Raman laser. Check whether the on-off gain of the Raman amplifier board complies with the specification requirement for the on-off gain of the board. If not, adjust the on-off gain of the board. NOTE

On-off gain = Optical power on the SYS interface when the laser is enabled - Optical power on the SYS interface when the Raman laser is disabled

Step 8 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE. Confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. Step 9 Check and ensure that the traffic is correct. NOTE

If there are any other problems, contact Huawei.

----End

8.7 Replacing the PID Board This section describes how to replace the PID board. Methods of replacing the PID board are described under the following scenarios: l

Replacing the ENQ2/NPO2/NPO2E board.

l

Replacing the PQ2 Sub-board

8.7.1 Replacing the ENQ2/NPO2/NPO2E Board This section describes how to replace the ENQ2/NPO2/NPO2E Board. Methods of replacing the ENQ2/NPO2/NPO2E board are described under the following scenarios: l

ODUk SNCP is configured.

l

There is no protection for the PID board.

8.7.1.1 Under ODUk SNCP Protection This section describes how to replace a PID board when ODUk SNCP protection is configured. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


598


8 Parts Replacement

Prerequisites For the operations on the NMS, you must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Impact on System When ODUk SNCP protection is configured, replacing a PID board generally brings no service interruption. During board replacement, the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. At this point, the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators".

Tools, Equipment, and Materials ESD wrist strap, ESD bag, U2000, optical power meter

Background In the following scenarios, when a PID board works with an OBU1P1 board on an NE, check the optical power of the PID board before you replace the PID board to avoid optical power overload during board replacement: l

When a TN55NPO2L06 or TN55NPO2L08 board needs to be replaced on a 200 Gbit/s NE configured with a PID board, ensure received optical power of each channel is lower than 0 dBm.

l

When an ENQ2 board needs to be replaced on a 120 Gbit/s NE configured with a PID board, ensure received optical power of each channel is lower than 1 dBm.

When substituting the TN55NPO2 board for the TN54NPO2 board, you must configure the PQ2 sub-board to support four wavelengths. For details on board substitution relationships, see the following table. New Board

Original

TN54NPO201

TN55NPO2S01+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO202

TN55NPO2S02/TN55NPO2L02+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO203

TN55NPO2S03+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO204


TN54NPO205

TN55NPO2S05+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO206


TN54NPO207

TN55NPO2S07+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO208


NOTE

When you replace the NPO2/NPO2E board and the ENQ2 board at the same time, it is recommended to replace the NPO2/NPO2E board first.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


599


8 Parts Replacement

Precautions

CAUTION When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of an NPO2 or NPO2E board, loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point; otherwise, the receiver optical module will be burned and damaged.

Procedure 1.

Select a spare board. Ensure the name, version, and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board. If the version is inconsistent, you need to determine if the board with a different versions can be replaced.

2.

Review and record the current alarms on the NE. NOTE

To replace a board in an upgrade, perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. If there are abnormal alarms, handle these alarms before replacing the board.

3.

Test the input optical power. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point; otherwise, the receiver optical module will be burned and damaged. For this procedure, refer to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter.

4.

Query the working status of each channel on the board to be replaced. a.

In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Click the SNCP Service Control tab.

b.

Click Query to obtain the SNCP protection state of each NE. Then, you can determine whether the service is working on the active path or working on the standby path.

5.

If the board is the current working board, go to 6. If the board is the current protection board, go to 9.

6.

If the board to be replaced is the current working board, follow the steps below to perform active/standby switching on the U2000. NOTE

The channel status of the protection board must be normal. Otherwise, replacing the faulty board causes a service interruption. NOTE

If an NPO2/NPO2E board needs to be replaced, switch services on the working channels of the PID boards to protection channels. If an ENQ2 board needs to be replaced, switch services on the working channel only over the ENQ2 board to the protection channel.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

a.


b.

Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

c.

Click SNCP Service Control tab.

d.

Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Manual to Protection from the menu displayed. Click OK on the interface displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

600


8 Parts Replacement

e.

Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Query Switching Status from the menu displayed. If Manual(from working to protection) switching state is displayed in the Status field, the switching succeeds.

f.

Query the U2000 for the alarms and performance events. Make sure that there are no new alarms or performance events and services are normal but only protection switching alarm.

7.

At the opposite end perform manual switching on the U2000 to ensure that the working channel is at the opposite end and is consistent with that at the local end. For information about how to perform manual switching, see 6.

8.

On the NMS, enable the removal indication function for the board to be replaced. For details, see Enabling the Function of Board Removal Indication. NOTE



9.

Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. a.

Remove the pigtail connected to the optical port and remove the board to be replaced. If the PQ2 sub-board also needs to be replaced, go to 9.3. If the PQ2 sub-board does not need to be replaced, go to 9.2.

b.

Loosen the screws on the PQ2 sub-board and remove the board. Install the PQ2 subboard on the new board and tighten the screws on the PQ2 sub-board.

c.

Insert the new board to the original slot. For details on how to remove and insert a new board, see "step 4, step 5, and step 6" of Procedure of Replacing a Board.

d.

After the board replacement is complete, clean the fiber connector using a fiber cleaning tissue and reconnect the pigtail to the optical port based on the fiber labels. NOTE


10. Review the indicators of the new board. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator of the PID board and the PQ2 subboard is green. If the indicator gives an abnormal indication, reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators". 11. Release the switching on the local and opposite NEs. a.


b.

Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management in the Function Tree.

c.


d.

Select the switched service, and click Function on the right-hand interface. Select Clear from the menu displayed.

e.

Click Query, and review Status. If the value is Normal State, the switching succeeds.

12. Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. Ensure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


601


8 Parts Replacement

a.

Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000, and then click the Current Performance Data tab.

b.

Choose the desired boards in the left pane, and click the double-right-arrow button (red).

c.

Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition.

d.

In Monitor Period, select 15-Minute.

e.

Click Count option button. Select options under Performance Event Type, and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options.

f.

Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side.

g.

In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close to finish the operation.

h.

In the Monitored Object, FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC.

13. Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE. Confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. NOTE

The ENQ2 board does not support the PQ2 sub-board. To replace an ENQ2 board, perform steps 1, 2, 4– 10, and 12. For OptiX OSN 8800, when the Restart Mode of PID IPA is set to Manual, a manual restart at two stations is required after the board is replaced. For more information about the restarting the PID IPA, refer to Restarting of PID IPA.

8.7.1.2 Under No Protection This section describes how to replace a PID board when no protection is configured.


Impact on System Replacing a PID board without protection will interrupt services. Replacing only a PQ2 subboard will interrupt channels 5 to 8 on the NPO2 or NPO2E board. During board replacement, the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. At this point, the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators".


Background In the following scenarios, when a PID board works with an OBU1P1 board on an NE, check the optical power of the PID board before you replace the PID board to avoid optical power overload during board replacement: Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


602


8 Parts Replacement

l


l



Original

TN54NPO201

TN55NPO2S01+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO202


TN54NPO203

TN55NPO2S03+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO204


TN54NPO205

TN55NPO2S05+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO206


TN54NPO207

TN55NPO2S07+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO208


NOTE


Precautions

CAUTION When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of an NPO2 or NPO2E board, loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point; otherwise, the receiver optical module will be burned and damaged.

Procedure 1.

Select a spare board. Ensure the name, version, and software version of the new board are the same as those of the original board. If the version is inconsistent, determine if the board with different versions can be replaced.

2.

Review and record the current alarms on the NE.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


603


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE


3.

Test the input optical power. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point; otherwise, the receiver optical module will be burned and damaged. For the procedure, refer to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter.

4.

On the NMS, enable the removal indication function for the board to be replaced. For details, see Enabling the Function of Board Removal Indication. NOTE



5.

Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. a.

Remove the pigtail connected to the optical port and remove the board to be replaced. If the PQ2 sub-board also needs to be replaced, go to 5.3. If the PQ2 sub-board does not need to be replaced, go to 5.2.

b.

Loosen the screws on the PQ2 sub-board and remove the board. Install the PQ2 subboard on the new board and tighten the screws on the PQ2 sub-board.

c.

Insert the new board to the original slot. For details on how to remove and insert a new board, see "step 4, step 5, and step 6" of Procedure of Replacing a Board.

d.

After board replacement is complete, clean the fiber connector using a fiber cleaning tissue and reconnect the pigtail to the optical port based on the fiber labels. NOTE


6.

Review the indicators of the new board. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator of the PID board and the PQ2 subboard is green. If the indicator gives an abnormal indication, reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators".

7.

Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. Ensure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

a.

Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000, and then click the Current Performance Data tab.

b.

Choose the desired boards in the left pane, and click the double-right-arrow button (red).

c.

Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition.

d.

In Monitor Period, select 15-Minute.

e.

Click Count option button. Select options under Performance Event Type, and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options.

f.

Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side.

g.

In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close to finish the operation. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

604


h. 8.

8 Parts Replacement

In the Monitored Object, FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC.

Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE. Confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. NOTE

For OptiX OSN 8800, when the Restart Mode of PID IPA is set to Manual, a manual restart at two stations is required after the board is replaced. For more information about restarting the PID IPA, refer to Restarting of PID IPA.

8.7.2 Replacing the PQ2 Sub-board This section describes how to replace the ENQ2/NPO2/NPO2E Board. Methods of replacing the PQ2 sub-board are described under the following scenarios: l

ODUk SNCP is configured.

l

There is no protection for the PID board.

8.7.2.1 Under ODUk SNCP Protection This section describes how to replace a PID board when ODUk SNCP protection is configured.


Impact on System When ODUk SNCP protection is configured, replacing a PID board generally brings no service interruption. During board replacement, the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. At this point, the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators".




l


When substituting the TN55NPO2 board for the TN54NPO2 board, you must configure the PQ2 sub-board to support four wavelengths. For details on board substitution relationships, see the following table. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


605


8 Parts Replacement

New Board

Original

TN54NPO201

TN55NPO2S01+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO202


TN54NPO203

TN55NPO2S03+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO204


TN54NPO205

TN55NPO2S05+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO206


TN54NPO207

TN55NPO2S07+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO208


NOTE


Precautions

CAUTION When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of an NPO2 or NPO2E board, loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point; otherwise, the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged.

Procedure 1.


To replace a board in an upgrade, perform this operation to determine if abnormal alarms are generated on the NE where the board to be replaced resides and the downstream NE. If there are abnormal alarms, you need to handle these alarms before replacing the board.

2.

Query the working status of the NPO2/NPO2E board where the PQ2 sub-board resides. a.

In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Click the SNCP Service Control tab.

b.

Click Query to obtain the SNCP protection state of each NE. Then, you can learn the service is working on active path or working on standby path.

3.

If the board is the working NPO2 or NPO2E board, go to 4. If the board is the protection NPO2 or NPO2E board, go to 6.

4.

If the NPO2/NPO2E board where the PQ2 sub-board to be replaced resides is the working board, perform manual switching on the NPO2/NPO2E board in U2000. NOTE

In this step, you need to switch services on all working channels of PID boards to protection channels.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


606


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE

The channel status of the protection board must be normal. Otherwise, replacing the faulty board causes a service interruption.

a.


b.

Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

c.


d.

Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Manual to Protection from the menu displayed. Click OK on the interface displayed.

e.

Click Function on the right-hand interface and select Query Switching Status from the menu displayed. If Manual(from working to protection) switching state is displayed in the Status field, the switching succeeds.

f.

Query the U2000 for the alarms and performance events. Make sure that there are no new alarms or performance events and services are normal but only protection switching alarm.

5.

At the opposite end perform manual switching on the U2000 to ensure that the working channel at the opposite end is consistent with that at the local end. For how to perform manual switching, see 4.

6.

Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the PQ2 sub-board. a.

Loosen the screws on the PQ2 sub-board and remove the board.

b.

Install the new PQ2 sub-board on the original board and tighten the screws on the PQ2 sub-board.

7.

Review the indicators of the new board. It takes three minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator of the PQ2 sub-board is green. If the indicator gives abnormal indication, reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators".

8.

Release the switching on the local and opposite NEs.

9.

a.


b.

Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management in the Function Tree.

c.


d.

Select the switched service, and click Function on the right-hand interface. Select Clear from the menu displayed.

e.

Click Query, and review Status. If the value is Normal State, the switching succeeds.

Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE. Confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. NOTE


8.7.2.2 Under No Protection This section describes how to replace a PID board when no protection is configured. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


607


8 Parts Replacement


Impact on System Replacing a PID board without protection will interrupt services. Replacing only a PQ2 subboard will interrupt channels 5 to 8 on the NPO2 or NPO2E board. During board replacement, the board software takes several minutes to be synchronized. At this point, the PROG indicator on the board is blinking green quickly. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators".




l



Original

TN54NPO201

TN55NPO2S01+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO202


TN54NPO203

TN55NPO2S03+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO204


TN54NPO205

TN55NPO2S05+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO206


TN54NPO207

TN55NPO2S07+TN54PQ2

TN54NPO208


NOTE


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


608


8 Parts Replacement

Precautions

CAUTION When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of an NPO2 or NPO2E board, loosely connect the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point; otherwise, the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged.

Procedure 1.



2.

Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the PQ2 sub-board. a.

Loosen the screws on the PQ2 sub-board and remove the board.

b.

Install the new PQ2 sub-board on the original board and tighten the screws on the PQ2 sub-board.

3.

Review the indicators of the new board. It takes three minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator of the PQ2 sub-board is green. If the indicator gives abnormal indication, reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators".

4.

Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. NOTE


8.8 Replacing the AUX Board This section describes how to replace the AUX board.


Impact on System Replacing the AUX board does not affect services. When 1+1 protection is provided, replacing the AUX board does not interrupt the communication between the NE and the U2000. When 1+1 protection is not provided, replacing the AUX board interrupts the communication between the NE and the U2000, or the communication between the subrack where the AUX board is located and the U2000. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


609


8 Parts Replacement


Background Information (OptiX OSN 8800) There is no jumper inside the TN51AUX board.

Background Information (OptiX OSN 6800) The AUX board can be used to set the subrack ID. The setting is realized by jumpers. The TN11AUX01 board is available in two types. For one type there are three jumpers and for the other type there are eight jumpers inside the board. l

For the TN11AUX01 board that has three jumpers inside, the jumpers can be set in eight combinations, representing decimal values 0-7. The default setting of the three jumpers is 000. The value 0 indicates the master subrack, and the other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 8-21 shows the position of the three jumpers. When the two pins on the right of each jumper are capped, the setting is 1; when the two pins on the left of each jumper are capped, the setting is 0. As shown in Figure 8-21, the jumper setting represents the decimal value of 1, which means that the subrack ID is 1.

l

For the TN11AUX01 board that has eight jumpers inside, the J14, J17, and J18 jumpers are reserved and the two pins on the left of each reserved jumper must be capped. The J16, J15, J4, J3, and J2 jumpers can be set in 32 combinations, representing decimal values 0-31. The default setting of the five jumpers is 00000. The value 0 indicates the master subrack and the other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 8-22 shows the position of the jumpers. When the two pins on the right of each of the five jumpers are capped, the setting is 1; when the two pins on the left of each of the five jumpers are capped, the setting is 0. As shown in Figure 8-22, the jumper setting represents the decimal value of 1, which means that the subrack ID is 1.

The TN11AUX02 board has eight jumpers, which can be used to implement 32 states that represent decimal values 0-31. Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. In the TN11AUX02 board, the J14, J17, and J18 jumpers are reserved. The default value of the five jumpers is 00000. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 8-23 shows the jumpers on the board. For the master/slave subrack, the ID of the master subrack is set to 0. Others are slave subracks. The master/slave subrack cannot be configured by using the U2000.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


610


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-21 Position of the three jumpers on the TN11AUX01 board representing representing

0

representing

0

1

2

1

3

Junper cap

jumpers

1

3

2

CPU

Figure 8-22 Position of the eight jumpers on the TN11AUX01 board representing 0

representing 0

J3

J4

J2

representing 0

representing 0

J17

representing 1

representing 0

J15

J16 representing 0

representing 0

Junper cap J14

J18

J4

J3

J2

J17

J16

J15

J18

J14

jumpers

CPU

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


611


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-23 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02 board representing 0

representing 0

J3

J4

J2

representing 0

representing 0

J17

representing 1

representing 0

J15

J16 representing 0

representing 0

Junper cap J14

J18

J4

J3

J2

J17

J16

J15

J18

J14

jumpers

CPU

CAUTION The J14, J17, and J18 jumpers must be set as specified in Figure 8-22 and Figure 8-23. Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service interruption.

Precaution(OptiX OSN 3800) The TN21AUX has threejumpers. Figure 8-24 shows the jumpers.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


612


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-24 Position of the jumper on the TN21AUX

CPU

Jumper



Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Step 3 On the NMS, enable the removal indication function for the board to be replaced. For details, see Enabling the Function of Board Removal Indication. NOTE



Step 4 Inform the on-site maintenance engineer and replace the board. For details about how to replace a board, see "step 4, step 5, and step 6" of Procedure of Replacing a Board. NOTE

Before inserting a new AUX board to the original slot, make sure that jumper settings on the new AUX board are the same as those of the AUX board to be replaced. NOTE


Step 5 Review the indicators of the new board. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator gives an abnormal indication, reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators". Step 6 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE. Confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. ----End Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


613


8 Parts Replacement

8.9 Replacing the DCM This section describes how to replace the DCM.

Prerequisites None

Impact on the System Replacement of DCMs causes interruption of traditional services. If ASON services traverse the DCM to be replaced, optimize the ASON services traversing the DCM to other paths (the preset restoration paths of the services are preferred if they do not traverse the DCM to be replaced) before replacement. For optical-layer ASON services, the new paths must be commissioned; otherwise, the services may be interrupted. After replacement, switch the ASON services back to the original paths. If no other paths are available during replacement, the ASON services will be interrupted.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Phillips screwdriver and screw

Procedure Step 1 Loosen the screws from below on the DCM frame for fixing the DCM with the cross screwdriver. Remove the DCM from the DCM frame. NOTE

Each DCM frame can hold up to two DCMs. Each DCM requires four screws.

Step 2 Put a new DCM on the DCM frame. Tighten the screws to fix the DCM, as shown in Figure 8-25.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


614


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-25 Replacing the DCM on the DCM frame

1

2 3 4

1. DCM

2. DCM frame

3. Mounting ear

4. Screw

----End

8.10 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module This section describes how to replace the pluggable optical module (eSFP/XFP).


Impact on the System When you replace an eSFP or XFP, query whether the port of the optical module to be replaced is configured with protection. If it is not, replacement of the optical module causes interruption of traditional services. If electrical-layer ASON services traverse the port of the optical module to be replaced and the port is not configured with protection, optimize the electrical-layer ASON services traversing the port to other ports or other boards (the preset restoration paths of the services are preferred if they do not traverse the port of the optical module to be replaced) before module replacement. Then, switch the services back to the original paths after module replacement. If the port of the optical module to be replaced is configured with protection, module replacement does not affect services when the protection switching functions properly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials ESD bag, U2000, optical power meter Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


615


8 Parts Replacement

Precautions

CAUTION Before you connect a fiber to a pluggable optical module, test the input optical power of the module and confirm that the tested input optical power is within the normal range. Otherwise, the input optical power might cross the overload point and the receiver optical module will be burned and damaged. The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm, which must be considered with special caution to prevent the optical module from being burned or damaged.

Procedure Step 1 Select a spare pluggable optical module. The part number of the new pluggable optical module must be the same as the part number of the original. For details, see "Querying Optical Module Information". NOTE

For boards supporting TXFP modules, you can use a TXFP module when replacing the XFP module on these boards.

Step 2 Review and record the current NE alarms. Step 3 Query whether the ports of the optical module to be replaced are configured with protection. For details, see Replacing the Optical Transponder Board and Replacing the Tributary and Line Board. l

If the port of the optical module to be replaced is not configured with protection, go to Step 4.

l

If the port of the optical module to be replaced is configured with protection: – When you replace the optical module of the protection channel, go to Step 4. – When you replace the optical module of the working channel, perform a protection switching. For details, see Replacing the Optical Transponder Board and Replacing the Tributary and Line Board.

Step 4 Remove the fiber on the port of the optical module.

WARNING Cover the fiber with a protection cap immediately after you remove it. Step 5 Test the input optical power. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point; otherwise, the receiver optical module will be burned and damaged.For the procedure, see the "Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter" in Supporting Tasks. Step 6 Replace the fault optical module. For details, see Figure 8-26.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


616


8 Parts Replacement

NOTE

l Before removing an optical module, ensure that the fiber jumpers connected to the ports of the optical module are removed. l Before inserting an optical module, ensure that there are no fiber jumpers on the ports of the optical module.

Figure 8-26 Inserting and removing the eSFP/SFP/XFP

port

2 1 latch

Removing eSFP/SFP+/XFP 1.Pull out fibre connectors first before removing eSFP/SFP+/XFP. 2.Pull the safty latch to pull out eSFP/SFP+/XFP from the port. 3.Cover the optical port with cover.

eSFP/SFP+ XFP

Inserting eSFP/SFP+/XFP 1.Insert the eSFP/SFP+/XFP into the port.

Step 7 Check the wavelength of the new optical module on the U2000. Make sure the wavelength is the same as that of the original. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Select By Function, and select Band Type/Wavelength No./Wavelength(nm)/ Frequency(THz) from the drop-down list.

3.

Click Query to view Band Type/Wavelength No./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of each optical port. NOTE

If the replaced optical module is a tunable optical module, after the optical module is replaced, the SCC delivers the wavelength configuration of the original optical module automatically.

Step 8 Insert the fiber removed in Step 4. Step 9 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE. Confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. ----End

8.11 Replacing the EFI Frame This section describes how to replace the EFI frame in the OptiX OSN 6800. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


617


8 Parts Replacement

Impact on System If the ETH3 interface is in use, the communication between the ETH3 interface and the slave subrack or the CRPC/ROP board connected to the interface is interrupted during replacement of the EFI frame in the OptiX OSN 6800. If the LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface is in use, the corresponding alarm indicator on the cabinet does not light up in case of an alarm during the replacement. If the ALMO or ALMI interface is in use, the alarms generated during the replacement fail to be output by using the external equipment. The existing services, however, are not affected.

Tools, Equipment and Materials ESD bag, Philips screwdriver

Procedure Step 1 Select a new board. The model number of the new board must be the same as that of the original board. Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Step 3 Replace the EFI frame on site. For details, see Figure 8-27. Figure 8-27 Replacing the EFI frame

1.

Unfasten the screws on the plastic panel of the subrack to remove the panel.

2.

Record the matching relationship between each interface on the EFI frame and the cable connected to the interface, and then remove the cables.

3.

Unfasten the screws on the EFI frame to remove it gently, and then put it into an ESD bag.

4.

Insert the new EFI frame gently, and fasten the screws on it.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


618


8 Parts Replacement

5.

Connect the removed cables back to the corresponding interfaces according to the recorded matching relationship.

6.

Place the removed plastic panel back to the subrack, and use screws to fasten the plastic panel.


8.12 Replacing the EFI Board This section describes how to replace the EFI board in the OptiX OSN 8800.


Impact on the System Replacement of the EFI interrupts alarm signal input and output, communication among subracks, and communication between NE and U2000. In addition, services may be interrupted.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials ESD bag and U2000

Background Information Subrack ID can be set by DIP switch on EFI board. l

For OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The TN51EFI2 board is connected to the master subrack through the ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the TN51EFI1 board.

l

For OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The TN16EFI board is connected to the master subrack through the ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the TN16EFI board.

The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the TN51EFI1/TN16EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID5 are valid. ID6 -ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID5-ID1, by which a maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks Figure 8-28 shows the position of the DIP switches on the TN51EFI1 board, Figure 8-29shows the position of the DIP switches on the TN16EFI board. The value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 00001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1. When the DIP switch is toggle to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0. NOTE

For details about the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


619


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-28 Position of the DIP switches on the TN51EFI1 board

EFI1 CPLD

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON ON

SW1

ON ON ON ON

SW2

Figure 8-29 Position of the DIP switches on the TN16EFI board

U8 SERIAL

SW1

NM_ETH2

SW2

T1

(ID4)

(ID3)

(ID2)

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

(ID5)

(ID1)

(ID6)

ON

ON

(ID7) (ID8)

SW2

SW1 NOTE

The values of ID6 to ID8 are the same as those specified in Figure 8-29.

Figure 8-30 The ID of the subrack: 1-15 SW2

Subrack ID

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

1

ON

6

ON

ON

11

SW2

Subrack ID

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

ON

ON

ON

2

7

12

SW2

Subrack ID

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

3

ON

ON

ON

8

13

SW2

Subrack ID

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

4

ON

9

ON

ON

14

SW2

Subrack ID

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

5

ON

ON

ON

10

15

NOTE

When the ID of the subrack is from 1 to 15, ID5-ID8 of the SW1 must be toggle to ON.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


620


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-31 The ID of the subrack: 16-31 SW1

SW2

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Subrack ID

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

16

ON

19

ON

22

ON

25

ON

28

ON

SW1

SW2

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Subrack ID

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

17

ON

20

ON

23

ON

26

ON

29

ON

SW1

SW2

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Subrack ID

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON

18

ON

21

ON

24

ON

27

ON

30

ON

31

ON



Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Step 3 Follow the steps below to replace the EFI on site. 1.

Record the mapping relationships of the board interfaces and the cables and wires.

2.

Remove the cables and wires on the connectors.

3.

TN51EFI board: Loosen the screw at the top right corner of the board. TN16EFI board: Loosen two screws at the top corner of the board.

4.

Gently pull out the board and put it into the ESD bag.

5.

Before inserting a new EFI board to the original slot, ensure that the DIP switch on the new EFI board is the same as that of the EFI board to be replaced.

6.

Gently insert the new board.

7.

View the subrack ID displayed in the LCD screen on the front panel of the board to ensure that the subrack ID is correct. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and OptiX OSN 8800 T32, the subrack ID is displayed on the SCC board; For OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the subrack ID is displayed on the AUX board.

8.

TN51EFI board: Tighten the captive screw at the top right corner of the board. TN16EFI board: Tighten two captive screws at the top corner of the board.

9.

Connect the cables and wires on the connectors as recorded.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


621


8 Parts Replacement

Step 4 Verify that there are no faults on the board. Query the U2000 for alarms on the NE and ensure that the alarm detected in Step 2 is cleared. ----End

8.13 Replacing the PIU Board This section describes how to replace the PIU board.

Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Impact on the System When 1+1 backup is provided, replacing the standby PIU brings no impact on services.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials ESD bag, U2000, Phillips screwdriver, power meter

Precautions

WARNING Before replacing a PIU board, you must switch off the input power supply on the PIU board.

Procedure (OptiX OSN 6800/3800) Step 1 Select a spare board. Ensure the name, version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original. NOTE


Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Step 3 Switch off the corresponding power output switch on the DC power distribution unit on the top of the cabinet.

CAUTION l For OptiX OSN 6800, there are 6 power output switches on each of the right and left sides of the DC power distribution unit. Do shut down the corresponding switch. For details, refer to Quick Installation Guide. Step 4 Remove the power cables on the PIU board to be replaced. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


622


8 Parts Replacement

Step 5 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For details about how to replace a board, see "step 4, step 5, and step 6" of Procedure of Replacing a Board Step 6 After the replacement, attach the power cables back to the new PIU board. Switch on the corresponding power switch on the DC power distribution unit. Step 7 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE. Confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. ----End

Procedure (OptiX OSN 8800) Step 1 Select a spare board. Ensure the name, version and model number of the new board are the same as those of the original. NOTE


Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Step 3 Switch off the corresponding power output switch on the DC power distribution unit on the top of the cabinet.

CAUTION l For OptiX OSN 8800, there are 4 power output switches on each of the right and left sides of the DC power distribution unit. Do shut down the corresponding switch. For details, refer to Quick Installation Guide. You can use a power meter to verify there is no power on the line. Step 4 Remove the plastic cover on the power input terminal block on the PIU board by using the cross screwdrivers. Step 5 Unfasten the nuts on the power input terminals by using the cross screwdrivers and remove the power cables. Step 6 Follow the steps below to replace the PIU: 1.

Loosen the screw at the top right corner of the unit.

2.

Gently remove the unit, and put it into the ESD bag.

3.

Gently, insert the new PIU.

4.

Tighten the screw at the top right corner of the unit.

Step 7 After the replacement, attach the power cables back to the new PIU board. Switch on the corresponding power switch on the DC power distribution unit. Step 8 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE. Confirm that the original alarms or performances are cleared. ----End Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


623


8 Parts Replacement

8.14 Replacing the Power Switch on the DC Power Distribution Box This section describes how to replace a faulty power switch on the DC power distribution box.

Prerequisites None

Impact on System None

Tools, Equipment and Materials Cross screwdriver, screw

Background Information l

OptiX OSN 8800 uses the standard -48V/-60V DC power supply. The -48V/-60 DC power supply is distributed to the working subracks through the power box shown in Figure 8-32 and Figure 8-33 .

l

OptiX OSN 6800 uses the standard -48V/-60V DC power supply. The -48V/-60 DC power supply is distributed to the working subracks through the power box shown in Figure 8-34.

Figure 8-32 Front panel of the DC power distribution box in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64&8800 T32 Power supply output area

Power supply switch area

Power supply input area

A

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)



Power supply output area

B

624


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-33 Front panel of the DC power distribution box in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Power supply output area

+ 1

+ 2

+ 3

Power supply input area



Power supply output area

+

+

1

4

+ 2

+ 3

+ 4

Figure 8-34 Front panel of the DC power distribution box in OptiX OSN 6800 1

2

3

3

2

4

1

4

1. Output cable terminal

2. Grounding cable

3. Input cable terminal

4. Power switch

Procedure (Replacing a DC Power Distribution Box Other Than DPD63-8-8) 1.

Set the faulty switch on the DC power distribution box to the OFF position. The power distribution box can be seen in Figure 8-32. There are 4 power switches in each side.

2.

Loosen the captive screw on the front panel of the faulty power switch with the cross screwdriver as shown in Figure 8-35. Remove the faulty power switch from the DC power distribution box.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


625


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-35 Loosen the captive screw

3.

Loosen the two screws between the faulty power switch and the plastic protective shell to separate the power switch from the protective shell. See Figure 8-36. Figure 8-36 Loosen the two screws between the faulty power switch and the plastic protective shell

4.

Get a new power switch, and ensure the state is OFF.

5.

Install the new power switch and the plastic protective shell.

6.

Insert the new power switch into the DC power distribution box. Tighten the captive screw on the front panel of the new power switch with the cross screwdriver.

7.

Set the new power switch to the state of ON. Check RUN indicator of the PIU board which connects to the power distribution box through the new power switch. l If the RUN indicator is on, it indicates the new power distribution unit works normally.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


626


8 Parts Replacement

l If the RUN indicator is off, check if the connection of the input power cables is correct: – if the connection is wrong, reconnect the cables. – if the connection is correct, replace the power switch again.

8.15 Replacing the Fan Tray Assembly This section describes how to replace the fan tray assembly.


Impact on the System The equipment can work normally for three minutes when no fans are provided. When there is a fault in the fan tray assembly, replace it immediately to avoid any damage to the equipment due to power heat dissipation. Replacing the fan tray assembly does not interrupt service.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials ESD bag and U2000



Step 2 Review and record the current alarms on the NE. Step 3 Follow the steps below to replace the fan tray assembly on site. 1.

Remove the faulty fan tray assembly.

2.

Insert a spare fan tray assembly immediately.

3.

Put the fan tray assembly replaced into an ESD bag. NOTE

When the subrack is powered on for the first time, the fans rotate at a low or medium speed for the first 20 minutes. After 20 minutes, the fans rotate at the specified speed.


8.16 Replacing the Air Filter Replace the air filter periodically to ensure efficient heat dissipation from the equipment. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


627


8 Parts Replacement

Prerequisite None

Impact on System None


Precaution

CAUTION When pulling out the air filter during its replacement, do not pull out the fans. Gently pull out the air filter to prevent dust disturbance. NOTE

Air filter replacement It is recommended every six months.

Procedure (OptiX OSN 8800/6800) Step 1 Hold the grooves on the two sides of the air filter panel with two fingers and pull out the air filter. Figure 8-37 and Figure 8-38 shows the position of the air filter. Figure 8-37 Pulling out the air filter (OptiX OSN 8800)

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


628


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-38 Pulling out the air filter (OptiX OSN 6800)

Step 2 Gently slide the new air filter into the original position along the guide rails below the fan tray assembly. ----End

Procedure (OptiX OSN 3800) Step 1 Pull out the air filter by the handle. Figure 8-39 shows the position of the air filter. Figure 8-39 Pulling out the air filter(OptiX OSN 3800)

Fan Air filter

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


629


8 Parts Replacement

Step 2 Gently slide the new air filter into the original position along the guide rails on the left part of the fan tray assembly. ----End

8.17 Replacing SDI Components This section describes how to replace a component (such as fan module, power supply module, and control board) on the digital video O/E conversion chassis and how to replace the SDIspecific SFP module on the TOM board.

Prerequisite None

Impact on System l

Replacing a fan module has no impact on the existing services. NOTE

A fan module must be replaced in time after it is damaged. This prevents the SDI from being damaged due to excessively high working temperature.

l

Replacing a power supply module has no impact on the existing services if there are active and standby power supply modules. Otherwise, the digital video O/E conversion chassis is powered off during the replacement and thus the existing services are interrupted.

l

Replacing a control board has no impact on the existing services if there are active and standby control boards. NOTE

The preceding components in the digital video O/E conversion chassis are hot-swappable.

l

Replacing an SFP module interrupts the existing services. NOTE

This SFP module is dedicated for the SDI.

Tools, Equipment and Materials ESD bag, flathead screwdriver

Background Information The SDI consists of an O/E conversion chassis and the SFP module on the TOM board. The SFP module on the TOM board is specific for connecting to the SDI.

Procedure Replace a fan module, power supply module, or control board according to the following steps. For the steps of replacing an SFP module, see 8.10 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module. Step 1 Select a spare board. The name and model number of the new board must be the same as those of the original board. Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


630


8 Parts Replacement

Step 2 Use a flathead screwdriver to unfasten the fastening screws on the front panel of the module to be replaced. Then, remove the module from the SDI O/E conversion chassis and put it into an ESD bag. 1

Control Card Power Supply Module

Fan Module

2

Step 3 Insert a new module into the slot that houses the original module. Step 4 After the new module is positioned properly in the slot, use the flathead screwdriver to tighten the fastening screws on the front panel. ----End

8.18 Replacing the Subrack If the backplane of a subrack has bent pins or other defects, the subrack must be replaced. This section describes how to replace the subrack.

Prerequisites l


l


Impact on the System l

Impact on services: – When a subrack is replaced, all services carried by the subrack are interrupted. NOTE

You are advised to migrate important services or optimize ASON services to other subracks before you replace a subrack, minimizing impact on services.

l

Impact on communication: – When a subrack on a gateway NE (GNE) is replaced, the GNE will be unreachable and any non-GNEs connected to the GNE may be unreachable. Before replacing a subrack on a GNE, removing the gateway from this NE and switching it to a different NE is

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


631


8 Parts Replacement

recommended. For details on how to switch GNEs, see the U2000 Operator Guide for NG WDM NE Management. – If you replace the master subrack on a non-GNE, the master subrack and all slave subracks will be unreachable. If you replace a slave subrack on a non-GNE, the slave subrack will be unreachable, and other slave subracks that communicate with the master subrack through the slave subrack will be unavailable. l

Other impact: – All features, such as automatic level control (ALC) and automatic power equilibrium (APE), that involve multiple NEs will be affected.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, dustproof cap, fiber cleaning tissue, Phillips screwdriver, ESD bag, U2000

Precautions l

To ensure a safe subrack installation process, two engineers must work together. One holds the subrack while the other tightens screws that attach it to the rack.

l

Before replacing a subrack, prepare backup boards for any boards that are unprotected. If boards are damaged during subrack replacement, the backup boards can be used to restore services quickly.

l

Before replacing a subrack, ensure that labels with complete and accurate information are attached to all cables and fibers connected to the subrack.

l

During the subrack replacement process, do not power off or perform warm or cold reset on master or slave subracks related to the subrack being replaced.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


632


8 Parts Replacement

Subrack Appearance Figure 8-40 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack structure diagram

3

1

6

2

5 3 4

1. Board area



4. Air filter

5. Fiber spool

6. Mounting ear

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


633


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-41 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack structure diagram

3

6

1 5

2

3 4

1. Board area



4. Air filter

5. Fiber spool

6. Mounting ear

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


634


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-42 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack structure diagram

1

6

5 2 3 4

1. Board area



4. Air filter

5. Fiber spool

6. Mounting ear

Figure 8-43 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram 1

2

7

3 6

4 5

1. Indicator

2. Board area

3. Air filter


5. Fan tray

6. Fiber spool

7. Mounting ear

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


635


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-44 Appearance of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis

5 1 4 2

3

1. Grounding connector 2. Fiber frame 3. Board area 4. Antistatic jack 5. Fan indicator

Procedure Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. Step 2 Have a new subrack available to replace the target subrack. This new subrack must have the same name and be the same model as the target subrack. NOTE

Before replacing the target suback with a new subrack, ensure that there are no bent pins on the backplane connector of the new subrack.

Figure 8-45 Bent pins on the backplane connector

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


636


8 Parts Replacement

Step 3 Query and record information on current alarms for the target subrack. Step 4 Back up the NE database to the NMS server. 1.


2.



3.


4.




5.


6.


7.


Step 5 Use the switch on the power distribution unit (PDU) at the top of the rack to power off the target subrack. Step 6 Remove all cables and fibers connected to the target subrack. NOTE

Keep fiber connectors clear by capping them immediately after fibers are disconnected from the subrack. Also keep disconnected cables clean for later use.

Step 7 Loosen the screws for securing the target subrack using a Phillips screwdriver and remove the subrack. Place the subrack on an ESD pad. Step 8 Install the new subrack into the rack and secure it with screws. Step 9 Take the boards from the subrack that has been removed and install them on the new subrack. NOTE

Before installing a board on the new subrack, check that the connectors on the board are in good condition.

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


637


8 Parts Replacement

Figure 8-46 Position of connectors on a board

Figure 8-47 Example of a damaged connector

Step 10 Use the labels to reconnect the cables and fibers to the new subrack. Restore the original network cable connections between subracks. NOTE

Clean the fiber connectors with fiber cleaning tissues before reconnecting fibers.

Step 11 Use the switch on the PDU at the top of the rack to power on the new subrack. Step 12 Wait 20 minutes. Check that there are no new alarms reporting abnormalities in the new subrack. Step 13 Operate the subrack for 24 consecutive hours. If no alarm reporting abnormalities are generated during that period, the replacement process is a success and the new subrack is working properly. ----End

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)


638


9

9 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of the DWDM System

Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of the DWDM System NOTE

C-band 80-wavelength systems consist of even and odd wavelengths. The information about odd and even wavelengths is provided below: l

C_EVEN: indicates even-numbered wavelengths. In total there are 40 even wavelengths. The center frequency of the even wavelengths is within the range of 192.100 THz to 196.000 THz (center wavelength is within the range of 1529.55 nm to 1560.61 nm) and the frequency spacing is 100 GHz.

l

C_ODD: indicates odd-numbered wavelengths. In total there are 40 odd wavelengths. The center frequency of the odd wavelengths is within the range of 192.150 THz to 196.050 THz (center wavelength is within the range of 1529.16 nm to 1560.20 nm) and the frequency spacing is 100 GHz.

Table 9-1 Wavelengths and frequencies of a C-band 80-channel (spacing of 50 GHz) system

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Wavele ngth No.

Central Frequency (THz)

Central Wavelength (nm)

Wavele ngth No.



1

196.05

1529.16

41

194.05

1544.92

2

196.00

1529.55

42

194.00

1545.32

3

195.95

1529.94

43

193.95

1545.72

4

195.90

1530.33

44

193.90

1546.12

5

195.85

1530.72

45

193.85

1546.52

6

195.80

1531.12

46

193.80

1546.92

7

195.75

1531.51

47

193.75

1547.32

8

195.70

1531.90

48

193.70

1547.72

9

195.65

1532.29

49

193.65

1548.11

10

195.60

1532.68

50

193.60

1548.51

11

195.55

1533.07

51

193.55

1548.91


639


Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

9 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of the DWDM System

Wavele ngth No.



Wavele ngth No.



12

195.50

1533.47

52

193.50

1549.32

13

195.45

1533.86

53

193.45

1549.72

14

195.40

1534.25

54

193.40

1550.12

15

195.35

1534.64

55

193.35

1550.52

16

195.30

1535.04

56

193.30

1550.92

17

195.25

1535.43

57

193.25

1551.32

18

195.20

1535.82

58

193.20

1551.72

19

195.15

1536.22

59

193.15

1552.12

20

195.10

1536.61

60

193.10

1552.52

21

195.05

1537.00

61

193.05

1552.93

22

195.00

1537.40

62

193.00

1553.33

23

194.95

1537.79

63

192.95

1553.73

24

194.90

1538.19

64

192.90

1554.13

25

194.85

1538.58

65

192.85

1554.54

26

194.80

1538.98

66

192.80

1554.94

27

194.75

1539.37

67

192.75

1555.34

28

194.70

1539.77

68

192.70

1555.75

29

194.65

1540.16

69

192.65

1556.15

30

194.60

1540.56

70

192.60

1556.55

31

194.55

1540.95

71

192.55

1556.96

32

194.50

1541.35

72

192.50

1557.36

33

194.45

1541.75

73

192.45

1557.77

34

194.40

1542.14

74

192.40

1558.17

35

194.35

1542.54

75

192.35

1558.58

36

194.30

1542.94

76

192.30

1558.98

37

194.25

1543.33

77

192.25

1559.39

38

194.20

1543.73

78

192.20

1559.79

39

194.15

1544.13

79

192.15

1560.20

40

194.10

1544.53

80

192.10

1560.61


640


10

10 Nominal Central Wavelengths of the CWDM System

Nominal Central Wavelengths of the CWDM System

Table 10-1 Nominal central wavelengths of the CWDM system

Issue 01 (2012-09-30)

Wavelengt h No.

Wavelength (nm)

Wavelength No.

Wavelength (nm)

11

1471

15

1551

12

1491

16

1571

13

1511

17

1591

14

1531

18

1611


641

OSN 8800 6800 3800 V100R006C03 Installing, Operating and Maintaining Your Network(for Field Engineer) 01

Recommend Documents